Technical Specifications Permit Set Terminal Cooling ... - Morganti

Palm Beach International Airport 

Technical Specifications Permit Set 

Terminal Cooling Tower and Chiller Replacement 

PREPARED FOR: 

Palm Beach County Department of Airports 

December 22, 2011 

PREPARED BY: 

JOHNSON, LEVINSON, RAGAN, DAVILA, INC. 

IN ASSOCIATION WITH: 

Ricondo & Associates, Inc. 

Colome & Associates, Inc. 

Hillers Electrical Engineering, Inc. 

Master Consulting Engineers, Inc. 

Ricondo & Associates, Inc. (R&A) prepared this document for the stated purposes as expressly set forth herein and for the sole use 

of Palm Beach County Department of Airports and its intended recipients. The techniques and methodologies used in preparing this 

document are consistent with industry practices at the time of preparation.

Index of Specifications 

Division Section Title 

01010 Summary of the Work 

01200 Project Meeting 

01 – General Requirements 01300 Submittals 

01600 Products 

01700 Project Closeout 

01800 General Commissioning Requirements 

03 – Concrete 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 

04 – Masonry 

04200 Unit Masonry 

04230 Reinforced Unit Masonry 

05 – Metals 05120 Structural Steel 

08 – Openings 

15 – Mechanical 

16 – Electrical 

08114 Steel Door Frames 

08711 Door Hardware 


15000 General Provisions 

15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 

15073 Mechanical Demolition 

15085 Identification 

15100 Valves 

15121 Expansion Compensation 

15130 Thermometer and Gauges 

15141 Hangers and Supports 

15170 Motors 

15200 Vibration Isolation 

15252 Pipe and Equipment Insulation 

15510 Hydronic Piping 

15515 Hydronic Specialties 

15540 HVAC Pumps 

15684 Centrifugal Water Chillers 

15712 Mechanical Induced Draft Cooling Tower 

15900 Controls and Instrumentation 

15990 Start-Up Requirements for Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning (HVAC) 

Systems 

15991 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) of Heating, Ventilating & Air Conditioning 

(HVAC) Systems (For Reference Only) 

15992 Tests–Piping Systems 

15995 Commissioning 

16010 Basic Electrical Requirements 

16015 Electrical System Analysis 

16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

16110 Raceways 

16120 Conductors 

16349 Medium Voltage Motor Starters 

16450 Grounding 

16480 Low Voltage Motor Control 

16950 Electrical Testing 

Terminal Cooling Tower and Chiller Replacement i Task I–11–PBI-R-046 

Palm Beach County, Florida December 2011 

Permit Set

Division 1 

General Requirements

SUMMARY OF THE WORK 

PART 1. GENERAL 

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: 

SECTION 01010 


A. The Work includes the following listed elements and the performance of other Work as 

described on the drawings and as indicated herein. Work for all elements shall include all 

effort that may be necessary for the proper completion of the specific element. Contractor’s 

effort shall include preparation and submission of details for acceptance by the Engineer for 

items or elements not specifically shown or specified. 

The Work consists of demolition and replacement of selected mechanical system equipment 

and related work to provide a completely functional system. 

1. Mechanical: 

a. Demolition and replacement of mechanical equipment (chillers, cooling towers, 

pumps). 

b. Piping replacement/modifications. 

c. Controls components. 

d. Test and Balance/Commissioning. 

2. Electrical System: 

a. Perform electrical modifications in support of mechanical equipment replacement. 

3. Structural: 

a. Perform structural modifications in support of mechanical/architectural equipment 

replacement. 

4. General Construction: 

a. Demolition of selected doors and replacement with new doors and frames. 

b. Cutting, removal, and patching of asphaltic pavement and sub-base. 

Terminal Cooling Tower and Chiller Replacement 01010-1 Task I–11–PBI-R-046 



B. Special Requirements: 


1. The Airport terminal has the potential of being impacted for the duration of the 

project. All work required under this Agreement shall be coordinated with the Owners 

on-site representative. 

NOTE: Any outage period shall be kept to a minimum, and be closely 

coordinated with the Owners representative. 

2. The Contractor’s access to the site shall be as defined by the Owner at the pre-award 

meeting. 

3. The Contractor, Subcontractors and their employees shall be prohibited from using 

any of the Owner’s facilities such as restrooms, and shall be confined to those 

immediate areas necessary to accomplish their work and as designated by the 

Owner. 

4. A construction trailer is not required but may be provided if desired by the Contractor. 

Coordinate location with Owner. 

5. The Contractor shall have a superintendent present whenever any work is being 

performed, including work of subcontractors. 

6. Contractor shall provide telephone for its use. 

7. No smoking is permitted in the building, smoking outdoors shall only be allowed in 

areas designated by the Owner. 

1.2 LOCATION OF PROJECT: 

A. The project is located at Palm Beach International Airport (PBIA), 1000 James L. Turnage 

Blvd., West Palm Beach, Florida. 

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. The drawings and Bid Cover Sheet, Contractor Proposal and Subcontractor List, 

Supplementary Terms and Conditions, General Terms and Conditions and other Division 1 

Specification Sections, apply to Work of this Section. Division 0 shall supersede any conflicts 

with Divisions 1-16 or the drawings. 

B. Definitions 





1. The term "Project Manual" as used herein is the volume which includes the bidding 

requirements, Conditions and the Contract and the Specifications. 

2. The term "product" as used herein, includes materials, systems and equipment. 

3. The term "supplier" as used herein, includes any firm or organization furnishing or 

delivering products directly to the job site and because of such direct delivery, could 

be construed under the lien laws of the State in which the Work is being performed 

as having lien rights against the project. Suppliers of material and equipment, 

delivering to Contractor of Subcontractor on an open account basis and not having 

lien rights on the Work, will not be considered suppliers within the meaning of the 

Contract Documents. 

4. A bidder selected to enter into a Contract with the Owner for work included under the 

bidder's proposal is termed an "Awardee", until such time as he is awarded a contract 

and becomes the Contractor. 

5. Where "request", "approval", "satisfactory" and similar words appear, it is the request, 

approval or satisfaction of the Owner that is intended. 

6. Where "complete" is used, it shall mean complete with all connections, supports, 

attachments and incidental items necessary for a finished and properly operating 

assembly or installation. 

7. Where "drawing" is used, it shall mean all plans and detail drawings, both large and 

small scale, furnished by the Owner or Engineer for the purpose giving instructions 

and showing the Work to be done. 

8. The term "furnish" - to supply, install and test complete and ready for beneficial 

operation by the Owner. 

9. The term "install" - to supply, mount, connect and test complete and ready for 

beneficial operation by the Owner 

10. The term "connect" - to bring-service(s) to point of installation and make all final 

connections of the service(s) to the installed equipment, and provide all 

miscellaneous auxiliary appurtenances necessary to make operable for its intended 

use. 

11. The term "provide" - to furnish, install, and test complete and ready for beneficial 

operation by the Owner. 

12. The term "Owner" is hereby defined as Palm Beach County Department of 

Airports (D.O.A.), or their duly appointed representative and agents. 





13. The term "Engineer" is hereby defined as Ricondo & Associates, or their duly 

appointed representative and agents. 

14. The term “Contractor” is hereby defined as the Construction Manager (CM) hired by 

the Owner. The term Contractor and CM are used interchangeably and refer to the 

Owner’s CM. 

1.4 WORK UNDER SINGLE CONTRACT 

A. The Owner intends to award a single prime contract to a Construction Manager (CM) for the 

Work to be performed for this Project. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 

the General Terms and Conditions and the Supplementary Terms and Conditions in 

accomplishing his Work on this Project. 

B. General Construction Contract: Include all items specified in Divisions 0 through 16 of the 

specifications and Work shown on the Drawings. 

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for demolition and legal disposal of existing items and 

debris created relative to this contract. 

D. The "Contract Documents", as defined in the General Conditions, include "the Drawings and 

Specifications". Although Drawings are grouped and identified by classification of the Work, 

the Contractor shall be responsible for the Work as specified herein and as indicated on the 

Drawings. Although the majority of the Drawings are "to scale", the Contractor is directed to 

use indicated dimensions for determining material quantities and for other reasons. All 

dimensions, sizes of equipment, and proposed location/routing shall be field confirmed with 

the available space prior to ordering equipment or fabrication of work. No additional monies 

will be allowed due to the Contractor using "scaling instruments" to determine material 

quantities or for other reasons. 

E. No assignment or subcontracting of the work will be permitted with express written 

permission by the Owner. 

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the construction schedule, 

phasing and the general supervision of the Work. 

1. General supervision shall require a full time supervisor employed by the Contractor 

dedicated to this project, who shall be present at all times work is being performed. 

2. The Contractor shall read the specifications and drawings for his subcontractors for 

fixed equipment and the like to be incorporated and attached or built in to the Work 

and familiarize himself with their requirements and responsibilities to enable the 

required coordination and supervision. 





3. The Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors and subcontractors in notifying 

them when the Work is at a stage to require their services and shall notify the Owner 

in the event that such other subcontractors do not carry out their responsibilities in 

connection with such notification. 

B. The Contractor shall cooperate with and assist his subcontractors in the preparation of 

construction, progress and procedures, schedule of product deliveries, and their effect on the 

overall project progress and completion. The subcontractors shall cooperate in getting their 

Work and the Work of their subcontractors completed according to the schedule as prepared 

and maintained by the Contractor. Each subcontractor shall immediately notify the Contractor 

of any delay in delivery of products or the scheduled date of completion that may affect the 

total progress of construction. 

C. The Contractor shall field verify grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as shown on the 

drawings and shall report errors and inconsistencies discovered in the information furnished 

by the Drawings to the Owner, prior to commencing of the work. The Contractor will perform 

the following: 

1. Establish initially and maintain major grades, lines, levels and bench marks 

necessary and required by the Work. 

D. No shutdown or outage of an existing system shall be allowed without the written permission 

of the Owner. A minimum fourteen (14) day prior notice shall be provided. Contractor shall 

notify the Owner’s representative 48 hours in advance to confirm any previously approved 

connection to or shutdown of existing utilities. The Contractor shall identify all areas and 

systems that will be affected by the outage and notify the Owner in writing of the outage, 

anticipated duration, system(s) affected, and the spaces affected. 

E. Except as otherwise agreed to, normal working hours will be Monday through Friday when 

the building is normally occupied by the Owner. Where work results in an outage of any 

system or service, it shall be scheduled to occur after normal occupancy hours, over 

weekends or holidays when the building is not otherwise in use. 

F. Any work by the Contractor which impacts the on-going operations of the Owner, shall be 

completed on an expedited basis to include work on second and/or third shifts, weekends, 

and holidays. 

1.6 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES 

A. Except as specifically approved by Owner the Contractor shall secure and pay for all licenses 

as may be necessary for the proper execution and completion of his Work, which are 

applicable at the time the bids are received whether or not effective or scheduled to go into 

effect, and shall obtain and pay the cost of any approvals, permits, and fees that may be 

required by the local governing political entity. 

B. Pay all necessary sales, consumer and use taxes. 

C. Contractor shall obtain all Building Permits and water meters. 





D. A copy of all required permits, licenses, certificates and approvals shall be delivered to the 

engineer and a copy shall be posted in a prominent location at the work site prior to 

commencement of the work. 

E. Observations of installed work shall be performed by the Engineer. All work shall be 

available to the Engineer to permit observation for general conformance to the contract 

documents where such services have been contracted by the Owner. Work shall not be 

covered until accepted or otherwise agreed by the Engineer. 

F. The Contractor shall give notices and comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and 

orders of public authority bearing on the performance of his work. If the contractor observes 

that the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer 

in writing and necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate notification. If the 

Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and 

regulations, and without such notice to the Engineer, he shall assume full responsibility 

therefore and shall bear costs attributable thereto. 

1.7 LABOR AND MATERIALS 

A. Unless otherwise specifically noted, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, 

equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, heat, transportation, and other 

facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of his Work, 

whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the 

Work. Existing water and electricity will be available to the Contractor at the Owner’s 

expense. 

B. The Contractor shall at times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees 

or other persons carrying out work or his contract and shall not permit employment of unfit 

person or persons or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to them. 

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner concerning the delivery and removal of 

materials, equipment and other items to and from the site. 

D. Materials, finishes, sheen and colors of all new construction and patching shall match the 

existing unless specifically noted otherwise. 

E. Samples of all materials and finishes shall be submitted to the engineer and owner for 

acceptance prior to commencement of the work. 

F. All materials used for the project shall be new, first quality and free from defects, installed in 

accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. 

1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, and patching that may be required to 

complete his Work. The contractor shall not endanger other Work by cutting or otherwise 

altering other work and shall not cut or alter other Work except with written consent of the 

Owner. Costs caused by defective or ill-timed Work shall be borne by the Contractor. 





B. Cutting or restoring performed by the Contractor which is condemned by the Owner shall 

have such correction or restoration work performed when so instructed. The cost of such 

Work shall be borne by the contractor for defective Work. 

C. Cutting and patching of concrete walls, floors, and decks shall be performed in neat and 

workmanlike manner, using a coring machine or concrete saw. Openings over 6 inch 

diameter must be formed by the Contractor for such Work. After coring, the Contractor shall 

pack and grout openings around sleeves or Work penetrating the floor or deck which he is 

furnishing. 

D. The Contractor shall not perform any cutting that may impair the strength of the building or its 

components. No holes except for small screws or bolts may be drilled in the beams or other 

structural members for the purpose of supporting or attaching mechanical work without 

obtaining prior approval from the Owner. 

E. Work shall be done in a neat manner by mechanics skilled in their trades, and the final Work 

shall be subject to approval by the Owner. 

1.9 VERIFICATIONS OF EXISTING DIMENSIONS 

A. When verification of existing dimensions is required, the Contractor requiring said verification 

for the construction or fabrication of his material shall be solely responsible for the 

procurement of the field information. 

1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 

A. The project facility will be in use when the Work for this Project is being performed. The 

Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of Work with the Owner. Every effort must be 

made to keep downtime, construction debris and dust to a minimum. 

1. At the end of each day, the Contractor must provide protection for weather and 

security. 

2. The Contractor shall understand this facility will be fully functioning during the 

construction period. The Contractor shall proceed with construction in a manner so 

as not to interfere with the operating of the facility and any action on his part that may 

affect this will be addressed in writing to the Owner 14 days prior to proceeding with 

that portion of Work and proceed only after the Owner's approval. 

3. When working within the building, the Contractor shall dispose of all waste and debris 

at the end of each shift. When working over a weekend or holiday period, waste and 

debris shall be disposed of by the end of the weekend or holiday. The Contractor 

shall thoroughly clean (vacuum and mop) all non-mechanical room areas at the end 

of each shift/weekend/holiday prior to re-occupancy by the building occupants. In 

addition, any ceiling tiles which have been removed shall be replaced; any door 

openings which have not been completed shall be sealed using plywood. 





4. All contractor personnel shall comply with D.O.A. badging requirements. 

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for relocating all utilities such as water lines, electric, etc. 

that may be within the limits of construction, but have not been addressed by the Drawings. 

All items shall be relocated at locations and at times approved by the Owner. 

The Contractor shall provide a time schedule and notification to the Owner in writing and 

receive approval from the Owner prior to relocating the item. The item shall remain fully 

functional during occupied times and shall be non-functional only at times approved by the 

Owner. 

C. The Contractor shall give the Owner fourteen (14) days written notice of his intent to perform 

work within the facility that may produce an unusual amount of noise dust or debris that may 

interfere with the functioning of facility. 

D. The Contractor shall give the Owner written notice prior to cutting any utility lines and the 

Contractor shall repair or replace as needed any utilities that he may render non-functional at 

his expense. 

1.11 SEQUENCING AND PHASING 

A. The Contractor shall acquaint himself in detail with the Owner's requirements for maintaining 

facilities in use for normal operations with minimum interruption throughout construction 

period, and shall plan and schedule his operations to provide such. 

B. The Contractor shall submit a complete comprehensive proposed construction sequence 

schedule for the entire work, showing all dates, activities, inspection events for trades, and 

other related data, such as coordinated submittal schedules. Schedule shall be updated at 

least monthly, or more frequently as directed by the Engineer. 

C. The sequence schedule shall conform to all of the Owner s requirements for the use of the 

existing facility with minimum interruption to normal operations. 

1.12 STAGING AREA 

A. The Contractor will be permitted to use a portion of the site for staging necessary in the 

performance of the work, which is acceptable to the Owner. The area shall not interfere with 

the operation of The Owner. 

B. The Contractor shall coordinate requirements for moving equipment to the staging area and 

hoisting/placement into the equipment room(s) and/or locations with the Owner. Move-in 

routes shall be determined, as well as lay down/set down areas. 

C. The Contractor is responsible for all damages to exterior improvements, walkways, curbs, 

pavement, landscaping, grass areas, underground piping, conduits and similar items caused 

by execution of the work. 




1.13 TRASH REMOVAL 


A. All trash, debris, rubbish, and other waste material resulting from the Contractors 

performance of the Work shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. 

Disposal of any materials for this project shall be at approved land fill/disposal sites. 

B. The Contractor shall maintain the site in an orderly manner and to prevent interference with 

the tenants. Trash shall be removed at regular intervals during the performance of the work 

and when trash receptacles (dumpsters) are full. 

C. At the completion of the Work the Contractor shall clean all areas of the facility affected as a 

result of the Contractor's operation. 

1.14 SCHEDULES AND REPAIR: 

A. The Contractor shall develop a construction plan for the performance of the work described 

by the contract documents. The plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and 

acceptance. 

B. The plan shall include, but is not limited to, the sequence of the construction, repair 

procedures and demolition plan. 

C. The sequencing of the work shall be scheduled to minimize interference or hindrance with the 

operations of the Owner. 

D. Owner will provide access to each of the work repair areas as may be reasonably necessary. 

E. Keep existing driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the 

Owner and the Owner's Employees. 

1.15 CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. The Contractor shall conform to and comply with the State of Florida Building Code which 

shall be the prevailing Code for the Work. The following codes are also applicable to the work 

of this Contract, and shall be complied with by the Contractor where applicable. Where 

conflicting requirements occur, the more stringent code shall apply. 

1. Florida Building Code, 2007, with 2009 Amendments 

2. Florida Plumbing Code, 2007, with 2009 Amendments 

3. National Electrical Code (NEC, 2001) 

4. Florida Mechanical Code, 2007, with 2009 Amendments 




5. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code 

6. Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction. 


7. Existing Buildings, Florida Building Code, 2007, with 2009 Amendments 

8. NFPA Codes, Latest Adopted Edition. 

9. AWWA Standards, Latest Edition. 

10. Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 

1.16 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION 

A. Contractor shall determine requirements for and obtain inspection for all work and trades as 

necessary and as required by the Owner. 

1.17 ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE 

A. The Contractor’s installation of any products on a surface or substrate shall constitute full 

acceptance of the condition of the surface or substrate as sound and appropriate to receive 

the Contractor’s Work. Defective Work resulting from unsound or unacceptable surfaces or 

substrates shall be repaired at the Contractor’s sole expense, including repairs or corrective 

action required of the surface or substrate. 

1.18 CONTRACTORS USE OF EXISTING BUILDING 

A. Each Contractor shall at all times maintain the existing building in a safe and watertight 

condition throughout the duration of the Work. 

1.19 SAFETY AND PROTECTION: 

A. The Contractor shall exercise diligent effort to protect all existing elements of the facility, 

which are to remain, from damage as a result of the Contractor's performance of the work. 

B. The Contractor shall develop and implement a safety program for the entire period of the 

performance of the Work. The program shall include, but is not limited to, protection of the 

general public from any consequence of the Contractor's operation and the performance of 

the Work. 

C. Employees working above ground level shall comply with all O.S.H.A. regulations and 

requirements. 





D. Any staging, scaffolding or lifting devices to be used by the Contractor shall comply with all 

O.S.H.A. requirements. 

E. Employees, at all times, shall wear approved hard hats, work shoes, long trousers and shirts. 

Shorts and inappropriate shirts shall not be allowed on the site. 

F. While working on stages, scaffolding, balcony and building areas above the ground, all tools 

shall be properly secured. 

G. The Contractor shall provide appropriate barricades around the perimeter of all work and 

staging areas and entrances to the building and site. 

H. The Contractor shall remove all scaffolding from the building and secure the site in the event 

of gale weather or hurricane warnings which include the place of work. 

I. The Contractor shall abide by all of the Owner’s security requirements. 

1.20 UTILITIES: 

A. The Contractor may use at no cost to the Contractor, water and electricity available at the 

building for the performance of the work. Utility requirements beyond those available on site 

shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall not overload any 

existing utilities. Should the Contractors use of any utility cause damage to any existing 

equipment, the Contractor shall bear all costs of replacement. 

1.21 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 

A. Contractor shall at all times maintain a complete set of drawings available for review at the 

job site. All deviations and/or modifications from the original construction drawings shall be 

noted. At the time of final inspection, an accurate set of "as-built" drawings shall be delivered 

to the Engineer. 

PART 2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 

PART 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) 

END OF SECTION 




PROJECT MEETINGS 


1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 

SECTION 01200 


A. The work of this section shall be included as part of the Contract Documents of the 

Contractor on this project. 

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 

A. The CM shall be required to have present at each of the following project meetings, a 

representative acceptable to the Engineer/Owner. The designated representative shall have 

sufficient authority and knowledge to make decisions for the Contractor he is representing on 

matters affecting this project. 

B. Contractors or representatives unable to attend a specified meeting shall have an acceptable 

alternate representative designated or shall notify the Engineer/Owner not less than 7 days 

prior to date of meeting. 

C. Pre-Construction Meeting: 

1. The purpose of this meeting is to review submittals that will be required by the 

Contractor and to review the project procedures that are to be followed during the 

progress of construction. 

2. The Contractor shall submit preliminary submittal schedule, comprehensive project 

progress schedule in a bar chart format and phasing/outage plant for the entire 

project. 

3. Advance written notice of the Pre-Construction Conference date, time, and place will 

be sent to the successful bidder by the Engineer/Owner. 

D. Progress Meetings: 

1. Progress meetings will be established on a regular basis to review the progress of 

construction of the Contractor. Subcontractors with work in progress or those soon to 

start shall be required to attend meetings. The frequency of these meetings will be 

determined based upon construction activity. 





2. Other meetings will be established as deemed necessary by the Engineer and 

Owner. Typical meetings include discussion of phasing/outages, commissioning and 

similar requirements. 

PART 2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 

PART 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) 





SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS 




A. The Work of this Section shall be included as a part of the Contract Documents of the 

contractor on this Project. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE 

A. Prepare and transmit a Submittals Schedule showing that required submittals and their initial 

submittal dates as required for coordination of the Work. 

B. Transmit the submittals schedule within 10 days after execution of Owner-Contractor 

Agreement. 

C. Assign each required submittal a sequential "Submittal Number" reflecting the chronological 

order in which the submittal is to be transmitted to the Project Engineer. 

D. Coordinate different submittals for the same or directly related units of work to avoid delays 

resulting from that Project Engineer's need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. 

No extension of time or substitution of materials will be granted as a result of failure to 

transmit submittals to the Project Engineer sufficiently in advance of the Work. 

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 

A. Submittals are to be submitted directly to the Engineer, with one (1) copy to the Owner. 

B. The Contractor on this Project shall provide submittals in accordance with the requirements 

of this section. Where a submittal is required by a Contractor but assistance needed from 

others, the Contractor shall participate and cooperate to expedite each submittal. 

C. Where submission of samples, shop drawings, or other items are required from suppliers or 

subcontractor, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that the submittal items 

required are complete and properly submitted and corrected and resubmitted at the time and 

in the order required so as not to delay the progress of the Work. 

D. The Contractor shall check shop drawings, samples, and other submittals and submit them to 

the Engineer with a letter of transmittal giving his approval, comments, and suggestions. 





E. Sequentially number the transmittal forms, submittal materials, and subsequent 

correspondence concerning a submittal with the submittal number established in the 

Submittal Schedule. Re-submittals to have original number with an alphabetic suffix. 

F. Mark each component of submittal with a permanent label for identification. Provide the 

following information on the label: 

1. Project Name 

2. Submittal Number (as outlined above] 

3. Date 

4. Name and address of the Project Engineer 

5. Name and address of General Contractor 

6. Name and address of Subcontractor 

7. Name and address of Supplier 

8. Name of manufacturer 

9. Number and title of related specification Section 

10. Drawing number and detail references as necessary 

11. Similar definitive information as necessary 

G. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed and dated, certifying that review, verification of Product 

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information it in 

accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 

H. Deliver submittals to Engineer and Owner at their business address. Coordinate submission 

of related items. 

I. Specifically note and identify variation from Contract Documents and Product or system 

limitations no matter how minor which may be detrimental to successful performance of the 

completed Work. 

J. Provide space for contractor and Engineer review stamp. 





K. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify changes made since previous submittal. 

L. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties, including: subcontractors, 

suppliers, fabricators, manufacturer's, installer, and others as required for proper 

performance of the work. 

M. Instruct parties to promptly report inability to comply with provisions. 

N. Prevent incorporation into the Work of products requiring submittal until such submittal has 

been approved by the Engineer. 

O. Do not reproduce Contract Documents as the basis of submittal. 

P. Maintain copies of approved submittals at the project site for quality control comparisons 

throughout the course of performing the Work. 

Q. The Contractor shall prepare and review, stamp with his approval, and submit, with 

reasonable promptness or within the specified time periods and in orderly sequence so as to 

cause no delay in the Work submittals required by these Contract Documents or 

subsequently required by modifications. 

R. The Engineer shall review and take action on submittals with reasonable promptness, so as 

to cause no delay in the progress. A reasonable period of time for review and action of 

submittals shall be as specified herein, but in no case shall it be less than 14 calendar days 

from the time it is received by the Engineer until the time the submittal is marked and 

forwarded or returned. Contractors shall allow sufficient mailing time for submittals. 

S. Where non-specific catalog cut sheets are provided that include optional features or materials 

of construction, they shall be clearly identified to demonstrate items are being furnished in 

compliance with the specification. Submittals which are not clearly marked will be returned 

without review. 

T. Submittals for items not listed in the specification will be returned without review. 

U. Any submittal which proposes a deviation in the project requirements shall have the deviation 

clearly indicated. It shall include a statement from the Contractor noting why the deviation is 

necessary, and the Contractor has determined the deviation will not adversely impact 

equipment/system operation, energy consumption or maintenance. 

1.4 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST 

A. Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major 

products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of 

each product. 

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or 

catalog designation, and reference standards. 




1.5 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS 

A. List of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers 


1. The Contractor shall submit with his/her bid, a list of the major subcontractors to be 

used on this project. The list shall be Complete with names, street addresses, city, 

state, and zip code. List shall be complete including requested subcontractors, 

suppliers, and manufacturers. 

2. The Contractor shall submit a complete list for all areas of Work where 

subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, shop drawings, and samples, 

including products and colors are required as submittals on this Project. The 

Contractor shall complete this requested list and provide 5 copies to the Engineer. 

3. In addition to the names of subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, the 

Contractor shall be aware of the required dates that shop drawings and samples are 

to be submitted for approval and the critical date for delivery. Dates submitted for 

shop drawings and samples shall be realistic and be coordinated with the Progress 

Schedule for critical dates that affect the progress of Construction. 

4. The Contractor shall submit for approval a resume for each major subcontractor 

project manager and superintendent (mechanical, electrical and controls), for 

approval by the Engineer, demonstrating similar experience on not fewer than five (5) 

projects of a similar size and scope, within the last seven (7) years. 

B. Construction Schedules 

1. The Contractor in cooperation with the subcontractors on the Project shall prepare 

and submit to the Engineer for review two copies of an estimated schedule of 

construction for the entire Work. Schedule shall be submitted at the time of the preconstruction 

meeting. After review by the Engineer the Contractor shall provide 2 

copies to each subcontractor working on this Project. 

2. The Progress Schedule shall be prepared in bar chart format and submitted to the 

Engineer prior to first progress payment request. 

3. Content of Progress Schedule shall be coordinated with the Contractor's Schedule of 

Values and List of Shop Drawings and Samples. Provide a complete sequence of 

construction by activity for each item of work. 

4. Progress Schedule shall be regularly reviewed at the weekly meetings and updated 

as required. Date for time of completion shall remain unchanged unless revised by 

Change Order and the requirements of the General and Supplementary Conditions. 





5. Failure to Make Adequate Progress: If the Contractor fails to make progress which, 

in the opinion of the Owner, is not adequate to assure timely completion of the 

Project, the Engineer/Owner, in its sole discretion may, in addition to other remedies: 

C. Schedule of Values 

a. Require the Contractor to utilize additional manpower, equipment, or 

materials. 

b. Require the Contractor to utilize overtime on certain activities. 

c. Withhold progress payments in whole or in part according to the 

provisions of the General Conditions. 

1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Values for 

review within 14 days after notice is given to proceed with work. The Schedule of 

Values shall consist of a complete breakdown of the Contractor's contract sum 

showing the various items of the Work, divided so as to facilitate the approval of 

payments to the Contractor for work completed. The schedule of Values shall be 

prepared on AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet, showing the breakdown of 

items of Work and supported by such data to substantiate its correctness as the 

Owner may require, or other such similar form adopted by the Owner. 

2. The contract breakdown shall be the same form as that to be used in submitting 

request for payments. Each item of Work shall have indicated a separate cost for 

labor and material. This schedule when reviewed by the Owner shall be used as the 

basis of approving payments along with establishing percentages of Work complete. 

The schedule of values shall include a line item for each subcontractor for 

commissioning effort. 

3. Schedule of Values shall be coordinated with the Construction Schedules such that 

the percentages of Work completed closed related to the values for the Work shown 

on the request for payments. At the beginning of the Project, the Contractor shall 

prepare a schedule of monthly payments showing the amount the Contractor may 

require for the Work proposed to be completed. The purpose of this schedule is to 

allow the Owner to determine what amounts of funds he will be required to have 

available each month during the progress of construction for progress payments. 

D. Project Use Site Plan 

1. The Contractor shall prepare a proposed project use site plan and submit 2 copies to 

the Engineer for review. 

2. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas within the areas indicated 

and as approved by the Engineer and as permitted by law, ordinances, and permits. 

Site shall not be unreasonably encumbered with materials, products, or construction 

equipment. 




E. Shop Drawings and Product Data 


1. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, 

brochures, and other data which are prepared by the Contractor or a subcontractor, 

sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor, and which illustrates some 

portion of the Work. 

2. Product data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, 

brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a 

material, product or system for some portion of the Work. 

3. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems, or 

equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be entitled to 

rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certification. 

4. By approving and submitting shop drawings, product data, and similar submittals, the 

contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all field 

measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar 

data, and that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the 

requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents prior to submitting. 

Submittals not properly checked and approved by the Contractor prior to submitting 

will be returned without approval, requiring re-submittal. 

5. The Contractor shall make corrections required and shall resubmit the required 

number of corrected copies of shop drawings until approved. The Contractor shall 

direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings to revisions other 

than the corrections requested on previous submissions. 

6. The Engineer will review shop drawings only for conformance with the design 

concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. 

The Engineer's review of a separate item shall not indicate review of an assembly in 

which the item functions. 

7. The Engineer's review of shop drawing shall not relieve the Contractor of 

responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents 

unless the Contractor has informed the Engineer in writing of such deviation at the 

time of submission and the Engineer has given written approval to the specific 

deviation, nor shall the Owner's action relieve the Contractor from responsibility for 

errors or omissions in the shop drawings. 

8. Notations and remarks added to shop drawings by the Engineer are to insure 

compliance to Drawings and Specifications and do not imply a requested or approved 

change to contract cost. 





9. Should deviations, discrepancies, or conflict between shop drawings and contract 

drawings and specifications be discovered, either prior to or after review, Contract 

Documents shall control and be followed. 

10. The following number of shop drawings and product data submittals shall be made 

on this project. Where an insufficient number of copies are submitted, no action will 

be taken until the proper number of copes have been received. Additional copies 

beyond the number required will be discarded. 

Schedule of Required Shop Drawings and Product Data 

a. Minimum Eight (8) Copies Required: Breakdown as follows: 

-Six (6) Contractors 

-One (1) Owner 

One (1) copy - Contractor's office file 

One (1) copy - Field copy (Job Record) 

Three (3) copies - Owner's manual 

One (1) copy - Supplier or Subcontractor 

One (1) copy - Owner Site Representative 

-One (1) Engineer 

One (1) copy – Engineers Office file 

11. Shop drawings will be marked as follows: Contractor shall take the following action 

for each respective marking: 

a. APPROVED - Copies will be distributed as indicated under above 

schedule. 

b. "FURNISH AS CORRECTED" - Contractor may proceed with fabrication, 

taking into account the necessary corrections. Corrected shop drawings 

shall be resubmitted before fabrication of that Work is completed. 

c. "REJECTED" - Contractor will be required to resubmit shop drawings in 

their entirety. No fabrication or installation shall be started until shop 

drawings so marked have been completely revised, resubmitted, and 

marked by Engineer according to preceding paragraph 1 or 2. 

d. "REVISE AND SUBMIT" - The Contractor will be required to make the 

corrections noted and resubmit. No release of products or fabrication 

shall be performed until the revised data is furnished and approved 

according to paragraphs 1 or 2. 

e. "SUBMIT SPECIFIC ITEM" - The Contractor is directed that the product 

submitted does not satisfy the requirements of the documents and this 




F. Manufacturer's Instructions 


particular product should not be resubmitted. The Contractor should 

resubmit on a product as recognized in the documents as meeting the 

project requirements. 

1. Where specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed 

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and 

finishing, in quantities specified for product data. 

2. Identify conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Document. 

G. Manufacture's Certificates 

1. When specified in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer's certificate 

to Engineer for review, in quantities specified for product data. 

2. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit 

supporting reference data, affidavits, warranties and certifications as appropriate. 

3. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or products, but must 

be acceptable to Engineer. 

H. Miscellaneous Submittal 

1. Inspection and Test Reports: Classify each inspection and test report as either a 

"shop drawing" or "product data" depending upon whether the report is specifically 

prepared for the Project, or a standard publication of workmanship testing at the point 

of production. Process inspection and testing reports accordingly. 

2. Standards: Where submittal of a standard is required, and where copies of the 

standards are specified as an integral part of "Product Data" submittal, submit a 

single copy of the standard to the Project Engineer for his use. 

I. List or A.I.A. Documents (Contractors Source) 

1. Except as may be otherwise required in Division 0, the following documents shall be 

furnished and executed by the Contractor(s) and submitted to the Owner at various 

stages of the Project Work. 

G702 - Application and Certification for Payment 

G703 - Continuation Sheet 

G70S - Certificate of insurance 




G706 - Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debt and Claims 

G706A - Contractor' Affidavit of Release of Liens 

G707 - Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment 

G707A - Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release 

PART 2. PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 

PART 3. EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) 






PRODUCTS 



SECTION 01600 


A. The Work of this section shall be included as a part of the Contract Documents of the 

contractor on this Project. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to accomplish a complete and first-grade 

installation executed by competent and experienced workmen. 

B. Equipment, specialties, approved subcontracting firms and similar items shall be checked for 

compliance and approved prior to installation. The Contractor is cautioned that work or 

equipment installed without approval is subject to condemnation, removal, and subsequent 

replacement with an approved item without extra remuneration. 

PART 2. PRODUCTS 

2.1 PRODUCT STANDARDS AND QUALITY - SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. The Contract is based on the materials, equipment, and methods described in the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Where in the Drawings and Specifications certain products, manufacturer's trade names, or 

catalog numbers are given, it is done for the expressed purpose of establishing a basis of 

quality, durability, compatibility, maintainability and efficiency of design in harmony with the 

work outlined. Where alternate manufacturer’s names are listed, it is for the purpose of 

establishing firms whose products are of a quality that are generally of that of the specified 

manufacture. The Engineer has not ascertained these manufacturers products fully comply 

with the specifications and therefore acceptable for use on this project, which shall be the 

sole responsibility of the Contractor. 

C. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been 

specifically approved for this Work by the Engineer prior to bid. All requests shall be made in 

wiring seven (7) days prior to the submittal of bids. 




D. “Or equal": 


1. Where the phrase "or equal", “or approved equal”, or "or equal as approved by the 

Engineer" occurs in the Contract Documents, acceptance of any material, equipment, 

or methods will be determined at the sole discretion of the Engineer. 

2. The decision of the Engineer shall be final. 

E. Availability of Specified Items: 

1. Verify prior to bidding that specified items will be available in time for installation during 

orderly and timely progress of the Work. 

2. In the event specified item or items will not be so available, so notify the Engineer prior 

to receipt of bids. 

3. Cost of delays because of non-availability of specified items, when such delays could 

have been avoided by the contractor, will be back charged as necessary and shall not 

be borne by the owner. 

F. Where the questions of performance, reliability, function, serviceability, parts availability, or 

harmony of design are concerned, the Engineer reserves the right to refuse approval of 

substituted products proposed to be substituted for that specified, if in his opinion the item to 

be substituted is not in conformance with the drawings and specifications. The Engineer's 

said refusal to approve, established by this paragraph, is final. 

2.2 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS 

A. Manufactured products shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and 

conditioned in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions, unless herein specified 

to the contrary. Where manufacturer's printed directions are available and where reference is 

made to manufacturer's directions in the Specifications, submit 2 copies of such directions to 

the Engineer prior to the beginning of Work covered thereby 

B. Where specific installation instructions are not part of these specifications and drawings, 

equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with instructions from the respective 

manufacturers. Where installation instructions included in these specifications or drawings 

are at a variance with instructions furnished by the equipment manufacturer, make written 

request for clarification from the Engineer. 

C. In accepting or assenting to the use of apparatus or material, or make, or arrangement 

therefore, the Engineer in no way waives the requirements of these specifications or the 

warranty embodied therein. 

2.3 WARRANTIES 

A. Specific warranties or bonds called for in the Contract Documents, in addition to that falling 

under the general warranty as set forth in General Conditions, shall be furnished in 

accordance with the requirements of the Specifications. 





B. The Contractor shall and does hereby agree to warrant for a period of one year or for longer 

periods, where so provided in the specifications, as evidenced by the date of Substantial 

Completion issued by the Engineer, products installed under the Contract to be of good 

quality in every respect and to remain so for periods described herein. Due to the phased 

nature of the construction, equipment will be placed into service prior to substantial 

completion; this period of service will not count towards the warranty period. All warranty 

periods for all equipment will commence upon substantial completion. 

C. Should defects develop in the aforesaid Work within the specified periods, due to faults in 

products or their workmanship, the contractor hereby agrees to make repairs and do 

necessary Work to correct defective Work to the Engineer's satisfaction. Such repairs and 

corrective Work, including costs of making good other Work damaged by or otherwise 

affected by making repairs or corrective work shall be done without cost to the Owner and at 

the entire cost and expense of the Contractor within 30 days after written notice to the 

Contractor by the Owner. 

D. Nothing herein intends or implies that the warranty shall apply to work which has been 

abused or neglected or improperly maintained by the owner or his successor in interest. 

E. Where service on products is required under this Article, it shall be promptly provided when 

notified by the Owner to include weekend and holiday periods and no additional charge shall 

be made, unless it can be established that the defect or malfunctioning was caused by abuse 

or accidental damage not to be expected under conditions of ordinary wear and tear 

F. The manufacturer and supplier expressly warrants that each item of equipment furnished by 

him and installed in this Project is suitable for the application shown and specified in the 

contract Document and includes features, accessories, and performing characteristic listed in 

the manufacturer's catalog in force on the date bids are requested for the Work. This 

warranty is intended as an assurance by the manufacturer that his equipment is not being 

misapplied and is fit and sufficient for the service intended. This warranty is in addition to and 

not in limitation of other warranties or remedies required by law or by the Contract 

Documents. It shall be that responsibility of the Contractor for the particular equipment to 

obtain this warranty in writing. 

G. In case the Contractor fails to do Work so ordered, the Owner may have work done and 

charge the cost thereof against monies retained as provided for in the Agreement and, if said 

retained monies shall be insufficient to pay such cost or if no money is available, the 

Contractor and his Sureties shall agree to pay to the Owner the cost of such work. 

2.4 MATERIAL DELIVERY AND RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for materials ordered for delivery to the job site. 

Responsibility includes, but is not limited to, receiving, unloading, storing, protecting, and 

setting in-place; ready for final connections, to include Owner furnished equipment. 

B. Insure that products are delivered to the Project in accordance with the Construction 

Schedule of the Project. In determining date of delivery, sufficient time shall be allowed for 

shop drawings and sample approvals, including the possibility of having to resubmit 

improperly prepared submittals or products other than those specified and the necessary 

fabrication or procurement time along with the delivery method and distance involved. 




2.5 PROTECTION 


A. Protect building elements and products subject to damage. Should workmen or other persons 

Employed or commissioned by the Contractor be responsible for damage, the entire cost of 

repairing said damage shall be assumed by the Contractor. Should damage be done by a 

person or persons not employed or commissioned by the contractor, the Contractor shall 

make repairs and charge the cost to the guilty person or persons. The Contractor shall be 

responsible for collecting such charges. 

B. Protect products prior to installation and final acceptance. Storage shall be dry, clean, and 

safe. Material or equipment damaged, deteriorated, rusted or defaced due to improper 

storage, shall be repaired, refinished, or replaced, as required by the Engineer. Product lost 

through theft or mishandling shall be replaced by the Contractor without cost to the Owner 

regardless of Owners possible insurance coverage. 

2.6 ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS 

A. The Owner will not accept the start of the warranty period on systems or equipment until 

Substantial Completion is issued to the Contractor for Owner's occupancy of the building, in 

part or whole. Make such of initial operation of systems or equipment until Substantial 

Completion is given in writing. 

PART 3. EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) 





PROJECT CLOSEOUT 



SECTION 01700 


A. The Work of this Section shall be included as a part of the Contract Documents of the 

Contractor on this Project. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of Contract Time in 

preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by 

Owner, and similar actions evidencing completion of the Work. Specific requirements for 

individual units of Work are specified in Sections of Division 2 through 16. Time if closeout is 

directly related to "Substantial Completion." 

1.3 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. General: Prior to requesting Owner/Engineer inspection/observation for certification of 

Substantial Completion (for either entire Work or portions thereof), complete the following and 

list known exceptions in request: 

1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship / maintenance bonds, maintenance 

agreements, agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 

2. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner's full and unrestricted use of the Work 

and access to services and utilities, including occupancy permits, operating 

certifications, and similar releases. 

3. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to 

locations as directed by the Owner. 

4. Complete start-up testing of systems and instructions of Owner's 

operating/maintenance personnel. Discontinue and remove from project site 

temporary facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, mockups, 

and similar elements. 




5. Complete final cleaning up requirements. 


B. The following items must be satisfied before Substantial Completion will be approved. 

1. The Work must be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. 

1.4 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL PAYMENT 

A. General: Prior to requesting Owner/Engineer final inspection/observation for certification of 

final payment, complete the following: 

1. Submit final payment request. 

2. Submit copy of Owner/Engineer final punch list of itemized work to be completed or 

corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for 

acceptance. 

3. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 

4. Certification of code compliance, all permits shall indicate the final inspection has 

been conducted and approved. 

5. Submit certification stating that no materials containing asbestos were incorporated 

into the Work. 


PART 3. PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 PUNCH LIST (SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION) 

A. The Contractor's inspection shall be as thorough as possible, in accordance with his desire to 

provide first-class workmanship and maintain good reputation and shall include Work under 

his Contract, including that of his subcontractors. 

B. When Contractor considers the Work of the Contract is substantially complete, he shall 

submit to the Engineer. 




1. A written notice that the Work is substantially complete. 

2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. 


C. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Owner and the Engineer will make 

an inspection/observation to determine the status of completion. 

D. Should the Owner and Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 

1. The Contractor will be promptly notified in writing, giving reasons therefor. 

2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written 

notice of substantial Completion. 

3. The Owner and Engineer will re-inspect the Work. 

E. When Owner and Engineer concur that the Work is substantially complete, the Engineer will: 

1. Prepare a Contractor's ("Punch") list of items to be completed or corrected. 

3.2 FINAL INSPECTION 

A. When Contractor considers all of the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification 

that: 

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 

3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contractor Documents. 

B. The Owner and Engineer will make an observation to verify the status of completion with 

reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 

C. Should Owner and Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 

1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or 

defective work. 





2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a 

second written certification to Engineer that the Work is complete. 

3. The Owner and Engineer will re-inspect the Work. 

D. When the Owner and Engineer find that the Work is acceptable under the Contract 

Documents, Engineer will request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 

3.3 WARRANTIES 

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. 

B. Execute and assemble documents from subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. 

C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three side ring binder with durable plastic cover. 

D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. 

E. For items or Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal 

within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 

3.4 WARRANTY - CORRECTION OF WORK 

A. Prior to the expiration of the one year warranty period, the Engineer will check to see if 

additional Work by the Contractor is needed to make good on the warranties. An itemized list 

will be furnished to the Contractor for corrective or replacement work. 

B. This Work shall be completed immediately by the Contractor after receiving notification. 

3.5 "PROJECT-RECORD" DRAWINGS 

A. Update "Project-Record" Drawings on separate prints set aside especially for this purpose on 

the job. Drawings shall incorporate changes make in the Work of the respective trades 

during the construction period. Such changes shall be indicated at the time they occur. In 

addition to hard copies, maintain an electronic copy in the native .dwg format, the Engineer 

will furnish an electronic copy of the project drawings for this purpose. 

B. Maintain at the job site one copy of Drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop 

drawings, change orders, field orders, other contract modifications, and other approved 

documents submitted by the Contractor, in compliance with various sections of the 

Specifications. 

C. Each of these project record documents shall be clearly marked "Project-Record Copy"; 

maintained in good condition; available for observation by the Engineer/Owner; and shall not 

be used for construction purposes. Mark up the document to show: 





1. Significant changes and selections made during the construction process; 

2. Significant detail not shown in the original Contract Documents including change 

orders; 

3. The location of underground utilities and appurtenances dimensionally referenced to 

permanent surface improvements; 

4. The location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in building structures, 

referenced to visible and accessible features of the structures; 

5. When elements are placed exactly as shown on Drawings, so indicate; otherwise 

show changed location. 

D. Keep project-record documents current. Do not permanently conceal work until the required 

information has been recorded. 

E. Prior to final payment on the Project, submit to the engineer the "Project-Record" Drawings 

for changes recorded for the Work of Division 2 through Division 16. 

1. Each drawing shall be labeled "Project Record," dated and signed by the Contractor. 

2. An electronic version in the native .dwg file format shall be submitted on a compact 

disc. 

3.6 CERTIFICATION OF CODE COMPLIANCE 

A. Prior to Substantial Completion, submit to the Engineer (in duplicate) notarized letters of code 

certification for mechanical and electrical work. 

3.7 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING MANUALS 

A. Prior to Substantial Completion, submit to the engineer one copy of a rough draft for a 

comprehensive Maintenance and Operating Manual presenting complete directions and 

recommendations for the proper care and maintenance of visible surfaces as well as 

maintenance and operating instructions for equipment items which he has provided. 

B. Operating instructions shall include necessary printed directions for correct operations, 

adjustment, servicing, and maintenance of movable parts. Also included shall be suitable 

parts lists, approved shop drawings, and diagrams showing parts location and assembly. 

C. Upon engineer's approval and prior to issuance of final payments. submit 3 corrected and 

completed copies of maintenance manuals to the engineer. 





D. Finished manuals shall be loose-leaf type with hardboard covers and titled tabs identifying 

each particular portion or item of the Work. 

E. For each titled item or work portion, manual must provide the names, addresses, and phone 

numbers of the following parties: 

1. Contractor/installer 

2. Manufacturer 

3. Nearest dealer/supplier 

4. Nearest agency capable of supplying parts and service 

F. For each manual label on front cover or spine shall indicate the following information: 

1. Project name and address 

2. Owner's name 

3. Name and address of engineer 

4. Name and address of Contractor 

5. Date of submission 

G. An electronic version (Adobe PDF) shall be submitted on a compact disc. 

3.8 CHARTS AND LOCATIONS OF CONCEALED WORK 

A. Prepare suitable charts identifying and locating each concealed control or other concealed 

item requiring repair, adjustment, and maintenance. Charts shall be mounted in suitable 

frames with glass covers secured to wall where directed. 

B. Charts shall list each item, together with its function, item number, and location. 

C. Locations throughout the building shall be identified on the wall or ceiling by permanent, nonobstructive 

plates, labels, or other approved means secured in a permanent manner. 





D. Chart details, identification methods, locations, and methods of attachment shall be as 

approved by the engineer's representative at the job site upon full submission of proposed 

procedures and proper execution of same. 

3.9 CLEANING OF WORK 

A. Remove rubbish resulting from construction operations as it occurs and do not permit it to 

accumulate. The premises shall be kept in safe, uncluttered condition. At the completion of 

his Work, clean parts of the Work executed by him. He shall remove rubbish, unused 

materials, tools, and equipment from areas which he has occupied. 

1. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with governing regulations 

including anti-pollution laws. 

2. Use only cleaning methods and materials which will not create hazards to health or 

property or damage surfaces to be cleaned and which are recommended by both the 

manufacturer of the cleaning material and the items to be cleaned. 

3. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish form site to legal disposal areas. 

B. If the Contractor fails to clean up the areas in which he is working during the progress of the 

Project, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 

C. Perform final clean up and leave the Work of the complete project in clean, neat condition. 

The engineer will observe the Work after final clean up work. Rejected work shall be cleaned 

until completed to an acceptable condition. The following are examples, but not by way of 

limitation, of cleaning levels required 

1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 

2. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaced finishes to a dirt free condition, free 

of dust, stains, films, and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as 

otherwise indicating, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. 

Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition. 

3. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, remove excess 

lubrication and other substances. 

4. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 





5. Clean projects site of litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom 

clean condition; remove stains, peter-chemical spills, and other foreign deposits. 






1.1 SUMMARY 

SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 

A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following: 

1. Selected portions of building or structure. 

2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations. 


B. See division 15 sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical 

plumbing items. 

C. See Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items. 

1.2 DEFINITIONS 

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, 

unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that 

are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and 

reinstalled. 

1.3 SUBMITTALS 

A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures 

proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. 

Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include 

measures of the following: 

1. Dust control. 

2. Noise Control. 

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate detailed sequence of selective 

demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity, interruption 

of utility services and locations of temporary partitions and means of egress. 

C. Pre-demolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining 

construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by 

selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. 

D. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill 

facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 




1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition 

work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 

D. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. 

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less 

than seventy-two (72) hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 

B. Maintain clear unobstructed and identifiable exit travel and means of egress requirements 

during entire construction period. 

C. Maintain access to existing walkways, drives, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, drives, or other occupied or used facilities without 

written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by 

Owner as far as practical. 

E. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the 

work. 

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not 

disturb, immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be 

removed by Owner under separate contract. 

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them 

against damage during selective demolition operations. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective operations. 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or 

damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void 

existing warranties. 




PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS 

A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 EXAMINATION 


1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use 

materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent 

possible. 

2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing 

materials. 

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. 

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent 

of selective demolition required. 

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be 

removed and salvaged. 

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements that conflict with 

intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and 

extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES 

A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage 

during selective demolition operations. 

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized 

in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services 

during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1. Provide at least seventy-two (72) hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is 

required during changeover. 

C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities 

serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide 

temporary utilities before proceeding with selective demolition that bypass area 

of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of 

site and adjacent buildings. 




3.3 PREPARATION 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal 

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and 

other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or 

used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by 

governing regulations. 

2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to 

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

3.4 PATCHING AND REPAIRS 

A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective 

demolition operations. 

B. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces 

suitable for new materials. 

C. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into 

adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. 

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials 

to accumulate on-site. 

B. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of 

them. 





SECTION 01800 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS and DOCUMENTS 


A. Documents affecting the work of this Section include other elements of the Contract for 

Construction, including the Owner/CM Agreement, the General Terms & Conditions, 

other sections of the Division 0 and Division 1 non-technical specifications, and the 

following technical plans and specifications: 

1. Division 15 – Mechanical 

2. Division 16 – Electrical 

B. A project-specific Commissioning Plan is shall be developed by the Commissioning 

Agent (C.A.) upon completion of the submittal and shop drawing process. 

1.2 DEFINITIONS 

A. Acceptance Phase: Phase of construction after startup and initial checkout when FPT, 

O&M documentation review, and facility and user training occurs. 

B. A/E: The appointed representative of Johnson, Levinson, Ragan, Davila, Inc. (JLRD). 

C. Construction Manager (CM): Construction superintendent responsible for day=to-day 

construction activities, schedules, sub contractors, submittal distribution, etc. Refer to 

the D.O.A. Master Agreement with Morganti (the C.M. for this project) for specific 

contract requirements. 

D. Commissioning (Cx): (per the National Conference on Building Commissioning) A 

systematic process of assuring by verification and documentation, from the design stage 

to a minimum of one year after construction, that facility systems perform interactively in 

accordance with the design documentation and intent, and in accordance with the 

owner’s operational needs, including preparation of operation personnel. 

E. Commissioning Agent (CA): The professional consultant responsible to D.O.A. for 

facilitating the Cx program, directing/coordinating day-to-day Cx activities, and verifying 

that the design intent of the facility is satisfactorily achieved. 

F. Commissioning Plan (CP): The project-specific document prepared by the CC that 

describes all aspects of the commissioning process including roles & responsibilities, 

documentation requirements, and communication structures. One (1) CP shall be 

developed for M/E systems. 

G. Functional Performance Test (FPT): System-level test to verify integration, 

functionality, and/or operation using direct observation or other monitoring methods to 

assess system performance in comparison with the Basis of Design. The CA develops 

FPT procedures and coordinates, witnesses, and documents the testing, which is 

typically performed by the installing subcontractor or vendor after pre-functional 





checklists and start-ups are complete. NOTE: FPTs are tailored to the actual equipment 

and products to be installed, so their development is contingent upon completion of the 

submittal review process. 

H. Deferred FPT: FPT performed after Substantial Completion due to conditions that 

preclude the test from being performed in normal sequential order of project delivery. 

I. Design Professional (A/E): The team of design professionals responsible to the Owner 

for the Construction Documents. 

J. Pre-functional Checklist (PFC): List of tasks and elementary component tests that 

must be completed to ensure proper installation of products and equipment. PFCs – 

which are prepared by the CA, completed by the installing subcontractor or vendor, 

verified by the CM, and reviewed by the CA – are primarily static inspections and 

procedures to prepare equipment or systems for initial operation, coordinated to 

represent the efforts of the CM and all subcontractors. PFCs shall include manufacturer 

startup checklists where applicable. 

K. Owner: The appointed representative of the Department of Airports (D.O.A.). 

1.3 SUMMARY and DESCRIPTION OF WORK INCLUDED 

A. The specific building systems to be commissioned on this project are: 

1. PLUMBING (cooling tower make-up water system) 

2. HVAC (including chillers, cooling towers, pumps, piping and accessories, and 

control systems and components) 

3. ELECTRICAL (including motors, transformers, main distribution panels, 

grounding, switchgear and motor control center) 

4. CONTROLS (including DDC Building Automation System) 


A. The CA shall be provided with one copy of all submittals, shop drawings, operation and 

maintenance (O&M) manuals, Test Adjust & Balance (TAB) reports, other tests 

conducted outside of the Cx process, and Owner training plans related to the systems 

being commissioned for review concurrent with the design professionals (A/E). 

B. The CM shall provide documentation required for Cx activities to CC at least two work 

days in advance of scheduled Cx activity and include same in O&M manuals. Such 

project-specific documentation shall include manufacturer and model number of all 

equipment and components, manufacturer’s printed installation and detailed start-up 

procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance data, any performance 

test procedures, control drawings, startup plan(s), installation & checkout materials 

shipped inside equipment, and checkout forms used by factory or field technicians. 

C. See specification 01340 and the technical specifications for other submittal 

requirements. 




PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT 


A. The CM or its subcontractors shall provide all specialized tools, test equipment, and 

instruments required to execute startup, checkout, and FPT of systems and equipment. 

B. All testing equipment used by the contractors shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy 

to test and/or measure system performance. If not otherwise noted, the following 

minimum requirements shall apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall 

have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of ± 0.1°F and a 

resolution of 0.01°F. Humidity sensors shall have a certified calibration within the past 6 

months ± .1% RH and a resolution of .01% RH. Pressure sensors shall have an 

accuracy of ± 1.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and 

have been calibrated within the last year and have a resolution of .01 in wg. Accuracy of 

other sensors shall be at least twice that of the instrumentation being tested. All 

equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended 

procedures, in addition to just after being dropped or damaged. Test instruments shall 

bear a valid NIST-traceable calibration stamp. 

C. The CA may utilize an independent testing device during random sampling activities. 

NIST traceable calibration documentation may be provided upon request. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.1 ROLES and RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. The CA shall: 

1. develop the CP; 

2. develop a spreadsheet-form itemized list of all products and equipment 

comprising the systems to be commissioned; 

3. review and respond to Cx-related Requests For Information concurrently with the 

A/E design professionals; 

4. review completed PFCs, perform random verification of checklist items, and 

make recommendation to Owner to proceed with FPT; 

5. write, oversee execution of, and document FPTs; 

6. recommend acceptance of performance and functionality or remedial action and 

retesting; 

7. maintain and distribute lists of deficiencies and/or action items related to Cx 

activities; 

8. produce draft and final Cx reports. 

9. plan, coordinate and oversee periodic post-construction Cx testing, inspection, 

and troubleshooting – typically on a quarterly basis – during the 12-month 

“warranty” period following substantial completion. 

10. produce a final “systems manual”. 




B. The CM and its subcontractors shall: 


1. provide submittals and other documents as outlined below; 

2. provide samples and/or mockups as required by the technical specifications; 

3. verify installation, documenting via PFCs as construction progresses; 

4. perform equipment start-up; 

5. verify the functional readiness of systems to be tested prior to scheduling FPTs; 

6. schedule FPTs by submitting completed PFCs; 

7. conduct FPT in the presence of the CA; 

8. troubleshoot and correct deficiencies; 

9. perform FPT retests as needed; 

10. coordinate Cx activities with Building Automation System work and/or other tests 

related to the systems being commissioned, such as HVAC Test & Balance, and 

tests by factory representatives 

11. finalize the products/equipment list drafted by the CA, augmenting the 

spreadsheet to indicate each component’s manufacturer and model/type, dates 

for submittal approval and startup, and other relevant information; 

12. conduct Owner training. 

13. participate in the post-construction Cx activities outlined above and perform 

corrective measures as required. 

14. Coordinate FPT’s with phasing requirements of project. 

3.2 MEETINGS 

A. At least one onsite Cx kickoff meeting shall be conducted by the CA and CM for the 

purpose of reviewing the objectives, extent, and procedures of commissioning with the 

CM, its subcontractors, and the Owner. This kickoff meeting shall be held upon 

completion of the submittal review process. 

B. Other Cx meetings for coordination, clarification of requirements & procedures, or 

problem resolution shall be chaired by the CA and held periodically as determined by the 

CC. Attendance by the Builder and its subcontractors is mandatory. 

C. Discussions held in Cx Team Meetings shall include but not be limited to system / 

equipment start-up, progress, scheduling, testing, documentation, training, deficiencies, 

and problem resolution. 

3.3 SCHEDULE 

A. The Builder and its subcontractors shall account for startup, Cx activities, testing, and 

training in the schedule. 

B. Satisfactory completion of commissioning and training activities is a pre-requisite for 

overall project Substantial Completion unless otherwise noted in the CM/CA contract 

with the D.O.A. 




3.4 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFCs) 


A. General. Pre functional checklists (PFCs) are important to ensure that the equipment 

and systems are completely installed and integrated with other building components and 

systems, hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (indepth 

system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of 

equipment or assembly receives full pre-functional checkout. No sampling strategies are 

used. The pre-functional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior 

to formal functional performance testing of the equipment or subsystems of the given 

system. 

B. The PFC’s are developed by the CA and provided to the CM. The CM determines which 

trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and notes 

that trade on the form. Each procedure and associated forms may have more than one 

trade responsible for its execution. 

C. The PFCs shall be supplemented by the contractor to include start-up and static test 

documentation required by the design specifications and by the manufacturer for each 

piece of equipment. 

D. The CM shall maintain a “living” copy of the PFC for each piece of equipment. This copy 

of the PFC shall be located inside a clear vinyl envelope and be affixed to the associated 

piece of equipment. When this method becomes impractical the PFC shall be 

maintained in the associated CM field office and available for review at any time. 

E. The PFC review shall be completed by field survey of each piece of equipment by the 

CM representative and the installing contractor. 

F. The installing contractor shall provide the individual with specific knowledge of the 

installation of respective equipment for this review. 

G. CA will review completed PFC’s prior to execution of system FPT. The CA performs 

random verification of checklist items and makes recommendation to CM to proceed with 

FPT. 

H. CA reserves the right to witness any startup and preliminary equipment testing. 

I. Sub-contractor shall clearly identify and list outstanding and incomplete start-up and 

PFC items. 

J. CA reviews report to determine if outstanding items prevent scheduling of FPT. 

K. Sub-Contractor shall re-submit an updated PFC with date of completion noted for 

completed items. 




3.5 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS (FPTs) 

A. Objectives and Scope: 


1. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each 

system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract 

Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of 

substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing 

process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving 

the operation and functioning of the systems. 

2. Each system will be operated through all modes of operation (including but not 

limited to occupied, unoccupied, part- and full-load, power failure, equipment 

failure, etc.) where there is a specified system response and which meets the 

design intent. 

3. The contractor responsible for the dynamic operation of a system shall 

demonstrate comprehensive functionality of that system. All contractors that 

have contributed to the installation of the same system may not be required to 

participate in the FPT activity but shall be required to be immediately available for 

reconciliation of issues that fall within their scope and responsibility during 

testing. 

B. Coordination and Scheduling: 

1. FPT is conducted following completion of PFCs and associated start-up 

procedures during the course of construction. 

2. When the contractor completes a system the contractor may submit PFC 

documentation and request review and initiation of FPT. 

3. Coordination and final scheduling confirmation of FPT shall occur during 

regularly scheduled Cx meetings and through regular communication between 

the CA and CM. 

4. All Cx activities shall be fully integrated into the project construction schedule. 

This includes milestone deadlines for completion of installation of major system 

components and durations for FPT of a system. 

5. The CM shall provide sufficient notice to CA regarding changes to the 

coordinated completion schedule for FPT. 

6. The CA will witness and document FPT of systems which were demonstrated by 

the CM or its sub contractor. Designated sub-contractor or vendor responsible 

for dynamic operation of a system or device shall demonstrate system 

functionality to CC. 

7. Functional and installation issues shall be posted to the Cx action list and 

correction shall follow protocol as described in the Cx plan. 

8. Each contractor shall comprehensively test all systems for which they are 

responsible to the satisfaction of the Owner. 

3.6 CORRECTIVE MEASURES 

A. Non-Conformance: 

1. The CA will witness and document the results of all functional performance tests 

using the specific functional checklist forms developed for that purpose. Prior to 

testing, these forms are provided to the CM and Subs for review. 





2. The CA will document the results of all FPT. Deficient or non-conformance 

issues shall be noted and reported by CA as an action list item. 

3. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during testing at 

discretion of CA. In such case, deficiency and resolution shall be documented on 

FTP form and to action list as a resolved issue. 

4. Every effort shall be made to expedite testing and minimize unnecessary delays, 

while not compromising the integrity of the test procedures. 

5. The CM shall respond in writing to the CA at least as often as commissioning 

meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent 

outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover 

explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution. 

6. Deficiencies are handled in the following manner: 

a) When there is no dispute of deficiency and Sub-contractor accepts 

responsibility for remedial action: 

(1) CA documents deficiency. CA posts issue to action list. Subcontractor 

corrects deficiency and updates the Master Action List. 

(2) If required, the CM reschedules test with CA and Sub-contractor. 

New test time is posted to project schedule. 

b) When there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a 

deficiency or who is responsible: 

(1) CA documents deficiency and Contractors response and testing 

proceeds on subsequent test or systems. CA posts issue to action 

list and distributes to project team. 

(2) The CA and CM facilitate resolution of deficiency. Other parties 

are brought into discussions as needed. Final interpretive 

authority is with A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the 

Owner. 

(3) Once interpretation and resolution has been decided, appropriate 

party corrects deficiency, and CA is given notice to proceed with 

retest, if required. The CM and CA reschedule test. New test 

time is posted to project schedule. 

B. Cost of Retesting: 

1. Costs for Sub-contractor to recheck PFC or re-execute FPT, if they are 

responsible for deficiency, shall be theirs. 

2. Any required retesting by any contractor shall not be considered a justified 

reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the CM. 

C. Approval: 

1. CA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on test form. CA, CM, and 

D.O.A. provide formal approval of FPT after review. 

D. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect: 

1. If any equipment fails to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or 

substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted 

performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the CM, 

the A/E, or the CA. In such case, the responsible Sub shall provide the Owner 

with the following: 





a) Within one week of notification from the CM, the Sub or manufacturer’s 

representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of 

the findings. The findings shall be provided to the CM within two weeks 

of the original notice. 

b) Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or 

manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the 

problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall 

include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not 

significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original 

installation. 

c) D.O.A. will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a 

repair is acceptable. 

d) Two examples of the proposed solution shall be installed by the Sub and 

the CA will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon 

which the CA and D.O.A. will decide whether to accept the solution. 

e) Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or 

repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty 

accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The 

replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning 

within one week from when parts can be obtained. 

3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Standard O&M Manuals. 

1. The specific content and format requirements for the standard O&M manuals are 

detailed in associated Division specific sections and Section 01700. 

2. CA Review and Approval: Prior to substantial completion, the CA shall review the 

O&M manuals, documentation and redline as-builts for systems that were 

commissioned. The CC will communicate deficiencies in the manuals to D.O.A. 

and A/E. Upon a successful review of the corrections, the CA recommends 

approval and acceptance of the applicable sections of the O&M manuals to the 

D.O.A. and A/E. The CA also reviews each equipment warranty and verifies that 

all requirements to keep the warranty valid are clearly stated. This work does not 

supersede the A/E’s review of the O&M manuals according to the A/E’s contract. 

3.8 SYSTEMS MANUAL 

A. The purpose of the “Systems Manual” is to provide future operating staff the information 

needed to understand and optimally operate the commissioned systems. The Systems 

Manual generally for uses on operating, rather than maintaining the equipment, 

particularly the interactions between equipment. The CA facilitates and coordinates the 

development of the manual and its content. The A/E, Owner and Contractor shall 

actively participate in the development of this manual. The Systems Manual shall 

include the following sections for each commissioned system. Note responsible parties. 




Contractor Owner CA 

System Single Line 

Diagrams (As-Built) P 

As-Built sequences of 

operations, control drawings, 

and final setpoints 

P S 

Operating instructions for 

integrated building systems S P 

Recommended schedule of 

maintenance requirements 

and frequency 

Recommended schedule for 

re-testing of Commissioned 

systems with blank test 

forms. 

Recommended schedule for 

calibrating sensors and 

actuators 

P = Preliminary Responsibility 

S = Support Responsibility 

S S P 


P 

P S 

B. The systems manual shall be provided in hard copies, as well as two (2) CD’s, in 

Adobe Acrobat format. A copy of he systems manual shall be loaded onto the 

new operators workstation. 

3.9 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL 

A. The CM shall be responsible for ensuring that Owner training on all systems and 

equipment being commissioned is conducted prior to Substantial Completion. 

B. The CA will be responsible for overseeing and approving the adequacy of the training of 

Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. Adequacy shall be determined in 

accordance with the following elements: 

1. Instructor capabilities shall be commensurate with level of instruction required. 

2. In addition to these general requirements, the specific training requirements of 

Owner personnel by Subs and vendors is specified in associated Divisions. 

3.10 DEFERRED TESTING 

A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests 

1. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required 

occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional 

testing may be delayed upon approval of D.O.A. and CA. These tests will be 

conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. 




B. Seasonal Testing 


1. During the warranty period, seasonal testing shall be completed as part of this 

contract. 

2. Seasonal testing is intended to test the performance of systems under full load 

conditions that cannot be simulated during the functional testing period. The CA 

will coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented, and deficiencies 

corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the CA witnessing. 

Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and As-Builts due to the testing will 

be made by the CM and its Subs. 





Division 3 

Concrete


1.1 SUMMARY 


SECTION 03300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 

A. This section specifies cast in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, 

placement procedures, and finishes. 

B. The extent of the concrete work is specified in the drawings. Cast in place concrete work 

includes, but is not limited to, foundations and footings, slabs on grade and structural slabs, 

beams, and columns. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions 

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. 

B. Specification 03290 – Under Slab Vapor Barrier / Retarder 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the latest editions of the following 

codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or 

specified: 

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 

a. ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings” 

b. ACI 318, ACI 318R “Building Code requirements for Reinforced Concrete and 

Commentary” 

c. ACI 117 “Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials” 

d. ACI 211.1 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight 

and Mass Concrete” 

e. ACI 304 “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing 

Concrete” 

f. ACI 305R “Hot Weather Concreting” 

g. ACI 306R “Cold Weather Concreting” 

h. ACI 308 “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete” 

i. ACI 309 “Standard Practice for Consolidation of Concrete” 





j. ACI 315R “Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete 

Structures” 

k. ACI 347 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork” 

l. ACI 302 “Guide for Floor and Slab Construction” 

m. ACI 311 “Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection” 

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) – latest editions of the following 

standards: 

a. ANSI/ASTM D1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and 

Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 

b. ASTM C31 Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

c. ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates 

d. ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete 

e. ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete 

f. ASTM C150 Portland Cement 

g. ASTM C171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete 

h. ASTM C173 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the 

Volumetric Method 

i. ASTM C230 Specifications for the Flow Table for Use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement 

j. ASTM C231 Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the 

Pressure Method 

k. ASTM C260 Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 

l. ASTM C330 Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete 

m. ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 

n. ASTM C618 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral 

Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete 

o. ASTM C939 Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete 

p. ASTM C469 Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson’s Ratio of Concrete in 

Compression 

q. ASTM E1155 Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness 

Using the F-number System 

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice." 

B. Full Cooperation shall be given to mechanical, electrical, and plumbing installers to allow 

them time to coordinate and install all items of their work which are to be encased or built into 

concrete. Contractor to assure that other work such as sleeves, electrical conduits, pipes, 

anchors, etc., are properly placed and secured in position before concrete is placed. Items 

that require inspection shall have been inspected and tested for both material and 

mechanical operation and shall have been completed before concrete is placed 






A. Product Data for Proprietary Materials and Items: Reinforcement and forming accessories, 

admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake 

finish materials, etc. 

B. Product Data for Concrete 

1. Mix design for each class of concrete. 

a. Fully document proposed materials and mix designs. 

b. Submit mix design for review including lab test reports for concrete materials and 

mix designs as specified. Provide test data sample with standard deviation 

calculations for each mix submitted. 

c. Submit mix design and documentation 28 days, minimum, prior to use in the field. 

2. Manufacturer’s recommendations for use of admixtures and curing compound. 

3. Provide maximum expected amount of chloride ions in the mix. 

C. Shop Drawings; Reinforcement: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and 

placement of concrete reinforcement. Provide one sepia and additional prints as required for 

distribution. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced 

Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and 

arrangements of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings 

through concrete structures. 

D. Shop drawings shall bear the initials of both the detailer and checker to indicate that said 

shop drawings have been checked by the shop prior to submission. Any error, including 

omissions, coordination, and errors in dimensions shown on shop drawings shall be the 

responsibility of the Contractor. Prepare shop drawings in sufficient time to allow the Design 

Professional a minimum of 14 calendar days from his receipt of the full set in which to review 

and check same. 

E. Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished 

concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joints or reveals, 

location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete 

visually. Formwork shop drawings must be signed and sealed by a professional engineer in 

the state of Florida. 

F. Samples: Submit samples of materials as specified and as otherwise requested by Architect, 

including names, sources and descriptions. 

G. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix 

design tests as specified. 





H. Mill Reports: Submit for information purposes only mill reports covering the chemical and 

physical properties of reinforcing as specified. 

1.5 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE 

A. Mix Design Conference: At least 30 days prior to submittal of concrete design mixes, the 

Contractor shall hold a meeting or telephone conference to review the detailed requirements 

for preparing the concrete mix designs. Participants shall include representatives from the 

Contractor, Owner's Testing Laboratory, Concrete Supplier, and Engineer. 

B. Pre-Concrete Conference 

1. At least 7 days prior to beginning concrete work, the Contractor shall conduct a 

meeting to review the proposed mix designs and to discuss required methods and 

procedures to produce concrete construction of the required quality. Also review 

requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work and availability of materials. 

Establish work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing 

and certifications. The contractor shall send a pre-concrete conference agenda to all 

attendees 7 days prior to the scheduled date of the conference. 

2. The Contractor shall require responsible representatives of every party who is 

concerned with the concrete work to attend the conference, including but not limited 

to the following: 

a. Contractor's Superintendent 

b. Laboratory responsible for the concrete design mix 

c. Laboratory responsible for field quality control 

d. Concrete Subcontractor 

e. Ready-Mix Concrete Producer 

f. Owner's and Architect's/Engineer's Representative 

3. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed and printed by the Contractor and 

distributed by him to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting. One copy of 

the minutes shall be transmitted to the following for information purposes: 

a. Owner's Representative 

b. Architect 

c. Engineer-of-Record 

C. The Engineer shall be present at the conference. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at 

least 7 days prior to the scheduled date of the conference. 

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. 





B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep reinforcing steel 

under cover and off the ground using supports. Protect reinforcing steel from rusting, oil, 

grease, or distortion. 


2.1 FORM MATERIALS 

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise indicated, construct formwork for 

exposed concrete surfaces with a rigid non-absorptive material to offer optimum appearance 

and leave a smooth, straight, stain-free exposed surface. Furnish in largest practicable sizes 

to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. Provide form 

material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly-placed concrete without bow 

or deflection. 

B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", 

Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible 

inspection trademark. 

C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be 

unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. 

Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit. 

D. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds that will not bond 

with, stain nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments 

of concrete surfaces. 

E. Form Ties: Provide factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable metal form ties with 

cones on each side, designed to prevent deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces 

upon removal. 

F. Unless otherwise indicated, provide form ties which will leave a hole not larger than 1" 

diameter in the concrete surface. 

G. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 

350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect 

concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 

B. Reinforcing Steel: Reinforcing steel must be correctly rolled to section and free from all 

surface defects and shall be in accordance with ASTM A615 Grade 60 as evidenced by 

manufacturer's certificates. The grade of steel shall be intermediate, new billet stock. All 





bars shall be deformed and rolled with raised symbols to identify the manufacturer and the 

size of the bar. 

C. Welded Wire Fabric / Mesh shall conform to ASTM A185 and ASTM A82 (FY = 65 ksi). Flat 

sheets only. 

D. Steel Wire: The Wire shall be No. 18 U.S. Steel wire gauge black annealed wire. 

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, 

spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded 

wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI specifications, unless 

otherwise acceptable. 

F. For foundation work, including slab on grade, use supports with sand plates or 

horizontal runners, or concrete bricks where base materials will not support chair legs. 

G. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, all framed slabs or where rust could impair 

architectural finishes, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with 

legs which are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI Class 2). 

H. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where 

indicated. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with 

ASTM E 154, as follows: 

1. A multi-layer sheet membrane waterproofing system consisting of a self-healing, 

expandable layer of granular bentonite laminated at the rate of up to one pound per 

square foot to an impermeable, high density polyethylene (HDPE) “Paraseal LG” by 

Tremco, Inc. 

2. Water resistant barrier paper consisting of heavy craft papers laminated together with 

glass fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side. 

"Moistop" by Fortifiber or approved equal. 

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect and/or 

Engineer. 

B. Use one brand of cement throughout project from the same mill and manufacturer to insure 

cement of uniform color and shade for all exposed concrete, unless otherwise acceptable to 

Architect and/or Engineer. 

C. High early strength Portland cement or other special cement shall be used only when 

authorized by the Architect. 

D. Fly Ash (ASTM C618): Type F is acceptable, but not to exceed 20 percent by weight of total 

cement content. 





E. Aggregates: shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. 

Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 

1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing 

spalling-causing deleterious substances. 

2. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be clean, natural siliceous sand consisting of 

hard, strong, durable, uncoated particles. 

3. Coarse Aggregate for Stone Concrete: Coarse aggregate for stone concrete shall 

consist of clean, hard, uncoated, strong, durable gravel or crushed stone. 

4. Color and source of aggregates shall be approved by the Architect after review of 

mock-up samples. All aggregates for each class of concrete used shall be from the 

same source to insure that concrete is of uniform color and shade. 

F. Water: Clean, potable and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic 

materials and shall not contain amounts of impurities injurious to the concrete. It must be 

Drinkable. 

2.4 ADMIXTURES 

A. General: No admixtures other than those listed below shall be used in concrete mixes after 

design mix approval. Admixtures shall contain no more chloride ions than are present in 

municipal drinking water. Certification of conformance to requirements and the chloride ion 

content will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review to the 

Architect. Upon request only, provide a qualified, full-time representative to assure proper 

use of admixtures. 

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: shall conform to ASTM C260 and shall be used where necessary 

to achieve the specified air content. Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other 

required admixtures. 

1. Approved Products: Subject to compliance with applicable Instructions to Bidders 

and Submittal Requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work 

include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. “AEA-92” and “AIR MIX 200”; Euclid Chemical Company 

b. "MB-VR or MB-AE; Master Builders 

c. "Dorex AEA"; W.R. Grace 

d. "Edoco 2001 or 2002"; Edoco Technical Products 

2. Air Content: Air content of concrete shall be as follows: 

a. For concrete exposed to soil and/or weather, 5%+ 1.5% 




. 3% for all other concrete. 


C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, and shall not contain more chloride ions 

than are present in municipal drinking water. 




a. "Eucon WR-75"; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "Pozzolith 344"; Master Builders. 

c. "Chemtard"; Chem-Masters Corp. 

D. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): may be used in all pumped 

concrete and concrete with a water-cement ratio below 0.50. The admixture shall conform to 

ASTM C494, Type F or G, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal 

drinking water. 




a. "Eucon 37"; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "WRDA 19"; W.R. Grace. 

c. "PSP"; Protex Industries Inc. 

d. "Super P"; Anti-Hydro. 

e. "Mighty 150"; ICI Americas Corp. 

f. "PSI Super"; Gifford-Hill. 

g. "Pozzolith 400"; Master Builders. 

E. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerator Admixture: The admixture shall conform to ASTM 

C494, Type C or E, and not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking 

water. It shall be used in all concrete placed at temperatures below 50 degrees F. 




a. "Accelguard 80"; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "Pozzolith 500"; Master Builders. 

F. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type 

D, and shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. 







a. "Eucon Retarder 75"; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. "Edoco 20006"; Edoco Technical Products 

c. "Pozzolith 300-R"; Master Builders 

d. "Daratard"; W.R. Grace 


G. Certification: Provide admixture manufacturer's written certification that chloride ion content 

complies with specified requirements. 

1. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions are not 

permitted. 

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion Joint Material: Expansion joint fillers shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board 

conforming to ASTM D-1751. Joint fillers shall extend full depth of slab or joint and be 

thickness and lengths indicated on drawings. 




a. J & P Petroleum Products, Inc. 

b. Anti Hydro Company 

c. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 

B. Non-Shrink Non-metallic Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout. 




a. “Euco-NS Grout”; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. “Masterflow 713”; Master Builders. 

c. “Sonogrout”; Sonneborn-Contech. 

d. “Crystex”; L & M Const. Chemical Co. 

e. “1107 Advantage Grout” - Dayton Superior Corp 

f. “Horngrout”; A. C. Horn. 

C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. 

yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. 

D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 




1. Waterproof paper. 

2. Polyethylene film. 

3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. 


E. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane- forming curing 

compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to 

Architect. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq ft./gal. 




a. “Ecocure VOX”; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. “Clear Bond”, Guardian Chemical. 

c. “Crystal Gard – 0800”, Lambert Corporation. 

d. “Super Floor Coat”, Euclid Chemical Co. 

e. “Masterseal”; Master Builders. 

f. “J-22 Day Chem Cure & Seal”, Dayton Superior 

g. “Kure-N-Seal 30”, Sonneborn 

h. “Dress & Seal 30”, L & M Construction Chemicals. 

F. Bonding Compound: The Compound shall be a two (2) component, 100% solids, 100% 

reactive compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. 

G. Approved Products: Subject to compliance with applicable Instructions to Bidders and 

Submittal Requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

a. “EucoWeld”; Euclid Chemical Co. 

b. “EucoEpoxy #463”, Euclid Chemical Co. 

c. “EucoEpoxy #615”, Euclid Chemical Co. 

d. “Sikadur Hi-Mod”, Sika Corporation. 

e. “J-41 Bonding Agent”, Dayton Superior. 

f. “Weldcrete”; Larsen Products. 

g. “Everweld”; L & M Construction Chemicals. 

h. “Hornweld”; A. C. Horn. 

H. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two component material suitable for use on dry or damp 

surfaces. Provide material "Type", "Grade", and "Class" to suit project requirements. 








a. “HIT RE 500"; Hilti 

b. “Ultrabond 1”; U.S. Anchor 

c. “Ultrabond 2”; U.S. Anchor 

d. “A-1000”; Allied Gold 

I. Plastic Reglets: Provide "Type A" prefilled P.V.C. reglets where indicated, made by the 

Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Install in strict accordance with manufacturers details 

and directions. 

J. Water stops: Rubber or PVC water stops. 

K. Vapor Barrier: Provide under slab vapor barrier / retarder as per specification section 03290. 

L. Anchor Slots: Hot-Dipped galvanized, #22 ga. metal, felt filled, equal to No. 305 made by 

Hohman & Bernard or approved equal. 

M. Inserts: Inserts shall be either adjustable, threaded or wedge types depending on use as 

manufactured by Hohman & Bernard or approved equal. 

N. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate 

and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of 

fluosilicate per gal. 

2.6 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES. 

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch 

or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an 

independent testing facility acceptable to Architect and/or Engineer for preparing and 

reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field 

quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect and/or Engineer. If trial 

batches are selected as the method of proportioning, the mix design shall be proportioned to 

achieve an average 28-day compressive strength of 1200 psi in excess of the design strength 

indicated on the Contract drawings. All proposed mixes shall be submitted with complete 

standard deviation analysis or trial batch data for the Architect’s and/or Engineer's review a 

minimum of 14 days prior to the use of the mix. 

B. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor 

when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances 

warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect and/or Engineer. 

Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and 

accepted by Architect before using in work. 





C. Cement, aggregate, cylinder molds, and other materials required for design or verification 

mixes by the laboratory shall be supplied by the Contractor. The test lab cost shall be at the 

expenses of the Contractor. 

D. Admixtures: 

1. Use water-reducing admixture or high range water-reducing admixture (super 

plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. 

2. Use non-chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient 

temperatures below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). 

3. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add Airentraining 

admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of 

placement having total air content within following limits: 

Max. Agg. Size Total Air Content 

1 1/2 inch 2.5 % 

1 3.0 

3/4 3.5 

1/2 4.0 

3/8 4.5 

4. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for 

industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to 

be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50. 

5. Use admixtures for water-reducing and set-control in strict compliance with 

manufacturer's directions. 

E. Minimum Cement Content: Provide cement content as required for strength, but not less than 

these guidelines: 

Max. Agg. Size Cement, lb/cy 

1-1/2 470 

1 520 

3/4 540 

1/2 590 




3/8 610 


F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement 

as follows: 

1. Ramps slabs, and sloping surfaces - Not more than 3 inches. 

2. Reinforced foundation systems - Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 

3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (Superplasticizer) - Not more than 8 inches 

after addition of HRWR to site-verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete. 

4. Other concrete - Not more than 4 inches (+/- 1 inch). 

G. Water-Cement Ratio: Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following 

properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 

1. 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.42 maximum 

(non-air-entrained), 0.32 maximum (air-entrained). 









H. All concrete required to be watertight shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.40. All 

reinforced concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or de-icers shall have a maximum 

water-cement ratio of 0.40. All concrete subjected to freezing and thawing shall have a 

maximum water-cement ratio of 0.45. 

I. Lightweight Concrete - Proportion mix as specified. Design mix to produce strength and 

modulus of elasticity as noted on drawings, with a splitting tensile strength factor (Fct) of not 

less than 5.5 for 3000-psi concrete and a dry weight of not less than 95 lbs. or more than 110 

lbs. after 28 days. Limit shrinkage to 0.03 percent at 28 days. 

J. Slab on Grade: 




1. Maximum slump at point of delivery, 5 inches 

2. Maximum aggregate size, 1 inch. 

3. Entrained air content, 4.5%. 


4. Contractor's option to use superplasticizer to increase workability (8 inch maximum 

slump, 0.45 maximum water cement ratio). 

2.7 CONCRETEE MIXING 

A. General: The mixing shall be done by the use of modern, efficient, mechanical equipment 

and devices satisfactory to the Architect for accurately controlling and easily checking the 

weight of each of the ingredients. The Architect shall have free access to the plant at all time 

for sampling the materials, or inspection of the work. 

B. Concrete mixers shall be of the revolving drum type. Each batch shall be mixed for not less 

than 2 minutes after the water has been added at the rate of rotation specified by the 

manufacturer. The concrete shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. 

C. Ready-mixed concrete, shall be mixed and delivered as specified for central-mixed or truckmixed 

concrete in ASTM C94. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in 

work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, 

and amount of water introduced. 

1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a 

shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. 

2. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 

degrees C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes. 

3. When air temperature is above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), reduce mixing and 

delivery time to 60 minutes. 

PART 3. EXECUTION 

3.1 FORMS 

A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that 

might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork 

so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and 

position. 





B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place 

concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. 

C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate 

alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, 

offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, 

screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use 

selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints 

to prevent leakage of cement paste. 

D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 

Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. 

Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom 

forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent 

swelling and for easy removal. 

E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for 

inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace 

temporary openings and set time to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate 

temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. 

F. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. 

G. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under 

conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess formcoating 

material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete 

surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's 

instructions. 

H. Wetting and Oiling Forms: The inside surface of woodboard forms shall be soaked with clean 

water prior to placing concrete. Unfinished plywood or presswood forms (except as 

otherwise specified herein) shall be treated with an approved form oil or lacquer. If oil is 

used, all excess oil shall be wiped off with rags to leave the surface of the forms just oily to 

the touch. Oil is not to be applied after reinforcing is in place. 

I. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against 

rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 

J. Exposed edges of beams and columns shall be chamfered 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted, 

using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines 

and tight edge joints. 

K. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, 

designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after 

removal is 1" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in 

concrete surface. 





L. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work 

of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades 

providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 

M. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. 

Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten 

forms and bracing after concrete placement to eliminate mortar leaks and mortar proper 

alignment. 

N. Clean re-used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms 

to acceptable surface condition. 

O. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the 

responsibility of the Contractor. 

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing 

Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as 

herein specified. 

B. Tags: Reinforcing bars shall be furnished with identification tags. 

C. Positioning: Bar reinforcement shall be carefully formed to the shapes shown and required to 

resist most effectively the stresses involved. Bars with kinks or bends not required shall not 

be used. The reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that would injure 

the material. The heating of reinforcement for bending or straightening will not be permitted. 

D. Bends or hooks, unless otherwise shown or required, shall be cold formed around pins. 

Hooks shall be ACI Standard. 

E. Cleaning: Before any reinforcement is placed, any loose rust or mill scale, or coatings, 

including ice or oil, which would reduce or destroy the bond shall be removed. 

Reinforcement material reduced in section shall not be used. 

F. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, 

construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal 

chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. 

G. Place reinforcement to obtain concrete cover over steel reinforcement not be less than that 

permitted by "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACI 318" or as shown on 

the drawings. 

1. Minimum Cover: 

a. Footings, 3 inches to bottom and unformed sides, 2 inches to formed sides. 

b. Other, 2 inches to main reinforcing, 1-1/2 inches to ties and stirrups. 





H. Securing Reinforcement: Reinforcement shall be wired securely at intersections and shall be 

held in place with approved bars, spacers, chairs, high chairs, bolsters, or other supports so 

that it will not be dislocated or otherwise disturbed during the depositing of concrete. Set wire 

ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 

I. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least two 

full meshes and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent 

continuous laps in either direction. Welded wire fabric for slab on grade shall be WWF 6x6- 

W1.4xW1.4, unless otherwise noted. Place welded wire fabric 1-1/2 inches in from the top of 

slab on grade unless noted otherwise. Interrupt typical slab reinforcement at all construction 

and expansion joints. See specific details for any dowels required for shear transfer. Cut 

alternate wires along the line of saw cut control joints prior to placing concrete. 

J. Provide minimum lap splice per ACI 318-95 for all reinforcing bars, unless noted otherwise. 

Stagger splices in adjacent bars at least 24 inches, except in beams and columns. Steel 

reinforcement shall not be spliced at points of maximum stress. Laps shall be tied and seized 

tight at both ends. See drawings for lap lengths and details. 

K. In wall footings, grade beams and bond beams, provide bent bars at corners and 

intersections of the same number and size as the straight bars. 

3.3 JOINTS 

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, 

locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as approved by the 

Architect/Engineer. 

B. Provide key ways in construction joints in walls and continuous footings, and where shown on 

the drawings. 

C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across 

construction joints. 

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-ground at points of 

contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, 

foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated. Provide 1/2 inch preformed 

expansion joint material where slab abuts vertical surfaces. 

E. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-grade 

to form panels of patterns as shown. 

1. Contraction joints shall be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing 

as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate or raveling. 

2. It is recommended that the slabs be cast in long strips, and saw cut transversely, in 

order to minimize shrinkage cracking. 





F. Joint Spacing: Unless otherwise noted, the maximum spacing of construction joints shall be 

as follows: 

1. Foundation walls: forty-five (45) feet. 

2. Slabs: Fifteen (15) feet. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS. 

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for 

other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, 

diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. 

B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate 

screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. 

Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strikeoff 

templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Pre-placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork 

installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to 

permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten 

wood forms immediately before placing concrete, where form coatings are not used. 

B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms 

and reinforcing steel. 

C. General: Comply with ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, 

and Placing Concrete", and as herein specified. 

D. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the forms as quickly as possible by method 

which will prevent segregation and loss of materials. Concrete shall be deposited in the 

forms as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling. Special care shall be 

exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring. 

Concrete shall be deposited in a continuous manner until a given unit of construction, as 

approved by the Architect, has been completed. 

E. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed 

on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of 

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein 

specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. 

F. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 

24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of 

several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 





G. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, 

rodding or tamping to force out air pockets, to work the materials into corners and 

around reinforcement and embedded items, and to eliminate honeycomb. Use equipment 

and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended 

practices. 

H. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators 

vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. 

Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not 

insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit 

duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of 

reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 

I. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around 

reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 

J. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, 

within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 

1. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or 

darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces 

prior to beginning finishing operations. 

2. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 

K. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength 

which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 

306 and as herein specified. 

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 

degrees C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete 

mixture temperature of not less than 55 degrees F (12 degrees C), and not more than 

80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement. Water shall not be heated over 

180 degrees F (82 degrees C). 

2. Concrete work shall be protected by wind breaks, curing compounds, and blanket 

covers if necessary in order to maintain the concrete in-place temperatures of at least 

50 deg. F. for five (5) days. 

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place 

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 

4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or 

chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 





5. Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride Accelerating Admixture shall be used as previously 

specified. In no case shall calcium chloride, thiocyanate, or admixtures containing 

more than 0.05% chloride ions be used. 

6. Heating Methods: All methods proposed for heating materials, and protecting the 

concrete shall be subject to approval by the Architect. Concrete shall never be 

heated over 90 deg. F. nor will any other overheating which would produce a flash 

set be permitted. 

L. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality 

and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement 

below 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice 

may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to 

total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's 

option. 

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel 

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before 

embedment in concrete. 

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 

4. When high temperatures and/or placing conditions dictate, the Contractor shall use 

the water-reducing, retarding formulation (Type D) in lieu of the specified waterreducing 

admixture (Type A) as specified. Concrete shall not be placed when the 

sun, heat, wind, rain, sleet, or humidity would prevent proper placement. 

M. The placement of partially hardened concrete, contaminated concrete, re-tempered concrete, 

and concrete remixed after its initial set shall be prohibited. 

N. The placement of concrete shall be done at a rate such that poured concrete remains plastic 

and flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 

O. Temporary Runways: Delivery carts and/or buggies where used shall be kept on temporary 

runways built over the construction, and runway supports shall not bear upon reinforcing steel 

or fresh concrete. 

P. Maximum Time: Concrete shall not be incorporated in the work after it has attained its initial 

set nor in any event more than 1-1/2 hours after water has been added to the dry materials, 

or more than 1-1/2 hours after cement has been added to aggregate. This period may be 

reduced at the option of the Architect if it develops that presetting is taking place, particularly 

in hot weather. 

Q. Redosage with the specified high range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) may be 

permitted with the approval of the Architect as to methods and procedure. 





R. Vertical Drop: Concrete containing the specified high range water-reducing admixture 

(superplasticizer) shall not be allowed to drop freely more than 10 feet. Maximum drop for 

other concrete shall be 6 feet. Provide placement holes in formwork, chutes, or elephant 

trunks for placement of concrete where the drop exceeds these limits. 

3.6 BONDING 

A. General: Before any new concrete is deposited on or against concrete that has hardened, 

the form shall be retightened, the surfaces of the hardened concrete shall be roughened as 

required, thoroughly cleansed of foreign matter, dampened and the specified bonding 

compound applied. The forms shall then be retightened. New concrete shall be placed after 

the bonding compound has dried. 

3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES 

A. Refer to architectural drawings as applicable to determine extent of exposed concrete and 

the finish desired. 

B. Concrete shall be in condition acceptable to trades that will furnish and install the finish 

materials. 

C. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work or 

by other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture 

imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes, defective areas and honeycombs 

should repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed 

down or chipped off. 

D. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view, or that are to be 

covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied 

directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. 

This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged 

orderly and symmetrically with a minimum number of seams. Repair and patch defective 

areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. Do not apply cement 

grout other than that created by rubbing. Immediately repair deflective surfaces and remove 

excess paste from adjacent surfaces. 

E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed 

surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture 

matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces 

uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Rock salt finish - Where noted on Architectural Plans, sidewalks shall receive rock salt 

treatment by hand sprinkling onto wet concrete surface and tamping. Provide a 4 sf sample 

for Architect approval. 




3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES 


A. Floor slabs shall be constructed to have a Minimum Flatness of Ff = 35, and a Minimum 

Levelness of Fl = 25, except for ramps and intentionally sloped slabs, which shall be 

constructed to have a Minimum Flatness of Ff = 20. 

B. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete 

floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded 

applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. 

C. After placing slabs, plane surface so that depressions between high spots do not exceed 1/2" 

under a 10' straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, 

roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. 

D. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other 

finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane 

or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise 

indicated. 

1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until 

ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when 

concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. 

Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or 

inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane so that depressions 

between high spots do not exceed 5/16" under a 10' straightedge. Cut down high 

spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, 

refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 

E. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab 

surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other 

thinfilm finish coating system. 

1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power- driven trowel. Begin 

final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over 

surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of 

trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface plane so 

that depressions between high spots do not exceed 1/8" under a 10' straightedge. 

Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering 

system. 

F. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set 

mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, the immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface 

by fine brooming. 

G. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to all ramps, sidewalk, exterior concrete 

platforms and steps, and elsewhere as indicated. 





1. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with 

fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish 

with Architect before application. 

3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 

temperatures. 

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing 

and finishing. Weather permitting; keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days at a 

temperature of 50 degrees F minimum. 

C. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has 

dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid 

rapid drying at end of final curing period. 

D. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by liquid membrane curing compound, by moist 

curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 

The Contractor may choose the method of curing compatible with project requirements and 

site conditions. 

E. Provide moist curing by one of the following methods: 

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 

2. Continuous water-fog spray. 

3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover 

with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage 

of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 

F. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: 

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in 

widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by 

waterproof tape or adhesive. 

2. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and 

waterproof tape. 

G. Provide liquid membrane curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over 

cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs, as follows: 





1. Apply specified curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing 

operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by 

power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas 

subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity 

of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

2. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with 

coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, 

dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue-down 

carpet), painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise notified in 

writing by Architect that coating material is compatible with membrane curing 

compound. 

H. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, 

supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing 

period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods 

specified above, as applicable. 

I. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other 

flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing method. 

1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use 

of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 

J. Sealer and Dustproofer: Apply a second coat of specified curing compound only to surfaces 

given a first coat. 

K. Chemical Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors where 

indicated. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete 

surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3 strength, 

second coat, 1/2 strength; third coat, 2/3 strength. Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 

hours for drying between coats. 

3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS 

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and 

similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 

degrees F (10 degrees C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently 

hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection 

operations are maintained. 

B. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other 

vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without 

loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 




3.11 RE-USE OF FORMS 


A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in work. Split, frayed, delaminated or 

otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply 

new form coating compound as specified for new formwork. 

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, 

remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid 

offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to 

Architect and/or Engineer. 

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 

A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other 

trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place 

and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other 

miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. 

B. Slabs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still 

green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and 

terminations slightly rounded. 

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, 

as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct 

elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing 

machines and equipment. 

1. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated, using specified non-shrink grout. 

D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams 

where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing 

steel during concrete placement. 

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately 

after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect and/or Engineer. 

1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by 

tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1". 

Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, 

dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding 

agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. 

2. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland 

cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test 





areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding 

with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding 

surface. 

B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if 

defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color 

and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other 

projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by 

cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs 

secured in place with bonding agent. 

1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect 

the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace 

concrete. 

C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for 

smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. 

Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for 

trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness using a template having required slope. 

1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of 

concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or 

which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced sections 

regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets and other 

objectionable conditions. 

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at 

least 14 days. 

3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of 

surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh 

concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching 

compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect and/or Engineer. 

D. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by 

cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with 

clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. 

Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and apply concrete bonding 

compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or 

class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. 

Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 

E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry-pack method. 

Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose 

particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, 

consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh 

sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after 

bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match 

adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 





F. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect/Engineer for method and procedure, 

using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. 

G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of 


3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. 

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete will include the 

following: 

1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with 

ASTM C 94. 

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each strength test; additional 

tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 

3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight 

concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each 

day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 

4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F (4 degrees 

C) and below, and every thirty minutes when 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) and 

above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 

C. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one sample set of 5 standard cylinders (6 inches 

by 12 inches) for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. The contractor 

may require additional cylinders. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test 

specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. 

D. Ascertain that the test specimens are properly protected until shipped to the testing 

laboratory. Record and identify each cylinder with the location of the concrete from which the 

specimen was taken. Keep marking in sequence. 

E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one sample set for strength tests of each class of 

concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less than once for 

each 50 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of concrete nor less than once for each 5,000 square 

feet of surface area for slabs and walls; two specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested 

at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 

1. When frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of 

concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each 

batch if fewer than 5 are used. 





2. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratorycured 

cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for 

protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 

3. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three 

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, 

and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive by more than 

500 psi. 

F. Immediately after tests or inspections have been made and in no case late than seven (7) 

days after tests of inspection have been made, the laboratory shall furnish copies of all test 

and inspection reports. In the case of a low strength concrete, the report should be furnish 

within 24 hours. 

G. Site Inspection Daily Report: The site inspectors shall submit a daily report which shall 

contain the following data: 

1. The project identification name and number. 

2. Concrete supplier. 

3. Date of concrete placement. 

4. Weather conditions and air temperature (ranges). 

5. Location of placed concrete and time of starting and stopping of placement. 

6. Weather conditions and air temperature (ranges). 

7. Location of placed concrete and time of starting and stopping of placement. 

8. Identification of truck loads. 

9. Amount of water added in transit or at site. 

10. Time of discharging concrete from truck. 

11. Temperature of concrete during discharging from truck and during placing. 

12. Slump test results, identifying truck load and cylinders made. 




13. Air entrainment test results, identifying truck load. 


14. Test cylinders cast, identifying cylinder number, design strength, time taken, slump, 

truck numbers from which taken and location of pours with yardage of concrete 

placed at each location. 

15. Name of inspector, with time of arrival and departure from site and total hours for 

day. 

16. Cylinder Test Reports: Reports on test cylinders for 7 and 28 day tests (also show 7day 

data on 28 day report). 

17. Location of pour and specific location represented by cylinders. 

18. Date cast. 

19. Date tested. 

20. Age of test. 

21. Number of days cured in laboratory. 

22. Required strength. 

23. Actual strength. 

24. Type of fracture. 

25. Consistency as measured by slump. 

26. Air content (if air entrained concrete). 

27. Weight of cylinders as received. 

28. Temperature of concrete when placed. 

H. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be 

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 





I. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test 

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained 

in the structure, as directed by Architect/Engineer. Testing service may conduct tests to 

determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other 

methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional 

testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. 

END OF SECTON 03300 




Division 4 

Masonry



SECTION 04200 UNIT MASONRY 


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary conditions 

and other Specification sections applicable to the work of this section. 

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK 

A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 

B. Types of masonry work required include: 


1. Concrete unit masonry 

A. In compliance with Section 01300 (if applicable) and as specified herein. 

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, 

and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type 

complies with specified requirements. 


A. Standards: ACI 530, Building Code Requirements For Masonry Structures and ACI 530.1, 

Specifications for Masonry Structures. 

B. Fire performance; ASTM E 119 

C. Testing: Independent Testing Laboratory to be hired by Contractor 

D. Single Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform 

texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, 

from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually 

related surfaces. 





E. Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, 

including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component 

and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 


A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. 

B. Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, 

temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion or other causes. 

C. Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during delivery and until time of installation 

D. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location. 

E. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. 

F. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent deterioration by corrosion and 

accumulation of dirt. 

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of 

each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. 

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in 

place. 

2. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 72 hours after building masonry 

walls or columns. 

3. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 7 days after building masonry walls or 

columns. 

B. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed 

or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. 

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings 

spread on ground and over wall surface. 

2. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. 




C. Cold Weather Protection: 

1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen. 


2. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top 

surface is dry to the touch. 

3. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. 

4. No masonry work shall be performed when the air temperature is 38 deg. F. and falling. 

D. Perform the following construction procedures while masonry work is progressing. Temperature 

ranges indicated below apply to air temperatures existing at time of installation except for 

grout. 

1. For grout, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. In 

heating mortar and grout materials, maintain mixing temperature selected within 10 

degrees F (6 degrees C). 

a. 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 

1) Mortar: Heat mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 

degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 

2) Grout: Follow normal masonry procedures. 

b. 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 

1) Mortar: Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar temperatures 

between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C); 

maintain temperature of mortar on boards above freezing. 

2) Grout: Heat grout materials to 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) to produce in 

place grout temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) at end of work day. 

3) Do not heat water for mortar and grout to above 160 degrees F (71 degrees 

C). 

E. Protect completed masonry and masonry not being worked on in the following manner. Temperature 

ranges indicated apply to mean daily air temperatures except for grouted masonry. 

For grouted masonry, temperature ranges apply to anticipated minimum night temperatures. 

1. 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 

a. Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weatherresistive 

membrane. 




2. 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 



a. Completely cover masonry with weather-resistive membrane for at least 24 hours. 

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below applicable 

to each form of concrete masonry unit required. 

B. Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, 

bonding, pilasters, and other special conditions. 

C. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, except where indicated as bullnose. 

D. Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics indicated below for Type, face 

size, exposed face and, under each form of block included, for weight classification: 

E. Size: 

1. Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15- 

5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x thickness indicated. 

2. Concrete masonry unit with dimensions as indicated in the architectural drawings and 

structural drawings 

F. Type II, non-moisture-controlled units. 

G. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum temperature of 350 degrees F (176 degrees 

C) and a minimum pressure of 125 psi. 

H. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. Color 

as noted on architectural drawings. 

I. Provide normal weight aggregate hollow load bearing CMU units complying with: ASTM C 90 

- modified for units 8" or over in width. 

J. Provide normal weight aggregate hollow non-load bearing CMU units complying with: ASTM 

C 129 - Type 1 for units 6" or less in width. 

K. Special finish: Standard aggregate, ground finish. Refer to architectural drawings. 




L. Required minimum compressive strength of masonry f'm = 1,900 psi 

2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS: 


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. 

Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 270 

C. Above Grade: Type S (f'm = 1800 psi) 

D. Below Grade: Type M (f'm = 2500 psi) 

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded 

with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. 

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

G. Water: Clean and potable. 

2.3 REINFORCING STEEL 

A. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, No. 3 to No. 18. 

B. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A 496 

C. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185 

2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES 

A. Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with requirements 

indicated under each form of joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other 

characteristics: 

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire and with ASTM A 153, 

Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per sq. ft. of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after prefabrication 

into units. 

a. Application: All exterior walls 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, Class 2 or ASTM A 635; hotdip 

galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B. 




a. Application: Use for anchors. 


3. Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous 

side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10', with 

prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below. 

4. Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2" less than 

nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not 

less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere. 

a. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.1483" diameter. 

b. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.1483" diameter. 

5. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: 

a. Ladder type with cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 11. 

B. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash 

block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 

1. Polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287, General Purpose Grade, Designation 

PVC-63506. 

2. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 

226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 

2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS 

A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) and 

laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. 

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, 

retarders, water repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

B. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 





C. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and aggregates in a mechanical 

batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content. 

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction of reinforced 

and nonreinforced unit masonry. 

1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal direction, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least horizontal dimension, unless 


3. The 28 day compressive strength of grout shall be at least 3000 psi. The slump shall 

be from 8" to 11" 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Do not wet concrete masonry units. 

B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from reinforcing. 

C. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls, floors and other masonry construction to the full 

thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry 

units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. 

D. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not 

less than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent 

chases and recesses. 

E. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After installation 

of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening. 

F. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut 

units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units 

without cutting where possible. 

G. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. 




3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 


A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and other elements 

do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. 

For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 

1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head 

joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10', 1/2" maximum. 

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal 

grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" 

in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements 

in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit. 

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, 

walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. 

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions 

shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus ½". 

E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more 

than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint 

thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8". 

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint 

widths and to accurately locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid 

the use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. 

B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately 

spaced and coordinated with other work. 

C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running 

bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. 

Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not 

less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with 

less that nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean 

exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry 

units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 

E. Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections 

of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

F. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise 

indicated. 





G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates, 

beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face 

shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns 

and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or 

grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed 

including areas under cells. 

B. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. 

If not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints. 

C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

E. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound 

corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments 

are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. 

F. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise 

shown. 

G. For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" units, 

in addition to masonry bonding. 

H. Intersecting Load-bearing Walls: If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with 8" 

maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. vertically, or 

omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c. vertically. Form anchors 

of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less 

than 2" or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled 

cores. 

3.5 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal 

side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of 

walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6". 

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. 





C. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be 

omitted. 

D. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. 

Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, 

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. 

E. Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows: 

1. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. For parapets, space reinforcement at 8" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement 

placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel 

and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2'-0" beyond 

jambs of the opening except at control joints. 

4. In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required 

to comply with the above. 

3.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Provide vertical and horizontal expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry 

where shown. Build-in related items as the masonry work progresses. 

3.7 LINTELS 

A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" for brick size 

units and 1'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 

Provide precast or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling 

and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.8 FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK 

A. General: Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at, or above, shelf angles, lintels, 

ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such 

water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which 

could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with 

mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. Extend flashings 

through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drop. 





B. Extend flashing the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry 

each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer 

wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior 

face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, 

carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2". At 

heads and sills turn up ends not less than 2" to form a pan. 

C. Install flashing to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 

D. Provide weep holes in the head joints of the first course of masonry immediately above concealed 

flashings. Space 24" o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry 

work. 

3.9 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise 

damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining 

units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and 

completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work to 

provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. 

C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: 

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape 

hoes or chisels. 

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison 

purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with 

cleaning of masonry. 

3. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners 

promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 

4. Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 

20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made from clay or shale, except use masonry 

cleaner indicated below. 

5. Detergent. 

6. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and 

applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins. 





D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer, 

which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time of 

substantial completion. 

3.10 SPECIAL INSPECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION 

E. The Owner will employ a qualified designated Structural Masonry Inspector or a Special Inspector 

registered in the State of Florida to perform the following inspection requirements: 

1. The inspector shall be completely familiar with the plans and specifications of the project. 

For each inspection, the following items shall be noted on the Field Inspection 

Reports: 

a. Specific drawing numbers for the plans, sections and details reviewed for the inspection. 

b. Location of the inspection: note column lines, floor, direction, etc., to accurately describe 

the exact location of the inspection. 

2. The inspector shall verify that all dowels are properly located and that the length of 

the dowel will provide adequate lapping. The following items shall be noted on the 

Field Inspection Reports: 

a. Grade of reinforcement, typical size of reinforcement. 

b. Length provided for lapping. 

3. The inspector shall verify that the head joints and bed joints are full, that the head 

and bed joints are filled to at least the thickness of the faceshell and that the width of 

the mortar joints are within specification. 

4. The inspector shall note whether construction is low lift or high lift grouting. If construction 

is low lift, inspector shall note the height of the lift, which should be less than 

5 feet. If construction is high lift grouting (lift is greater than 5 feet), inspector shall 

note the cleanouts. 

5. The inspector shall note any excessive mortar fins within the masonry cells to be 

grouted. 

6. The inspector shall note if the grout is being consolidated by mechanical vibration. 

7. For columns and pilasters, the inspector shall verify that the reinforcing steel is properly 

tied at the specified spacings. 

8. The inspector shall verify the proper embedment of reinforcing steel, bolts, etc. 






SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 





B. All masonry construction shall be in conformance with "Building Code Requirements for Masonry 

Structures" (ACI 530-95 /ASCE 5-95) and "Specifications for Masonry Structures" (ACI 

530.1-95/ASCE 6-95) except as herein modified. 

C. Requirements of Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" apply to work of this section, including Special 

Inspection During Construction 


A. Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and in schedules. 

B. Types of masonry work required include: 


1. Concrete unit masonry 

A. In compliance with Section 01300 (if applicable) and as specified herein. 

1. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of reinforcement 

bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing 

Reinforced Concrete Structures". Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup 

spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication 

and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. Show wall elevations. 





2.1 MATERIALS 


A. General: Refer to Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for masonry materials and accessories not 

included in this section. 

B. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades complying with ASTM A 

615, except as otherwise noted. 

C. Provide Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18, except as otherwise indicated 

D. Shop-fabricate reinforcement bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. 


3.1 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will 

reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not 

shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive 

rusting or other causes. 

B. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars 

against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. 

Where vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear distance between 

bars of not less than the normal bar diameter or 1" (whichever is greater). 

C. For columns, piers and pilasters, provide a clear distance between vertical bars as indicated, 

but not less than 1-1/2 times the nominal bar diameter or 1-1/2", whichever is greater. Provide 

lateral ties as indicated. 

D. Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other points unless acceptable to the 

Architect/Engineer. Provide lapped splices, unless otherwise indicated. In splicing vertical 

bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie. 

E. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not indicated, as required by governing code. 

F. Weld splices where indicated. Comply with the requirements of AWS D1.4 for welding materials 

and procedures. 

G. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum 

cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less that 6" at 

ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. 





Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column 

fire-proofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. 

H. Anchoring: Anchor reinforced masonry work to supporting structure as indicated. 

I. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non-reinforced masonry where they intersect. 

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: 

A. Refer to Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for general installation requirements of unit masonry. 

B. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced 

masonry elements. 

C. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight 

to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to 

maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 

D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently 

to carry their own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed 

on them during construction. 

E. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of members before 

removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the 

curing period. 

1. 10 days for girders and beams. 

2. 7 days for slabs. 

3. 7 days for reinforced masonry soffits 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 

A. General: Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 

B. Lay CMU units with full-face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between 

units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the 

thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross-webs of starting courses in mortar. 

Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8" joints. 

C. Walls: 





1. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units with vertical joints in each course centered on 

units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock 

each course at corners and intersections. Use special-shaped units where shown, 

and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other 

special conditions. 

2. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and 

grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum 

clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of 

mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. 

3. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units or 

modify regular units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement 

bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath or wire screening in mortar joints under 

bond beam courses over cores or cells of non-reinforced vertical cells, or provide 

units with solid bottoms. 

A. Option: Where all vertical cores are not shown to be grouted, Contractor may elect to fill all 

vertical cores with grout. In which case, requirements for mortar bedding of cross-webs and 

closing of core spaces below bond beams do not apply. 

B. Columns, Piers and Pilasters 

C. Grouting 

1. Use CMU units of the size, shape and number of vertical core spaces shown. If not 

shown, use units which provide minimum clearances and grout coverage for number 

and size of vertical reinforcement bars shown. 

2. Provide pattern bond shown, or if not shown, alternate head joints in vertical alignment. 

3. Where bonded pilaster construction is shown, lay wall and pilaster units together to 

maximum pour height specified. 

1. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling spaces less than 2" in one or both horizontal 

directions. 

2. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for filling 2" spaces or larger in both horizontal 

directions. 

3. Grouting Technique: At the Contractor's option, use either low-lift or high-lift grouting 

techniques subject to requirements which follow. 

D. Low-Lift Grouting 





1. Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in vertical cores to be 

grouted. 

2. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum 

pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not 

exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 ft. 

3. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5' height, or if bond beam occurs 

below 5' height stop pour at course below bond beam. 

4. Pour grout using chutes or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. 

Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. 

Terminate grout pours 1-1/2" below top course of pour. 

5. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2" below bond beam course. Place horizontal 

reinforcement in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections. Place grout in 

bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. 

E. High-Lift Grouting 

1. Do not use high-lift grouting technique for grouting of CMU unless minimum cavity 

dimension and area is 3" and 10 sq. in. respectively. 

2. Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to be filled with 

grout. 

3. Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary supports for units 

above, or use header units with concrete brick supports, or cut openings in one face 

shell. 

4. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing 

grout. 

5. Limit grout lifts to a maximum height of 5' and grout pour to a maximum height of 24', 

for single wythe hollow concrete masonry walls, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Place vertical reinforcement before grouting. Place before or after laying masonry units, as 

required by job conditions. The vertical reinforcement to dowels at base of masonry where 

shown and thread CMU over or around reinforcement. Support vertical reinforcement at intervals 

not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10'. 

G. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire loops extending into cells 

as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets. After insertion of reinforcement bar, pull 

loops and bar to proper position and tie free ends. 





H. Where reinforcement is prefabricated into cage units before placing, fabricate units with vertical 

reinforcement bars and lateral ties of the size and spacing indicated. 

I. Place horizontal beam reinforcement as the masonry units are laid. 

J. Embed lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints where indicated. Place as masonry units are 

laid, at vertical spacing shown. 

K. Where lateral ties are shown in contact with vertical reinforcement bars, embed additional 

lateral tie reinforcement in mortar joints. Place as shown, or if not shown, provide as required 

to prevent grout blowout or rupture of CMU face shells, but provide not less than No. 2 bars 

or 8-gage wire ties spaced 16" o.c. for members with 20" or less side dimensions, and 8" o.c. 

for members with side dimensions exceeding 20". 

L. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove 

dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other foreign materials from grout 

spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper position. Clean top surface of structural 

members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close 

cleanout holes if required and brace closures to resist grout pressures. 

M. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength 

to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, 

if required, before starting grouting operations. 

N. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods are acceptable to the 

Architect. 

O. Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with not more than 

one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5'. Allow 

not less than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate 

each grout lift during pouring operation. 

P. Place grout in lintels or beams over openings in one continuous pour. Where bond beam occurs 

more than one course below top of pour, fill bond beam course to within 1" of vertically 

reinforced cavities, during construction of masonry. 

Q. When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry, extend reinforcement 

beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within1-1/2" of top course 

of first pour. 

R. After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place reinforcement for second pour 

section before grouting. Repeat sequence if more pours are required. 

S. Concrete for unit masonry is specified on Section 03300. 

T. Concrete (Grout) for unit masonry shall be tested in conformance with ASTM C1019. 





Division 5 

Metals



SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 





A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details 

to show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. 

B. Structural steel is that work defined in AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise 

shown on drawings. 

C. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications are specified elsewhere in Division 5. 


A. Product Data: Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions 

for following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with 

specifications including specified standards. 

1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical 

and physical properties. 

2. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers. 

3. Structural steel primer paint. 

4. Shrinkage-resistant grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings prepared under supervision of a registered professional 

engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of 

structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Structural steel shop drawings shall be 

signed and sealed by the professional engineer who supervised their production. 





1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate 

welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 

2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and 

other anchorages to be installed by others. 

3. Test Reports: Submit copies of reports of tests conducted on shop and field bolted 

and welded connections. Include data on type (s) of tests conducted and test results. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated: 

1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". 

2. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following 

sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for 

the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his 

preparation of these shop drawings". 

3. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for 

Buildings”, including "Commentary" of Supplements thereto as issued. 

4. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved 

by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation. 

5. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 

6. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet 

Piling and Bars for Structural Use". 

B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance 

with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 

C. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS 

qualification tests. 

D. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's responsibility. 




1.5 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE 


A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. 

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete 

or masonry, in ample time to not delay work. 

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members 

off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged 

materials from erosion and deterioration. 

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage 

to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged material or 

structures as directed. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, use only materials 

which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller 

marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding 

and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes. 

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Beams and Columns: ASTM A992 Grade 50. 

C. Plates, Bars, Channels, Rods, Anchor Bolts and Angles: ASTM A36 

D. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy=46 ksi. 

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B, Fy=35 ksi. 

F. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. 

G. All structural steel that is exposed to the exterior environment shall be galvanized as per 

ASTM A123. 

H. Anchor Bolts shall be furnished with heavy hex nuts and flat washers, and shall be ASTM 

F1554, with a nut at the embedded end. Tack weld nut to bolt or strike threads. 

I. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, 

and hardened washers, as follows: 





1. Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying 

with ASTM A325, 3/4 inch diameter, unless otherwise noted. 

2. Direct tension indicator washers may be used at Contractor's option. 

J. Steel joists shall conform to the joint AISC-SJI "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel 

Joists and Deep Longspan Steel Joists," latest edition. All joists and joist girders shall have 

been designed in accordance with Steel Joist Institute criteria and submitted to and approved 

by the institute. 

K. Electrodes for Welding: E 70 XX 

1. Provide electrodes, welding rods and filler metals equal in strength and compatible in 

appearance with parent metal joined. 

2. Welds not otherwise designated shall be 1/4 inch minimum fillet. 

L. Structural Steel Primer Paint: All structural steel, including joists, shall receive two shop 

coats of rust inhibiting primer paint conforming to the performance requirements of Federal 

Specification TT-P-636, SSPC-Paint 13 or equal. 

M. Non-metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Pre-mixed, non-metallic, non-corrosive, nonstaining 

product containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage compensating 

agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CRD-C621. 

N. Available Products: Subject to compliance with Instructions to Bidders and Section 01630 (if 

applicable), products which may be incorporated in the work include the following. All other 

manufacturers must request approval. 

2.2 FABRICATION 

1. NS Grout; Euclid Chemical Co. 

2. Masterflow 713; Master Builders. 

3. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp. 

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to 

greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications 

and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members 

where indicated. 

B. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence 

which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 





C. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing 

operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, 

burrs, and other defects. 

D. Ends of columns shall be milled to bear at all splices and attachment of base plates. 

E. Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 

1. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 

2. Framing connections shall be AISC Type 2 double-angle bolted connections, unless 

otherwise noted. Select connections to support 60% the total uniform load capacity 

shown in the uniform load constants, part 3 of the AISC Steel Construction Manual, 

for the span and grade of steel specified. 

F. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance 

with AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A 490 Bolts". 

G. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of 

welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 

H. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, 

and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop 

drawings. 

2.3 SHOP PAINTING 

1. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to 

receive other work. 

2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or 

enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 

A. General: Shop paint structural steel, except those members or portions of members to be 

embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed 

portions and initial 2" of embedded areas only. 

B. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections. 

C. Do not paint surfaces which are scheduled to receive sprayed- on fireproofing. 

D. Apply two coats of primer to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. 

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 





E. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. 

Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance 

with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) as follows: 

1. SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning". 

2. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning". 

F. Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance 

with manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less 

than 1.0 mils. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and 

exposed surfaces. 


3.1 ERECTION 

A. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Contractor shall provide adequate temporary bracing, shoring 

and guying of the framing against wind, construction loads or other temporary forces until 

such protection is no longer required for the safe support of the structure. Provide temporary 

shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. 

Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and 

final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment of 

structures as erection proceeds. 

B. Temporary Planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively 

complete work. 

C. Anchor Bolts: Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural 

steel to foundations and other in-place work. 

1. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors 

to accurate locations. 

2. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor bolt installation requirements in 

concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation. 

D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bondreducing 

materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base 

and bearing plates. 

1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on 

wedges or other adjusting devices. 





2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 

Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or 

bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 

3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no 

voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. 

4. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer's instructions. 

E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and 

adjust various members forming a part of complete frame or structure before permanently 

fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before 

assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations 

and alignment. 

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances. 

2. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings. 

F. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug 

welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 

1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, 

alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 

2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in 

secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 

G. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary 

structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under 

stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance 

when permitted. 

H. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same materials as used for 

shop painting. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 

I. Return all welds at corners twice the normal weld size minimum. 

J. All copes, blocks, cutouts and other cutting of structural members shall have all reentrant 

corners shaped notch-free to a radius of 1/2 inch minimum. 




K. All beams shall be fabricated and erected natural camber up. 


L. Structural openings, supports, anchors, etc., around or affected by mechanical, electrical and 

plumbing equipment shall be verified with the equipment purchased before proceeding with 

structural work affected. 

M. Unless detailed elsewhere in the drawings, openings in roof decking larger than 1 square foot 

shall be framed by angles 4 x 4 x 1/4 leg down, bearing on a joist at each end. Cope vertical 

leg 4 inches each end. Weld additional angles of the same size to form a rectangle of the 

appropriate size. 

N. Provide galvanized steel lintel angles for support of masonry veneer over openings, unless 

otherwise noted. Install L6 x 6 x 3/8 with 8 inch minimum bearing each end. 

O. Open Web Steel Joists: 

1. All joists on column centerlines shall be secured by 3/4 inch diameter A325 bolts at 

the top chord bearing. The bottom chord shall be extended and welded to the column. 

2. Continuous diagonal bridging shall be used including where cross-bracing is indicated. 

Weld bridging to top and bottom chords of joists. 

3. All joists not requiring bolted connections shall be welded to support with 1/4 inch 

welds 2 inches long each side. 

4. All joist bottom chords shall be angles. 

5. Bridging shall be completed and approved by engineer prior to placing metal deck. 

6. Joists shall bear 4 inches minimum on masonry and 2-1/2 inches minimum on steel, 

unless otherwise noted. Joists bearing on masonry shall bear on an embedded steel 

plate. 

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to inspect high-strength 

bolted connections and welded connections and to perform tests and prepare test reports. 

1. High strength bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's 

"Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. 

2. Welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 procedures. 





B. Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens 

comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom. 

C. Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or 

produced so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished. 

D. Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect/Engineer 

reserves the right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not 

complying with specified requirements. 

E. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and/or laboratory test reports 

have indicated to be not in compliance with contract document requirements. Perform additional 

tests, at Contractor's expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance 

of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work. 





Division 8 

Openings


1.1 SUMMARY 

SECTION 08114 STEEL DOOR FRAMES 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1.2 MATERIALS 

1.3 DOORS 

1. Steel door frames. 


A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, commercial steel (CS), Type B; pickled and 

oiled. Thickness indicated is minimum thickness according to HMMA 803, Steel Tables. 

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial steel (CS), Type B. Thickness 

indicated is minimum thickness according to HMMA 803, Steel Tables. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel (CS), Type B; with G60 

zinc (galvanized). Thickness indicated is minimum thickness of uncoated base metal. 

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built 

into exterior walls, zinc coat according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. 

A. General: Flush-design, 1-3/4 inches thick, of seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Visible joints or seams around glazed or louvered panel inserts are permitted. 

2. Single-Acting Swing Doors: Bevel vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 

B. Nonmetallic Core: Laminated with waterproof adhesive to both door faces, of construction 

indicated. 

C. Honeycomb Core: Resin-impregnated Kraft paper with maximum 1-inch cells and minimum 

42-psi crushing strength. 





D. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings 

indicated. 

E. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 

F. Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to 

face sheets not more than 6 inches o.c. 

1. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same 

material as face sheet so flanges of channels are even with bottom and top edges of 

face sheets. 

2. For exterior doors, close bottom edge with metallic-coated steel closing channel and 

top edge with filler channel of same material, so webs of channels are flush with 

bottom and top door edges. 

G. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing plates from same material as door to comply 

with the following: 

1. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 inch thick by 1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than 

hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 

2. Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Closers, and Concealed Holders: 0.093 inch thick. 

3. All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: 0.053 inch thick. 

H. Exterior Doors: Fabricate face sheets of doors from 0.053-inch- thick, stretcher-leveled, 

metallic-coated steel sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of doors to permit 

entrapped moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 

1.4 FRAMES 

A. General: Full-welded unit construction, with corners mitered, reinforced, and continuously 

welded full depth and width of frame. 

1. Exterior Frames: Formed from 0.0785-inch- thick 14 ga., metallic-coated steel 

sheets. 

B. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate from same material as frame. Minimum thickness of 

steel reinforcing plates for hardware as follows: 

1. Hinges and Pivots: 0.167 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches wide by 6 inches longer than 

hinge, secured by not less than 6 spot welds. 




2. Strikes, Flush Bolts, and Closers: 0.093 inch. 

3. Surface-Mounted, Hold-Open Arms and Panic Devices: 0.093 inch. 


C. Mullions and Transom Bars: Closed or tubular mullions and transom bars. Fasten mullions 

and transom bars at crossings and to jambs by butt-welding. Reinforce joints between frame 

members with concealed clip angles or sleeves of same metal and thickness as frame. 

D. Head Reinforcement: Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at 

top for grouting. 

E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls 

according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 

F. Jamb Anchors: Weld jamb anchors to frames near hinges and directly opposite on strike 

jamb. 

1. Masonry Construction: Formed of same material as frame; not less than 0.053 inch 

thick; with leg not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long. 

a. Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches in height. 

b. Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height. 

2. In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Anchor frame jambs with minimum 3/8-inch diameter 

concealed bolts into expansion shields or inserts 6 inches from top and bottom and 

26 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Reinforce frames at anchor locations. 

Except for fire-rated openings, apply removable stop to cover anchor bolts, unless 


G. Floor Anchors: For each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed of same material as 

frame, 0.067 inch thick, as follows: 

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners, 

welded to bottom of jambs and mullions. 

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable type with extension clips, 

3. allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish 

floor surface. 

H. Head Anchors: 2 head anchors for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in steelstud 

walls. 





I. Head Strut Supports: 3/8-by-2-inch vertical steel struts extending from top of frame at each 

jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other 

structural support at each jamb. 

J. Structural Reinforcing Members: Installed as part of frame assembly, where indicated. 

K. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches wide in masonry wall openings, 

continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 0.093 inch thick for full width of opening, welded 

to back of frame at head. 

L. Spreader Bars: Removable, located across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and 

mullions. 

M. Rubber Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stop in strike jamb to receive 

three silencers on single-door frames and drill head jamb stop to receive two silencers on 

double-door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. 

1.5 FINISHES 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for cleaning, treating, priming and, when specified, finishing. 

B. Finish products specified in this Section after fabrication. 

C. Steel Sheet Finishes: 

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE 

No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Immediately after surface preparation, 

apply fast-curing, corrosion-inhibiting, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer, 

ANSI A224.1, compatible with finish coats indicated. Apply smooth coat of even 

consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils. 





PART 1. PART 1 - GENERAL 

SECTION 08711 DOOR HARDWARE 

1.1 WORK COVERED BY THIS SECTION 


A. Consists of securing and furnishing to the job site all Finish Hardware in accordance with this 

section and applicable drawings. It is intended that the following list of hardware cover all 

items required to complete the project. Any oversight should be provided with like hardware 

of a similar application and brought to the Design Professional’s attention during the bidding 

period. Approved additions or changes shall be corrected by addendum.. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND DRAWINGS 

A. Section 08114 – Steel Doors and Frames 

B. Architectural Drawings 

1.3 REFERENCES 

A. State and Local Codes including Authority having jurisdiction. 

B. Florida Building Code 

C. Dade County Product Approval Protocol PA201, 202, 203. 

D. ANSI 156.18 - Materials and Finishes. 

E. ANSI 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Usable by Physically 

Handicapped People. 

F. Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction. 

G. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. 

H. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Assoc. 

I. NFPA - National Fire Protection Assoc. 

1. NFPA80 - Fire Doors and Windows 




2. NFPA101 - Life Safety Code 

J. DI - Steel Door Institute 



A. Submit 6 copies of vertically formatted Hardware Schedule in accordance with General 

Conditions. 

B. Format Hardware Schedule into Hardware Groups to clearly identify each door and frame 

with the following. 

C. Unique number; Descriptive location; Size; Hand; Degree of swing. 

1. List within Hardware Groups all items required for each door or pair of doors, 

including the following. 

a. Quantity; Item description; Manufacturers name and catalog number; Size: BHMA 

finish. 

D. Furnish numerically sorted cross reference of door numbers to 

1. Hardware Groups. 

E. Furnish four (4) copies of catalog cuts for each item of hardware. 

F. Furnish index and explanation of abbreviations, symbols and/or codes contained in Hardware 

Schedule. 

G. Furnish chart of mounting heights and locations. 

H. Provide templates to manufacturer’s indicating location and reinforcing required for hardware 

items. 

I. Approval of the Hardware Schedule will not relieve the supplier's responsibility to furnish all 

hardware to complete the project. 

1.5 COORDINATION 

A. Furnish templates and approved Hardware Schedule in a timely manner to respective 

material suppliers and trades to ensure accurate reinforcing and fitting of finish hardware. 






A. Supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished, with 

warehousing facilities within 50 miles of the project. An AHC, Architectural Hardware 

Consultant, or person of equivalent experience shall be in their employ and available for 

consultation to the Architect, Owner and General Contractor at reasonable times during the 

course of work. 

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each category of hardware; (lockset, latchset, deadbolt); 

(hinges); (closers), etc. from a single manufacturer when possible. 

C. Hardware for fire rated openings shall comply with NFPA80, State and Local Fire Safety 

Codes. 

D. Hardware shall comply with requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act, ADA, 

A117.1. 

E. Manufacturer’s shall provide both pre installation instruction and post installation walk through 

to insure proper function and installation of all items. Recommendations, as needed, will be 

made for adjustment or replacement of any hardware items deemed unacceptable. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND IDENTIFICATION 

A. Package hardware items individually in manufacturer’s original cartons, clearly marked to 

indicate contents and cross referenced to Hardware Schedule. 

B. Accept delivery and provide a locked storage area protected from moisture, sunlight, paint, 

chemicals, etc. 

1.8 MAINTENANCE 

A. Furnish four (4) copies of any specialized tools and maintenance instruction manuals to 

Owner’s Representative. Manuals are to be bound in three ring hard backed binders, 

incorporate a master index at the front and separation of manufacturer’s products by plastic 

tabs. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Provide a one (1) year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship, commencing 

with substantial completion of the project. Extended warranties are specifically mentioned in 

each product category. 





2.1 MANUFACTURERS 


A. Those noted in Hardware Groups are intended to establish a level of quality for the project. 

Proposed alternates shall be submitted to the Design Professional fourteen (14) days prior to 

bid date complete with physical samples and four (4) catalog cuts. Acceptance of alternate 

proposals shall be by addendum only. 

2.2 FINISHES 

A. As noted in Hardware Groups: 

2.3 HINGES: 

1. Interior Hinges; Surface Bolts; 70 Series Overhead 

A. As noted in Hardware Groups. 

B. Provide shims and instructions for proper door adjustment. 

C. Stanley and Hager are acceptable alternates in this product category. 

D. Warranty all items against defects in material and workmanship for a period of three (3) 

years. 

2.4 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS, MORTISE AND RIM CYLINDERS 


B. Provide a three (3) year warranty against defects in material and workmanship. 

2.5 2.05 KEYING, KEYS 

A. All locks to be Keyed, Masterkeyed and Construction keyed utilizing proprietary Everest 

keyways. 

B. Supplier to meet with Owners Representative to determine keying requirements. Final 

instructions to be provided in writing. 





C. Ship all permanent Keys, Master keys, Grand Master keys and Extractor keys directly to 

Owners representative properly marked with door number and location. 

D. Construction keying: 

E. Keys: 

1. All keyed cylinders shall be operated by a construction key that can be deactivated 

upon job completion. 

2. As specific areas of the project are completed the General Contractor, in concert with 

the Owner’s representative, shall remove the construction inserts rendering the 

construction keys inoperative. 

1. Stamp all keys “Do Not Duplicate”. 

2. Furnish: 

2.6 EXIT DEVICES 

a. 2 keys ea. individually keyed cylinder. 

b. 4 total for ea. keyed alike group. 

c. 6 Master keys for ea. master keyed set. 

d. 4 Grand Master keys. 

e. 25 Construction keys. 

f. 4 Extractorl keys. 

A. As noted in Hardware Groups 

B. Thru bolt to door with sex bolts 

C. Provide a three (3) year warranty against defects in material and/or workmanship on all 

mechanical products 

2.7 CLOSERS 


B. Install on inside of exterior doors and on non public side of interior doors where possible. 




C. Thru bolt to door with sex bolts. 


D. Provide ten (10) year warranty against defects in material and workmanship on all 

mechanical products and a two (2) year warranty on all electronic 

2.8 PUSH, PULL AND KICK PLATES 

2.9 STOPS 

2.10 MUTES 


B. Rockwood and Quality are acceptable alternates in this product category. 


B. Rockwood and Quality are acceptable alternates in this product category 


2.11 THRESHOLDS; WEATHERSTRIPPING, ASTRAGALS 


B. Zero and Pemko are acceptable alternates in this product category. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on 

shop drawings. 

B. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 




3.2 INSTALLATION 


A. Utilize instructions and templates provided with each item of hardware. Where cutting and 

fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are to be later pained or 

finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation of hardware items with 

finishing work specified in Division 9. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have 

been completed on the substrates involved. 

B. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as 

specifically indicated or required to comply with other governing regulations. 

1. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and 

Frames X DHI. 

2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1.7, Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. 

3. ADAG – Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines. 

4. FACBC – Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction. 

C. Set units level and plumb. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for 

proper installation and operation. 

D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchoring or fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 

E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic 

complying with requirements specified in Division 7, Joint Sealers. 

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Check and adjust the operation of each door and item of hardware to ensure proper function 

and operation. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 

B. Final adjustments are to be made after all ventilating systems are in operation. 

C. Clean all hardware items and adjacent surfaces after installation. 

D. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance of the space all 

items shall be revisited to assure operation and cleanliness. 




3.4 HARDWARE GROUPS 

A. Group 1: 

1 Removable Mullion KR4954 

1 Mortise Cylinder 20-061 613 

2 Cont. Hinges 224HD 

2 Surface Bolts SB453-12 G Inactive leaf 

1 Push Pull Lock HL6-9080R 613 Active leaf 

1 Latch Guard LG13 630 

1 Closer PA4030 EDA Series HOA 95 613 Active leaf 

1 Overhead Stop & Holder GJ90S 613 Inactive leaf 

1 Viewer 698 606 

2 Armor Plates 8400 Series 36 X 4”LDW 630 

1 Stop and Hook WS445 613 

1 Threshold 896A 

1 Set WS 5040W 

1 2 Pc Astragal 137NA 






Division 15 

Mechanical



1.2 SCOPE 

SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 


A. The other Contract Documents, Division 1 – 14, and 16 and drawings complement the 

requirements of this Section. The General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 

A. The Work shall include the furnishings of systems, equipment and materials specified in this 

Division and as called for on Mechanical Drawings, to include: supervision, operation, 

methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete 

mechanical installation. Materials and equipment used in the construction shall be new, of 

domestic manufacture, unused and free from defects. 

B. Drawings for the Work are diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of the Work and to 

indicate the general arrangement and locations of the Work. Because of the scale of the 

Drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings, access panels, hangers, supports, and 

sleeves may not be shown. This Section shall be responsible for coordinating the equipment 

to fit the space provided. The location and sizes for pipe fittings, sleeves, inserts, fire and/or 

smoke dampers, and other basic items required by code and other sections shall be 

coordinated with other trades and specification sections and included for the proper 

installation of the Work. 

C. Equipment Specification may not deal individually with minute items required such as 

components, parts, controls and devices which may be required to produce the equipment 

performance specified, to comply with Code requirements or as required to meet the 

equipment warranties. Where such items are required, they shall be included by the supplier 

of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for in the Contract Documents. 

D. Where the words "provide", "furnish", "include" or "install" are used in the Specification or on 

the Drawings, it shall mean to furnish, install and test complete and ready for operation, the 

items mentioned. If an item is either called for in the Specification or called for on the 

Drawings, it shall be considered sufficient for including same in the Work. 

E. Where noted on the Drawings or where called for in other Sections of the Specification, the 

Contractor for this Division shall install equipment furnished by others, and shall make 

required service connections. Contractor shall verify with the supplier of the equipment the 

requirements for the installation. Where rough-in only is required, the Contractor shall 

confirm rough-in locations, sizes and capacity with the equipment supplier, prior to beginning 

work. 

F. Coordinate with all trades in submittal of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be prepared at 

scale of the larger of 1/4" = 1'-0" or that used in the documents, clearly indicating all 

applicable components. Space conditions shall be detailed to the satisfaction of all concerned 

trades, subject to review and final acceptance by the Division 15 Engineer. In the event that 

Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades or so as to cause any 

interference with work of other trades, the necessary changes shall be made in the work to 

correct the condition, at no additional cost to the Owner. Coordinate drawing requirements 

with Division One specifications for coordinated shop drawing submittals. 





G. Where shop drawings include items of equipment, the equipment submittals shall be included 

with the shop drawings. Do not submit equipment and shop drawings as separate submittals. 

H. Should conflicts occur between the drawings and Section 15000 through 15995 of the 

specifications, the more stringent requirement as determined in the sole opinion of the 

Engineer, shall take precedent. Where items are shown or specified on either the drawing or 

in the specifications, they shall be deemed as specified by both and included as part of the 

contract. Should conflicts occur between Division 15 and other specification divisions, the 

more stringent requirement as determined in the sole opinion of the Division 15 Engineer 

shall prevail. 

I. Coordinate location of all Division 15 work with Division 16. Do not run piping, ductwork and 

similar Division 15 work in NEC dedicated service areas for electrical equipment, including 

above panel boards, starters, communication panels, control panels, telephone backboards, 

data panels and similar electrical elements. Do not locate any mechanical work in or above 

IRM communications closets. Coordinate with submission of shop drawings and refer 

questionable locations to architect/engineer for resolution prior to installation and correct nonconforming 

installed work at no additional cost to the owner. 

J. Where fire, smoke and fire smoke walls and floor slabs are penetrated, such penetrations 

shall be made perpendicular to the wall or floor slab. Where piping, ductwork, conduit or 

equipment runs parallel to any wall (both rated and non-rated), a minimum 6 inch clearance 

shall be provided between the wall and equipment, piping, ductwork or conduit inclusive of 

insulation. 


A. All work shall be performed in compliance with all applicable Laws, Codes and Regulations of 

the Governmental Bodies having jurisdiction over the site. 

B. Work not regulated by Governmental Bodies shall be performed in accordance with current 

and/or adopted issues of the following Codes and Standards: 

1. Codes 

a. Florida Building Code (2007 Edition) 

b. NFPA-90A (2002), Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating 

Systems 

c. NFPA-90B (1999), Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air 

Conditioning Systems 

d. Florida State Fire Prevention Code (2007) 

e. ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2007 

f. ASHRAE Standard 15 - 2004 

g. Occupational Safety Act of 1970, as amended (OSHA) 

h. ASHRAE Standard 62-2004 

i. Other codes as individually referred to in other sections 

2. Standards 

a. Air Moving and Conditioning Association - AMCA 

b. American National Standards Institute - ANSI 




c. American Society of Mechanical Engineers - ASME 


d. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 

e. American Water Works Association - AWWA 

f. Factory Mutual - FM 

g. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry - MSS 

h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association - NEMA 

i. National Fire Protection Association, National Electrical - NEC 

j. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 

k. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - SMACNA 

l. Underwriters' Laboratories - UL 

m. Other Standards as individually referred to in other Sections of the Specification. 

C. Where Code requirements vary from specified requirements, alert Engineer prior to 

proceeding with the work. Where Code requirements exceed or are more strict than 

specified requirements, the Code requirements shall be included in the Contractor’s bid and 

be incorporated into the work. 

D. Where later editions of the above referenced Codes have been adopted, they shall take 

precedence. 

1.4 FEES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Coordinate and provide such inspections as are required by the Authorities with jurisdiction 

over the site. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees associated with the work to be 

performed. 

B. Attend and provide for necessary subcontractors and manufacturers representatives 

participating in inspections and system demonstration. Provide access to the work for 

necessary inspections. 

1.5 ACTIVE SERVICES 

A. Existing active services: water (domestic, chilled, hot), gas, sewer, electric, fire protection, 

etc., when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb 

operation of active services which are to remain. If active services are encountered which 

require relocation, make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of 

procedures and for approval of outages. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they 

shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the Utility having jurisdiction. 

B. Any active service requiring an outage shall only be as approved by the Owner in writing. 

Such outages shall be scheduled with the Owner and shall be scheduled to occur during 

periods which will result in the least disruption to the Owner’s operation. 

C. Where an outage could result in disruption of a critical service, provide temporary systems or 

services as needed, such that there is no outage and service remains uninterrupted. 

D. Provide temporary services as needed to support construction. 




1.6 SITE INSPECTION 


A. Contractor shall inspect and carefully examine all of the plans, specifications and the site to 

familiarize himself with conditions which will affect his work. He shall verify points of 

connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any 

structures or other obstacles. He shall verify available space in the structure and 

accessibility required for the installation of work under this contract and alert the Engineer to 

conditions which may be detrimental or will prevent proper execution of the work. 

B. The submission of a bid will be construed that such an examination/inspection has been 

performed and extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the Work required resulting 

from observable conditions and coordination with the work of other trades. 

1.7 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Coordinate the placing of openings in the new structure as required for the installation of the 

Mechanical Work. 

B. When additional patching is required due to failure to inspect work which has been 

concealed, then provide the patching required to properly close the openings, to include 

patch painting. 

C. When cutting and patching of the structure is made necessary due to failure to install piping, 

ducts, sleeves or equipment on schedule, or due to failure to furnish, on schedule, the 

information required for the leaving of openings, then provide the cutting and patching as 

required. 

1.8 WIRING FOR MECHANICAL SUPPORT 

A. Division 16 shall provide power services for motors and equipment furnished under this 

division, to include safety disconnect switches and final connections. 

B. Division 15 shall provide internal wiring, alarm wiring, control wiring or interlock wiring (except 

the fire alarm system) for equipment furnished, to include temperature control wiring. 

C. Division 16 shall furnish motor starters or drives for motors furnished by this Contractor, 

except where other Sections call for starters or drives to be furnished by this Contractor, or 

where starters or drives are provided integral to the equipment. 

D. Coordinate with Division 16 all motors and other mechanical equipment which require 

electrical services. Provide one (1) copy of all Division 15 shop drawings to the Division 16 

contractor and confirm the exact locations for rough-ins, electrical loads, voltage, size and 

electrical characteristics for all services required, with the Division 16 contractor, prior to 

submission of shop drawings and equipment cut sheets. Identify any conflicts and bring them 

to the Engineers attention prior to ordering equipment. 

E. Where motors or equipment furnished require large services or services or of different 

electrical characteristics than those called for on the Drawings, and/or equipment submittals 

that were not coordinated between the trades, this contractor shall provide material as 

required to suit the substitute equipment, at no additional cost to the Owner. 




1.9 PROTECTION 


A. Special care shall be taken for the protection of equipment furnished. Equipment and 

material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, dust, etc., 

until the project is completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as 

required to restore equipment to original condition. 

B. Where the installation or connection of equipment requires work in areas previously finished 

by other Contractors, the area shall be protected and not marred, soiled or otherwise 

damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with other Contractors for 

repairing and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged. 

C. During construction, the open ends of piping, equipment and ductwork shall be protected 

from construction dust and debris utilizing caps, plastic sheeting or other approved means. 

Equipment and materials shall remain in original shipping containers and be kept above 

grade/slab, and be fully protected from the elements until installed. Electronic equipment shall 

be stored in environmentally controlled conditions. 

D. The terminal chiller plants HVAC systems shall be protected from any dust generation 

activities. Provide in the base bid, provisions for monthly filter change-outs for all air handling 

systems that serve the terminal chiller plant. 


A. Method or procedure for submitting shop drawings and submittal data shall be in compliance 

with the General Conditions, the following paragraphs and Division 1 requirements. 

B. Submittal data for mechanical equipment shall consist of shop drawings and/or catalog cuts 

showing technical data necessary to evaluate the material or equipment, to include 

dimensions, wiring diagrams, performance curves, ratings, control sequence and other 

descriptive data necessary to describe fully the item proposed and its operating 

characteristics. 

C. Submittal data shall be clearly marked to indicate the actual item being submitted including 

accessories, and items not applicable to the submittal shall be crossed or marked out. 

Where materials or features deviate from the specified requirements, the deviation shall be 

clearly identified and noted in writing on the submittal cover sheet. Approval of submittals 

does not relieve the Contractor from the project requirements. In no case may products of 

multiple manufacturers be submitted for the same product. 

D. Where manufacturers’ standard catalog cut sheets do not provide sufficient detail to indicate 

full compliance with the project specifications, provide supporting data as required. Where 

generic, unmarked submittals are provided, they will be returned un-reviewed for correction 

and re-submittal by the Contractor. 





E. Submittals shall clearly indicate the specification section and paragraph that applies to the 

item being submitted. Shop drawings shall provide not less than the level of detail shown on 

the documents. Deviations from the design shall be clouded or otherwise specifically 

identified for review by the Engineer with a written explanation as to why the deviation is 

necessary. If the deviation is not identified and noted, and the Contractor receives shop 

drawings approval, upon discovery the Contractor shall correct the non-conforming condition 

at no additional cost. The contract documents are not intended to be fabrication drawings 

and shall not be used as such. 

F. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to: 

1. Valves 

2. Pipe and equipment insulation 

3. Vibration isolation 

4. Grilles and diffusers 

5. Identification systems 

6. Controls and Instrumentation 

7. Hydronic specialties 

8. Thermometers and gauges 

9. Pipe materials, fittings, hydronic pipng, and piping shop drawings 

10. Pumps 

11. Hangers and Supports 

12. Chemical Treatment 

13. Refrigerant Monitoring System (if required) 

14. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) 

15. Piping system test results 

16. Equipment start-up reports 

17. Other items as specifically referred to in other sections 

G. Basis of Design 

1. Certain manufacturer’s products have been designated on the drawings as the basis 

of design. Other manufacturer’s names have been listed as firms producing products 

that are generally comparable with those used as the basis of design. 

2. It shall be the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor to ascertain that equipment 

submitted and used in the work, satisfies all of the specified requirements, and fits in 

the available space with adequate maintenance clearances, including equipment 

used as the basis of design. 





3. Listing of a product as the basis of design does not imply that the manufacturer’s 

standard product meets the specified requirements. Custom, non-standard 

modifications in materials of construction, fabrication and components shall be 

provided, where required to comply with the Contract Documents. 

H. Coordination drawings shall be submitted as specified below and in individual Division 15 

sections. Drawings shall be drawn to scale of the larger of ¼ inch equals 1 foot on that used 

in the documents. Drawings shall be provided for all equipment rooms illustrating the layout 

and coordination of new and existing equipment, piping and ductwork, clearly indicating 

maintenance areas and code mandated clearances. Drawings shall include the following: 

1.11 FINISHING 

A. General 

B. Cleaning 

1. Room dimensions. 

2. Support column locations. 

3. Locations and dimensions of equipment foundations and pads required. 

4. Locations and dimensions of equipment and apparatus, including electrical control 

panels and starters, and service and coil pull areas. 

5. Dimensioned floor drain locations. 

6. Locations of wall mounted equipment. 

7. Sleeve locations in mechanical rooms and equipment rooms. 

8. Roof layouts: Include support structure, tower basin layout, pipe supports, and 

existing equipment to remain. 

1. Prior to acceptance of the installation and final payment of the Contract, the 

Contractor shall perform the work outlined herein. 

1. At the conclusion of the construction, the site and structure shall be cleaned 

thoroughly of all debris and unused materials remaining from the mechanical 

construction. All closed off spaces shall be cleaned of all packing boxes, wood frame 

members and other waste materials used in the mechanical construction. 

2. The entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned both externally and 

internally. The Contractor shall open all dirt pockets and strainers, completely 

blowing down as required and clean strainer screens of all accumulated debris. All 

fan coil unit risers shall be flushed and drained. 

3. All tanks, fixtures and pumps shall be drained and proven free of sludge and 

accumulated matter. 

4. All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. 

(Do not remove permanent name plates, equipment model numbers, ratings, etc.). 





5. Heating and air conditioning, plumbing and fire protection equipment, tanks, pumps, 

traps, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned and new filters or filter media installed. 

6. Perform cleaning required by General Conditions and Division 1 as applicable to this 

Division of the work. 

C. Project Recording Documents 

1. Prepare and submit project record documents, in accordance with Division 1 

requirements. 

1.12 TRAINING TEST AND DEMONSTRATIONS 

A. Systems shall be tested and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to 

Owner. 

B. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical installation, demonstrate to the Owner or his 

designated representatives all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and 

instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Refer to 

sections 01800 and 15995 (Commissioning) for training requirements. 

C. Provide necessary trained personnel to perform the demonstrations and instructions. Provide 

manufacturer's representatives for systems to assist with the demonstrations. 

D. Dates and times for performing the demonstrations shall be coordinated with the Owner. A 

minimum of two training sessions shall be provided to coordinate with the Owner’s 

staffing/shift requirements. A follow-up training session shall be provided to answer 

operational questions from the Owner’s staff. 

E. System demonstrations shall be in accordance with operating and maintenance data. 

F. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall put the system into service. The 

Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the equipment during all testing operations. 

G. The contractor shall assist the Test and Balance (TAB) firm and Commissioning Agent (C/A) 

in operation of equipment and providing access (in the form of ladders and scaffolding where 

required) to devices which require measurement and/or adjustment. The Contractor shall aid 

in the identification and location of equipment and control sensors. The Contractor shall 

correct all field conditions found to be unsatisfactory by the TAB and C/A firms. Refer to 

Sections 15990 and 15991 for additional requirements. 

H. Perform all required commissioning sub tasks as specified in the Commissioning 

specifications in Division 1, General Requirements and Section 15995, “Commissioning”. 

The Contractor shall designate an individual to serve on the commissioning team and shall 

cooperate as required concerning all commissioning related activities, meetings, 

documentation, field tests, etc. The Contractor shall provide all technically qualified 

personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and materials on a continuous basis in order to 

perform their required tasks at the required time period and provide all required or requested 

assistance by the commissioning provider to compete the commissioning process. The 

Contractor is required per referenced specifications to complete all applicable Pre-Functional 

Test report forms on the systems being commissioned. This may include as well, start-up 

check list forms. 

I. Upon completion of demonstrations, provide a certificate testifying that demonstrations have 

been completed. Certificate shall list each system demonstrated, dates demonstrations were 





performed, names of parties in attendance, and shall bear signatures of Contractor and 

Owner. 

J. Attend and provide operating personnel for inspections, including necessary subcontractors 

as required for demonstration of equipment operation, installation and test and balance. 

K. The training period shall be sufficient to thoroughly cover all items of mechanical equipment. 

Topics shall include, but not be limited to, purpose/function, start-up, shutdown, interlocks, 

safeties, overrides, normal operating range, regular and preventive maintenance, potential 

hazards, automatic control, emergency procedures, and similar topics as necessary for safe 

and efficient operation of the equipment. 

L. For complex equipment such as chillers, cooling towers, variable speed drives, controls, and 

for systems vital to continued successful operation of the equipment such as water treatment, 

a certified representative of the manufacturer shall be present and conduct that portion of the 

training in conjunction with the Contractor. 

M. The training shall include hands-on start-up and shutdown of the system by the Owners 

operating personnel, supervised by the Contractor. Failures, power outages, and safety type 

shutdown of equipment shall be simulated by the Contractor for troubleshooting by the 

Owner. The Owner shall also be instructed in manual operation of the system in the “hand” 

mode. 

1.13 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION 

A. Provide painting as scheduled below: 

1. Chiller and mechanical room piping rooms shall be painted; the existing color scheme 

is to be maintained. Coordinate with the requirements in Section 15085 and Division 

9 requirements. 

B. Identification of mechanical systems shall be as specified in Section 15085, 

“IDENTIFICATION”. 

C. All paint shall be lead free. 

1.14 SLEEVES 

A. Sleeves passing through above grade, non-load bearing or non-fire rated walls and partitions 

shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: for 

pipes 2½" size and smaller - 24 gauge; 3" to 6" - 22 gauge; over 6" - 20 gauge. 

B. Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, foundations, footings and 

waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe or cast iron pipe. 

C. Sleeve for fire-rated walls shall comply with the manufacturer’s UL listed installation 

requirements. Where the UL installation requirements allow for sleeve materials which meet 

the requirements specified in the proceeding paragraphs, sleeves as specified above shall be 

used. 

D. In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, 

partitions and ceilings, and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above 

finished floors in areas likely to entrap water. 





E. Piping and sleeves passing through floors, roof, smoke walls, fire walls, and other partitions, 

shall be provided with a UL rated firestop assembly. Penetrations of smoke walls shall be 

fully caulked airtight using an approved sealant. 

1.15 ESCUTCHEONS 

A. Provide chrome-plated, metal, corrosion resistant escutcheons at each sleeve opening into 

finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit around insulation or around pipe when not insulated; 

outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon 

shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to 

sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 

1.16 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 

A. Piping shall not be installed directly above electrical equipment. 

1.17 WARRANTY CALLS 

A. During the one year period, all responses to warranty calls made by the contractor shall be 

documented by leaving a copy of the mechanics service ticket with the Owner’s 

representative, prior to leaving the site upon completion of his work. 

B. Unless otherwise noted in individual sections, a 1 year warranty shall be provided. 

C. Submit warranty information under provisions of Division 1. Provide information to include 

terms and conditions, beginning date, duration, name, address, telephone number and 

procedure for obtaining warranty service. Include warranty information in the maintenance 

and service manual. 

D. This is a phased project which will require equipment to be placed into service at different 

times during construction. The warranty period for all contractor furnished equipment and 

installed systems shall commence upon substantial completion of the project. 

1.18 INSULATION PROTECTION 

A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around 

insulation, up to 12 inches above finished floor. 

1.19 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Requirements and methods of preparing and procedure for submitting project records shall 

be in accordance with Division One. As-Built documents shall be provided for each system. 

1.20 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Requirements and methods of preparing and procedures for submitting Operating and 

Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with Division One. Number of manuals shall be 

in accordance with Division 1, except where otherwise not specified, and provide five (5) 

manuals. In addition, provide two (2) electronic copies of all materials in Adobe .pdf format. 

Data shall incorporate “record set” of approved or “approved as noted” submittals, and As- 

Built drawings showing all changes and revisions incorporated into the work. Include riser 

diagrams, flow charts, reduced scale building plans and similar visual aids that assist in 

understanding the system, its components and relationship to other building systems. 





B. Include description of function, operating characteristics, performance curves, engineering 

data and tests, model and serial numbers of all equipment. Include a written overview for 

each system describing its modes of operation, capacity modulation safety devices, resets 

and operation on emergency power. 

C. Maintenance information including procedures for routine preventative maintenance, 

troubleshooting, disassembly, repair, reassembly, aligning and adjusting instructions. Also 

include lubrication charts and schedules, recommended frequency of adjustment calibration, 

checking consolidated into one (1) master schedule located in the front of the first volume of 

the manual. 

D. Standard manufacturer’s data shall be clearly marked to identify model number and features 

of equipment actually furnished. Include installation and maintenance brochures along with 

approved shop drawing submittals for each item of equipment. Cross out information which 

does not apply. 

E. All mechanical equipment data shall be provided in a loose-leaf, 3 hole punched binder(s), 

which includes at a minimum, an identifying cover and spline, section dividers by specification 

number and table of contents. Where required, provide multiple binders such that the 

thickness of any one binder does not exceed three (3) inches. Data provided in an electronic 

formal shall be on a CD-Rom media. 

F. Provide the make, model, serial number, warranty period and warranty start date in a tabular 

format for each item of equipment. Include names, addresses, phone number and e-mail of 

individuals to be contacted during the warranty period, and for general service after the 

warranty period has expired. In the individual sections, include the manufacturer’s detailed 

parts list for each item of equipment. 

G. The valve tag schedules shall be reproduced within the manual. Valve locations shall be 

designated on reduced scale floor plans with blow-ups provided for congested areas. 

H. Provide single line diagrams on 11 x 17 sheets indicating major items of equipment and flow 

rates/quantities for the chilled and condenser water system. 

1.21 ANCHORING OF EQUIPMENT 

A. All equipment that is not mounted on wheels and is capable of being moved shall be secured 

to the floor with anchor bolts. A minimum of two bolts are required per each piece of 

equipment and bolts shall be of sufficient size to prevent equipment of overturning. Refer to 

project details for additional anchoring requirements. 

B. All exterior equipment shall be DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED, AND INSTALLED to 

withstand the applied wind force. The applicable wind force shall be as determined in 

accordance with the Florida Building Code, Chapter 16. A “specialty engineer” licensed to 

practice in Florida shall determine the applicable wind force and certify the proposed 

equipment construction and mounting meets the applied wind force with suitable 

documentation provided to the permitting authorities. Mounting details shown on the 

drawings are generic in nature, intended only to convey the general concept for bidding 

purposes only. Where the manufacture has acceptable certifying information, the Engineer 

need only confirm the actual wind force is within the manufacturers certified range, and the 

manufacturer’s installation anchoring requirements shall be strictly followed. 




1.22 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT 


A. Selected items have been pre-purchased by the Owner for this project. The items include 

(but may not be limited to) Chillers 1, 2, & 3, Cooling Towers 1, 2, 3 & 4, electrical switchgear, 

motor control center, and miscellaneous electrical items. The Contractor shall coordinate 

with rough-in dimensions. For all connected services, maintenance access areas and the 

exact location of all Owner furnished equipment. 

B. Where equipment is indicated to be Owner furnished, the Contractor shall obtain copies of 

approved equipment submittals to ascertain the exact scope and characteristics of the 

equipment, prior to bid. The Contractor shall include all costs associated with assembly and 

installation of the equipment and any accessory items called for in the construction 

documents, but otherwise not indicated in the approved equipment submittal. After award of 

the contract, the Owner’s purchase order will be assigned to the Contractor, refer to Division 


1.23 PREVENTION OF CORROSION 

A. The Contractor shall use materials of construction that will aid in the prevention of corrosion. 

B. Dissimilar metals shall be separated by dielectric fittings and/or materials. 

C. Copper pipe shall be isolated from concrete using a closed cell foam type insulation. The use 

of tar paper, felt or electricians tape is prohibited. 

D. Exterior supports and fasteners shall be constructed of aluminum, hot dipped galvanized 

steel or stainless steel. 

1.24 EXISTING CHILLER INTERFACE 

A. Under this section, furnish gateways to convert the existing chillers (CH-4 and CH-5) control 

panel output into BACNET for connection to, and to interface with the EMS, coordinate with 

Section 15900 for installation. 

B. Device shall be Johnson Controls (York) “E-Lind Gateway” configured for BACNET MS/TP 

output, enclosure mounted part number YK-ELNK00-0. 

C. Provide with equipment point map listings for setup under Section 15900. 






SECTION15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 


1.2 SCOPE 


A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section. The General 

Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 

A. Provide equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to furnish, fabricate, 

install, and test and certify complete piping system as required by the Drawings and this 

Section. 


A. Submit a schedule of the pipe materials to be used for each system. Schedule shall include 

the following minimum data: system, pipe material, ASTM designation, fitting types, and 

joining method. 

B. Submit catalog data for pipe and fittings under individual specification sections. 


2.1 MATERIAL 

A. As specified in Sections 15510. 

2.2 FITTINGS 

2.3 JOINTS 

A. As specified in Sections 15510. 

A. Threaded pipe - Make joints using approved pipe joint compound, applied to male threads 

only. Cut pipe square, cut threads clean, remove burrs and ream ends to full size of bore. 

Threads shall not be exposed on chromium-plated pipe. 

B. Threadless brass pipe - Use brazing alloy which will flow freely at 1300-degrees F, use flux 

and brazing method as recommended by manufacturer of brazing alloy. 

C. Condenser water make-up (cooling tower and meter feeds). Use 95-5 solder, cut pipe 

square, clean and polish tube ends and inner surface of fittings, apply flux and solder joint as 

recommended by manufacturer of solder type fittings. 

D. Copper piping other than domestic water - use silver based brazing alloy AWS Classification 

BAg-5, flux and brazing method as recommended by the brazing alloy manufacturer. 





E. Welded pipe - Welding shall conform to welding section of ANSI-B31.1 "Code for Power 

Piping." Pipe up to 2" diameter shall be screwed except that all piping below grade shall be 

welded. Pipe 2½" diameter and over shall be welded. 

F. Final connection of chilled and condenser water piping to chillers may be made with grooved 

mechanical couplings. 

2.4 NIPPLES AND UNIONS 

A. Nipples shall be heavy Schedule 80, do not use close nipples. 

B. For pipe 2" and smaller, use screwed unions; over 2" use flanged unions. For steel and 

wrought iron pipe use malleable iron unions black or galvanized, to conform to pipe, with 

ground joint. Cast iron flanged unions shall be gasket type. For threaded brass pipe, use 

bronze ground joint unions with octagon ends. Install unions on equipment to allow for 

equipment to be disconnected from the piping system, removal of control valves and at 

locations as indicated on the drawings. 

C. Dielectric unions shall be installed between connections of copper pipe and ferrous piping, 

and at all dissimilar metals. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS 

A. Bituminous coating shall be a solvent cutback, heavy-bodied material, minimum 12-mil dryfilm 

thickness. 

B. Bolting for flange and general purpose shall be hex-head with heavy hex nuts and washers 

conforming to ASTM A 307, Grade B and ASTM A 563. Square head bolts and nuts and 

threaded rod with nuts on both sides are not acceptable. Threads shall be coarse-thread 

series and extend a minimum of two threads and a maximum of 1 inch beyond the nut. 

Provide galvanized steel washers under bolt heads and nuts. 

C. Flange gaskets shall be compressed non-asbestos sheet conforming to ASTM F 104, 

compatible with system fluid and recommended by the manufacturer for the service 

temperature. 



A. Install pipe for plumbing and mechanical systems as indicated on the Drawings, and as called 

for in other Sections, and as specified herein. Store pipe above grade and protect from the 

elements. Laboratory gases, purified water, industrial water and refrigeration piping shall be 

stored in a dry location and the ends of piping shall be kept sealed. 

B. Pipe shall be prepared for installation as follows: 

1. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. 

2. Remove scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly. 

3. Remove welding slag and foreign material from pipe and fitting material. 





C. Piping on the drawings is shown in a schematic form, install piping approximately as 

indicated, straight, plumb, and as direct as possible, form right angles on parallel lines with 

building walls. Coordinate final layout with actual equipment furnished, existing conditions 

and work of other trades, providing offsets as required at no additional cost to the owner. 

Keep pipes close to walls, partitions, ceilings, offsetting only where necessary to follow walls 

and avoid interference with other mechanical, electrical, and general trade items, but 

maintain a 6 inch clearance between pipe, including insulation and walls. Locate groups of 

pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to 

permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless 

indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Coordinate with other trades. 

D. Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can 

be maintained for drainage. 

E. Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below 

horizontal. 

F. Check piping for interference with other trades; avoid placing water pipes over electrical 

equipment. 

G. Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in 

dimensions with equipment supplier before roughing-in. 

H. Branch pipes may use preformed, manufactured branch connections (weld-o-lets) where 

branch pipe is at least 3 diameters smaller than main piping it connects to, otherwise 

preformed manufactured fittings (tees) shall be used. Branch pipes shall not project inside 

main pipe. Branch connections formed by pipe drilling devices (T-drill) shall not be used. 

I. Final connection to equipment and piping accessories shall be made with unions or flanges. 

Unions shall be installed downstream of screwed or welded/brazed end valves. Make 

provisions for equipment removal without dismantling of piping. 

J. Open ends of piping shall be kept sealed using plugs, caps or plastic sheeting during 

construction. 

K. Provide air vents at piping high points and drains at piping low points, or in any portion of the 

system which is trapped. Provide draining and venting provisions for each chilled/condenser 

water riser. Drain valves and manual air vents shall be ball type as specified in individual 

specification sections and be provided with caps. Drain valves shall have hose end 

connections. 

L. Where piping is required to be painted, protect piping from the elements during construction. 

M. Pressure test piping systems as specified in individual sections, Section 15992, “Tests – 

Piping Systems” and as required by referenced Codes and Standards. Tests shall be 

hydrostatic unless otherwise noted. 

N. Piping shall not be installed in electrical rooms, telephone rooms, transformer rooms, and 

elevator equipment rooms. 

O. Do not install piping containing fluids above electrical equipment such as starters, 

switchboards, motor control centers, panel boards, transformers, and disconnects. Where 

required by the AHJ, provide galvanized sheet metal gutters and guards to protect electrical 

equipment. 





P. Provide ceiling/wall access panels at valves sized for proper access and operation. 

Q. All branch piping shall be provided with a shutoff valve (ball or butterfly) where the branch 

connects to the main. 

R. Branch piping shall come off of the top of horizontal mains. 

S. Provide dielectric fittings, unions, flanges at dissimilar piping materials. 

T. Arrange piping to facilitate equipment maintenance and to maintain required clearances. 

Locate equipment isolation/shut-off valves to allow for equipment dismantling, cleaning, 

removal and replacement. 





SECTION 15073 - MINOR MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 

PART 1: GENERAL 



A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this Section. The 

General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 

1.2 SCOPE 

A. Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to complete the following: 

1) Remove HVAC equipment, hangers, controls, piping, insulation and associated 

items required by drawings to be removed. Any demolition requiring a system 

shutdown or that will affect adjacent areas shall be approved by the Owner prior 

to shutdown. Where only after-hour shutdowns are allowed, provide manpower 

on a premium time basis. 

2) Provide protection for adjacent existing areas before, during and following 

removal operations. Verify if existing piping contains fluid prior to demolition, and 

carefully drain systems prior to proceeding with demolition. Where existing 

valves are to be used to isolate portions of the system, confirm valves are 

operational and will hold against the system pressure prior to demolition. Where 

valves are not operational or will not hold, utilize pipe freezing, wet taps and 

similar methods as appropriate to the situation in base contract price, at no 

additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor is solely responsible for any 

damage, to include water damage resulting from demolition operations. 

3) Leave interior clean, ready for further construction. 

4) Where systems downstream of areas affected by demolition must remain on-line 

during construction, provide temporary piping, ductwork or services as 

necessary. 

5) The exact extent of demolition shall be field verified by the Contractor, prior to 

bid. The drawings only indicate specified items to be modified or capped where 

systems are to remain. Only a general description of the demolition work to be 

performed is indicated on the documents. 

B. Outages: 

1) Outages shall only be as approved in writing by the Owner. Request for an 

outage shall be made in writing not less than fourteen (14) days prior to the 

proposed outage. The Contractor shall confirm approved outages with the 

Owner twenty-four (24) hours prior to the actual disruption. 

2) The Contractor shall limit the duration of the outage to the minimum time 

necessary, as approved by the Owner. 

3) Generally, outages will only be approved during non-working hours and 

weekends, the cost of which shall be included in the Contractor’s bid. 




PART 2: MATERIALS 

2.1 REMOVED ITEMS 


A. All removed items other than salvaged items, or Owner retained items shall be removed 

from the site, and be properly disposed of. 

B. Services shall be capped and insulated with materials to match existing. 

C. Patch openings and surfaces where mechanical equipment, piping and hanger upper 

attachments are removed. Finish and paint to match surrounding surfaces with materials 

to match the existing. 

PART 3: EXECUTION 

3.1 GENERAL 

A. Prior to start of demolition, ascertain the extent that systems to be demolished may 

impact the operation of adjacent areas which are to remain in service. 

B. Coordinate outages with the Owner’s representative. Perform demolition to minimize 

system outages. 

C. Demolition of a system shall include all hangers, attachments, supports, insulation, valve 

boxes equipment, devices, controls and related appurtenances. 

D. Where demolition work damages adjacent work or finishes which are to remain, it shall 

be restored to the original conditions. 

3.2 HVAC WORK 

A. Disconnect piping as required for demolition operations. Cap and seal piping not 

indicated to be extended, with materials to match existing, and re-insulate. Re-route 

services for areas which are to be maintained in service. 







1.2 SCOPE 

SECTION 15085 IDENTIFICATION 




A. Provide equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to label and identify 

piping systems equipment, valves, and duct systems as specified herein. 

B. Provide for painting of piping systems within terminal chiller plant and cooling tower area 

(level 4). 

C. All existing pumps, chilled and condenser water piping, and valves shall be re-labeled/tagged 

per the requirements set forth in this section. See floor plans for specifics. 

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Piping identification materials by Allen Systems, Brady, Seton, or Industrial Safety Supply 

Company. 


A. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts including installation instruction showing complete 

descriptive data. Clearly mark items to be furnished. 

B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification of 

piping, equipment and duct systems. 

C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, service, location, normal 

position, valve type, manufacturer's name and model number. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. All piping shall be identified with snap-on type identification markers. 

B. For insulated piping systems provide snap-on type identification markers. 

C. For pipes under 1/2" O.D. (too small for color bands and legends), provide stamped metal 

tags at locations of pipe markers, attached to pipe with 16-gauge copper or stainless steel 

wire. 





D. For large diameter piping 12-inches and above (too large for snap-on labels), use strap 

around markers, secured to pipe with nylon ties. 

E. For piping, use weather-resistant, non-vinyl chloride markers constructed of polyester 

materials, pressure sensitive or pre-coiled type equal to SEATON “Ultra-Mark”. 

2.2 LABEL AND COLOR 

A. Labeling and color-coding shall be in accordance with "Scheme for the Identification of Piping 

Systems" (ANSI A13.1-1975), Compressed Gas Association (CGA) Pamphlet C-9-1988 

(R1993), and as specified herein. 

B. Each marker must show (1) approved color-coded background, (2) proper color of legend in 

relation to background color, (3) approved legend letter size, (4) approved marker length, (5) 

directional flow arrow, and (6) fluid being conveyed. 

C. Provide legend indicating color and service in the operating and maintenance manuals. 

2.3 LOCATION OF PIPE MARKERS 

D. Locations for pipe markers shall be as follows: 

2.4 VALVES 

1. Adjacent to each valve and fitting (except on plumbing fixtures and equipment). 

2. At each branch take-off. 

3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling connection. 

4. On all horizontal pipe runs-marked every 25 feet. 

A. Identify each valve (new and existing) for chilled water and condenser water service with a 

new engraved brass metal tag. Tags to be affixed to valves using either an “S” hook or jack 

chain. 

B. Provide schedule listing valve number and their location. Schedule shall be provided in the 

operating and maintenance manuals, with a framed copy located in the main mechanical 

equipment room. Valve chart shall list the tag number, service (chilled water, domestic water, 

hot water, etc.), location (room number), normal state (open/closed), type of valve (gate, ball, 

etc.), manufacturer and model number. 

C. All main and branch line valves are to be tagged in accordance with the following numerical 

schedule, except where an existing scheme is already in place, it shall be followed: 

2.5 EQUIPMENT 

Chilled Water 3000 – 3999 

Condenser Water 4000 – 4999 

A. Identify pumps, chillers and cooling towers with 3-layer black-white-black phenolic tags, 

minimum size of 6 inches in length by 4 inches tall, with 3 inch tall letters engraved not less 

than 1/8-inch thickness. 





B. Identify control panels with 3 layer black-white-black phenolic tags, minimum size of 4"x 2", 

with 1.5" tall letters. Identify sensors (except room thermostats) with 2" x 1" tags with 0.75" 

tall letters. 

2.6 PIPE COLOR CODE 

A. Piping and jacketing where insulated in mechanical rooms, equipment rooms, fan rooms, 

boiler rooms and chiller (utility) plants shall be painted. 

B. Surfaces to receive paint shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

C. Provide not less than two color coats of paint, minimum dry-film thickness of 2 mils. Primer 

coat shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer. 

D. Provide the following colors: 

1. Chilled/Condenser Water (Interior): To match existing. 

2. Condenser Water (Exterior): To match existing. 



A. De-grease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09900 for stencil painting. 


A. Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners. 

B. Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant brass bead or jack chain. 

C. Stencil Painting: Apply paint in general accordance with Section 09900 Painting. 

D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

E. Equipment: Identify chillers, cooling towers and related equipment with plastic nameplates. 

F. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic 

nameplates. 

G. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. 

H. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Tags may be used 

on small diameter piping. Identify service, flow direction and pressure. Install in clear view 

and align with axis of piping. For large diameter piping in chiller plants and similar locations, 

use 4-inch tall stenciled letters with flow arrows. 




3.3 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE 


A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at 

location in each equipment room as directed. Schedule shall include the following 

information: tag number, system, normal position, location (floor/room), make and model. 







1.2 SCOPE 

SECTION 15100 – VALVES 




A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install valves. This section 

covers valves not otherwise specified in other sections. 


A. Submit product data per Division 1 requirements. 

B. Submittal data shall include manufacturer and model number, physical dimensions, 

construction materials, and pressure and temperature ratings. 

C. Provide a valve schedule in tabular format indicating the system, valve type, make and model 

number. 


A. Bray, Kitz, Powell, Milwaukee, Anvil, Mueller, Watts, Apollo, Nibco, Stockham or Crane. 

B. All valves shall be of the same manufacturer unless otherwise specified. 

C. Figure numbers in valve schedule based on Nibco, where not otherwise noted. 

D. Valves by alternate manufacturers shall comply with all specified requirements. 

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver and store valves in original shipping containers with labeling in-place. 

B. Store valves above ground where they are not subject to abuse or foot traffic. 


2.1 VALVE SIZES 

A. Valve sizes 2" and smaller, all bronze with screwed ends meeting ANSI B1.20.1; sizes 2-1/2" 

and larger, cast iron bodies, bronze trim, flanged ends. Valves for copper pipe shall have 

solder joint ends meeting ANSI B16.18. 




2.2 GATE VALVES 


A. Gate valves shall have solid tapered wedge, except where otherwise specified. Valves shall 

conform to MSS SP-80 through 2 inch in size, MSS SP-70 above 2 inches in size. Valves 

through 2 inches in size shall have a union bonnet, non-rising stem. Valves over 2 inches in 

size shall have a bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, bronze trim. 

2.3 GLOBE VALVES 

A. Globe and angle valves shall have renewable composition discs as recommended by 

manufacturer for intended service, or renewable bevel seats and metal discs. Valves shall 

conform to MSS SP-80 through 2 inches in size, MSS SP-85 above 2 inches in size. Valves 

through 2 inches in size shall have a union bonnet. Valves over 2 inches in size shall have a 

bolted bonnet, renewable seat and disk, outside screw and yoke, bronze trim. 

2.4 CHECK VALVES 

A. Horizontal swing type with bronze seat (re-grinding or renewable type) and composition or 

bronze disc as recommended by the manufacturer for the service indicated. Valves shall 

conform to MSS SP-80 through 2 inch in size, MSS SP-71 above 2 inches in size. Valves 

through 2 inches in size shall be Y-pattern with screwed bonnet, valves above 2 inches shall 

be bolted bonnet, with bronze disk through 4 inches in size, iron disk with bronze face rings 

above 4 inches. 

B. Vertical silent lift type with cast or ductile iron body, bronze trim, flanged globe style, guided 

pin bronze disk, stainless steel spring loaded type. 

2.5 BALL VALVES 

A. Ball valves shall be used on 2" or smaller applications and shall be cast bronze two-piece or 

three-piece swing-away design with teflon seats and seals, stainless steel ball and trim, blowout 

proof stem, and full ports complying with MSS-SP-110. End connections shall be 

compatible with piping system. Three piece valves shall be used for brazed piping, UL listed 

valves shall be used for flammable liquids and gases. 

B. Ball valves in insulated piping systems shall be provided with extended necks or a preinsulated 

factory handle similar and equal to NIBCO NIB-SEAL. Ball valves used for 

balancing shall be provided with a memory stop. 

2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES 

A. Butterfly valves 2-1/2” and larger shall be ductile iron body and conform to MSS SP-67, 

aluminum bronze, bronze or stainless steel disc, stainless steel stem, extended neck, tapped 

lug body, and EDPM seat liner. Stems shall have upper and lower copper bronze or Teflon 

bushings. Valves 4” in size and under may be provided with a position lock operator with 

memory stop and locking padlock hole. Valves larger than 4” in size and any size valve used 

for balancing purposes shall be provided with a gear operator with memory stop, position 

indicator, and padlock flange feature. Valves shall be rated for bi-directional dead-end 

service with no downstream piping or flange attached at the full rated pressure of the valve. 

Valves mounted greater than 7-feet above finished floor shall be provided with cast iron 

guided chain wheels, with galvanized steel chain. 




2.7 VENTURI PRINCIPLE BALANCING VALVE 


A. Combination characterized ball valve with integral built-in venturi, bronze body thru 2-inches 

in size with sweat or threaded ends. Carbon steel body with flow laminizer inlet and cast iron 

butterfly valve above 2-inches in size with flanged ends. Valve shall include a calibrated 

nameplate, Schrader style high and low side pressure ports. Extended neck to 

accommodate insulation. Accuracy shall be 3 percent of full scale. 

2.8 PLUG COCKS 

A. Cast iron body, stainless steel bearings, bolted bonnet, stainless steel plug with Acylonitrilebutadene 

PTFE U-ring packing. End connection shall be threaded through 2-inches in size, 

flanged above 2-inches. Valves shall be provided with a removable lever handle, with a 

memory stop. 

2.9 CONTROL VALVES 

A. As specified in Section 15900. 

2.10 VALVE SCHEDULE 

A. Furnish valves for domestic water and hydronic systems as per following schedule: 

1. Gate - 2" and smaller - Nibco T-136/S-136, Class 150 

2½" and larger - Nibco F-617-0, Class 125 

2. Globe- 2" and smaller - Nibco T-235/S-235, Class 150 

2½" and larger - Nibco F-718-B, Class 125 

3. Angle- 2" and smaller - Nibco T-355, Class 150 

2½" and larger - Nibco F-818-B, Class 125 

4. Horizontal check- 2" and smaller - Nibco T-433/S-433, Class 150 

2½" and larger - Nibco F-918, Class 125 

5. Lift check - 2-1/2" and larger - Nibco F-910, Class 125 

6. Ball - Nibco T-585-70-66/S-585-70-66, Two-piece 

Nibco T-595-Y-66/S-595-Y-66, Three-piece 

Nibco T-585/580-70-UL, UL listed 

7. Butterfly Valves - Nibco LD-2000. 

8. Balancing Valves – Griswold Quickset. 

9. Plug Valves – DeZurik PEC Eccentric type. 







A. Valves delivered to the project site shall be kept in original packing materials until time of 

installation. Valves shall be stored in a dry location and kept above the grade or finished 

floor. 

B. Install valves as indicated on the Drawings and as called for in other Sections. Where valves 

are not operable from the floor level, verify mounting height prior to proceeding with valve 

installation. 

C. All valves shall be easily accessible. When it becomes necessary to install valves above 

plaster ceilings, provide suitable access doors. Installation of the access doors shall be by 

others. 

D. Install valves in equipment rooms to provide full access to valve. Install with stems in vertical 

position, except for butterfly valves in horizontal lines shall have stems mounted in a 

horizontal position. 

E. Valves shall be provided in piping mains and all branches and connections to equipment. 

F. Tag valves as specified in Section 15085. 

G. Plug valves shall be installed for balancing purposes, venturi type balancing valves shall be 

used only where specifically indicated, and shall not be substituted for plug valves with 

separate venturies. 

H. Butterfly, gate and plug valves installed over 7 feet above finished floor shall be provided with 

chain wheel operators and chain. 

I. Insulation of valves shall not interfere with normal operation of the valves. 

3.2 OPERATION 

A. All valves shall be opened and closed during pipe flushing to remove debris. 

B. Valve operation and leak tightness shall be verified for each installed valve. 

C. Valves used for balancing shall have memory stops set and the normal position marked. 






SECTION 15121 EXPANSION COMPENSATION 



1.2 SCOPE 



A. Flexible pipe connections. 


A. Conform to Standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association. 

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. Base expansion calculations on 50 degrees F installation temperature to 210 degrees F for 

hot water heating and 140 degrees F for domestic hot water, plus 30 percent safety factory. 

Chilled water systems shall be based upon a 100 degree F installation temperature and a 40 

degree F operating temperature. 


A. Submit flexible pipe connector shop drawing data to include maximum allowable temperature 

and pressure rating, overall face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose 

convolutions per foot and per assembly, braid structure and total number of wires in braid. 


A. Provide products as manufactured by Southeastern Hose, Mercer Rubber Company, or 

Metraflex. 


2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS 

A. For steel piping construct with stainless steel inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. 

B. For copper piping construct with bronze inner hose and braided exterior sleeve. 

C. Use connectors suitable for minimum 125 psi WSP and 450 degrees F and 200 psi WOG and 

250 degrees F. 

D. Construct spool pieces to exact size for insertion of flexible connection. 




2.2 CONNECTIONS 


A. Provide flexible pipe connections and expansion joints suitable to connect to adjoining piping 

as specified for pipe joints, 2 inch and under shall be screwed or brazed, above 2 inches shall 

be flanged. Units and connectors shall be full pipe size. 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Examine piping layout and notify Architect/Engineer of additional anchors or expansion joints 

required to adequately protect system. 

B. Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final installing 

and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors 

are performing satisfactorily. 


A. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration 

isolation and/or to prevent noise transmission. Connectors shall be located next to 

equipment in question. 

B. Accomplish structural work and provide equipment required to control expansion and 

contraction of piping, loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, and provide corrugated bellows 

type expansion joints where required. 

C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately 

adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. 

D. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure where necessary. Provide pipe guides so that 

movement takes place along axis of pipe only. 






SECTION 15130 THERMOMETER AND GAUGES 



1.2 SCOPE 



A. Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install thermometers 

pressure gauges and pressure/temperature test ports, to include separable wells, gauge 

cocks and pulsation snubbers. 


A. Thermometers: Weiss, Ernst Gauge Co., Marshalltown or Trerice. 

B. Pressure gauges: Weiss, Trerice, Marshalltown, or U.S. Gauge. 

C. Pressure/Temperature Test Ports: Petes Plugs, Sisco. 



B. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts showing complete descriptive data. Data shall be clearly 

marked to indicate features being provided. 


2.1 GLASS THERMOMETERS 

A. Die cast aluminum case with baked enamel finish, glass front, 9 inches long scale, mercury 

filled, magnifying lens, 1 percent accuracy, satin faced permanently etched non-reflective 

aluminum scale, aluminum or brass stem with length to suite insertion depth and insulation, 

and fully adjustable joint, 180 degrees vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane. 

Range, chilled water 0-100 degrees F, hot water 30 to 240 degrees F, condenser/reheat 

water 30 - 130 degrees F. 

B. Wells shall be brass or stainless steel, pressure rating to match system design pressure, with 

insulation lagging extension length to suit insulation thickness. Where well only is indicated 

without thermometer, provide with cap nut and chain fastened to thermometer well. 

C. For pipe sizes up to 20" in diameter, insertion length shall not be less than one-half of the 

pipe diameter. For pipe sizes smaller than the minimum insertion length, provide enlarged 

pipe section, or utilize a tee at 90 degree change in pipe direction. 




2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES 


A. Glycerine - liquid filled type, 4½" pressure gauge, aluminum or fiberglass reinforced 

polypropylene case, white dial, black lettering, ¼" male NPT inlet, acrylic plastic window with 

o-ring seal for weather-proof service, stainless steel bourdon tube and movement, accuracy 

of 0.5 percent (+/-) of scale range, ASME B40.1, Grade 2A. Range selected for midpoint of 

dial at normal system conditions or as noted on the drawings (with a maximum of 2 psi 

divisions). For hot systems operating above 150 degrees F, gauges shall be of the dry (nonliquid 

filled) type. 

B. Gauges shall be provided with pressure snubbers, and gauges for steam service shall be 

provided with coil siphons. 

C. Gauges for open systems (condenser water) shall be of the compound type. 

2.3 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PORTS 

A. Solid brass construction with resilient inner liner core rated for 500 psi at 200 degrees F, fitted 

with a color coded marked cap with gasket. Body shall be 3 inches long for insulated piping 

and 1-1/2 inches long for non-insulated piping. Body shall be 1/4 inch male pipe thread for 

mounting within a pre-fabricated female pipe thread-o-let. Provide with test kit consisting of a 

leather case, two (2) 3-1/2 inch dial face pressure gauges (0-100 psi), two (2) gauge 

adapters, and two (2) 1 inch dial face thermometers (25 to 125 degrees F). Test kit devices 

shall be suitable for use with extended neck test ports. Test kit shall be new and unused and 

turned over to the Owner’s representative prior to the start of Testing and Balancing. 



A. Install thermometers at each supply and return piping connection for chillers, and at other 

points as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Provide separable well for each thermometer in the piping systems as well as at locations 

shown as thermometer well only. For small piping, provide oversized fitting for installation to 

avoid excessive pressure drop. Ensure that tip of well does not extend to opposite side of 

pipe, but exceeds 50 percent of the pipe diameter. 

C. Provide ball valve for each pressure gauge meeting the requirements of Section 15100. 

D. Provide pulsation snubber for all pressure gauges. 

E. Install gauges at locations where they can be readily observed. 

F. Install pressure temperature (P/T) test ports at locations as indicated. 

G. Provide wells for all automatic temperature control sensors, exact location as directed by the 

temperature control contractor. 

H. Provide pressure temperature test points adjacent to all automatic temperature control 

temperature and pressure sensors for calibration measurements. 





I. Where the location of the thermometers, gauges, wells or sensors is deemed to be 

unacceptable to the Engineer, Test and Balance firm or commissioning agent relocate to an 

agreed upon location in base contract at no additional cost. 






SECTION 15141 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 



1.2 SCOPE 



B. Refer to Section 15000, “General Provisions” paragraph entitled, “Anchoring of Equipment” 

for additional requirements. 

C. Specific pipe hanger details provided in the drawings for interior piping 14-inches and over. 

A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install pipe hangers and 

supports, as well as supports for suspended equipment. All piping shall be properly 

supported. 

B. Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical 

adjustment for maintaining required grades, provide for expansion and contraction. 

C. Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to 

prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. 

D. Where concrete inserts are to be used, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to accurately 

locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. 

E. Equipment supports shall secure equipment in-place, prevent transmission of vibration to the 

structure, provide for expansion and contraction, and permit for servicing and maintenance of 

equipment without obstructing access doors or removable covers. 

F. Pipe hangers supports and attachments shall have sufficient strength to withstand all 

anticipated static and dynamic loading conditions associated with the intended use. 



B. Provide manufacturers catalog data for pipe supports, upper attachments and threaded rod, 

indicating materials of construction and dimensional data. 

C. Submit details for connection of upper attachment to structure. 


A. Hanger spacing and support rod size shall comply with the minimum requirements of the 

Florida Building Code, Mechanical. 





B. All supports shall conform to the ASME code for Pressure Piping B31.1 and MSS Standard 

Practice SP-58, SP-69, SP-89, and SP-90. 


2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Hangers and support devices shall be Michigan, Tolco, Anvil, B-Line or Elcen. Figure 

numbers based on Anvil. 

B. All exterior hangers, supports, threaded rod and accessories shall be hot-dipped galvanized 

in accordance with ASTM A-153 or stainless steel. Interior hangers, threaded rod, and 

supports shall be cadium plated in conformance with ASTM B-766. Where stainless steel or 

copper piping is installed either interior or exterior, use compatible stainless steel or copper 

supports respectively. 

C. Materials which are in direct contact with piping shall be compatible with the piping and shall 

not promote galvanic action. 

2.2 SLEEVES 

A. Refer to Section 15000 - “General Provisions”. 

2.3 BOLTING 

A. Flange and general purpose bolting shall be meet the requirements specified in Section 

15060, “Pipe and Pipe Fittings”. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 

A. Hanger rod shall be one-piece circular cross section and shall be used to connect building 

structural attachments to pipe support devices. Provide turnbuckles, swing eyes, and 

clevises as required to accommodate thermal expansion/contraction, pipe accessibility and 

adjustment for load and pitch. 

B. Provide supplementary steel as required between existing structural members where 

necessary for support. Steel shall be provided with a protective organic zinc coating to 

protect against rust. The Contractor is responsible for proper selection and sizing of 

supplementary steel for the imposed load and movement. 

C. Support elements, except for supplementary steel, shall be cataloged, load rated, 

commercially manufactured products. 





3.1 INSTALLATION - HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORTS 


A. Hanger rods for steel pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule (see 

drawings for sizes larger than 12-inches): 

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing 

Up to 1¼" 3/8” 8'-0" 

1½" and 2" 3/8” 10'-0" 

2½" and 3" ½" 10'-0" 

4" and 6" 5/8” 12'-0" 

thru 12” 7/8” 12’-0” 

B. Hanger rods for brass and copper pipe and tube shall be installed in accordance with the 

following schedule: 

Up to 1/4" 3/8” 6'-0" 

1½" and above 3/8” 10'-0" 

2" 3/8” 10'-0" 

2½" ½" 10'-0" 

3" thru 6” ½" 10'-0" 

8” thru 12” 7/8” 10’-0” 

C. Hanger rods for PVC and CPVC pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following 

schedule: 

Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing 

1” and smaller 3/8” 3 

1-1/4” thru 2” 3/8” 4 

2-1/2” thru 6” ½” 4 

8” thru 12” 7/8” 4 

D. Support horizontal cast iron soil pipe at 5’-0” on center with one hanger for each pipe length. 

Locate hangers close to hubs. Where 10 foot lengths of pipe are used spacing may be 

increased to 10’-0” on center. 

E. In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers within 12 inches or 

change in pipe direction (elbows, tees) and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. 

F. Where more than one pipe is to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze 

type hangers. Trapeze bar angles and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required 

spacing to support the particular group of pipes. 

G. For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls, use welded steel brackets. Fig. 

194 (MSS-31) for loads up to 750 lbs.; Fig. 195 (MSS-32) for loads up to 1500 lbs.; Fig. 199 

(MSS-33) for loads up to 3000 lbs. 

H. Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use "Unistrut" pipe racks. 

I. Plastic coated or copper hangers shall be provided where hangers are in direct contact with 

copper piping, except outdoors where copper hangers shall be used. On insulated copper 

piping, plastic coated hangers may be omitted, provided hanger is isolated from copper pipe. 





J. Mount roof mounted piping on prefabricated manufactured galvanized roof curb rails a 

minimum of 18 inches above the roof surface. Condensate drain piping shall be supported 

using pressure treated wood sleepers. 

K. For piping within the chiller plant of a size 4-inches and above shall be supported using a 

spring cushion type pipe roll hanger, Figure 178 (MSS-49), or for single hanger rods, Figure 

C-268. Deflections shall be 1-inch or greater. 

3.2 VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS 

A. For steel piping vertical support, spacing shall not exceed 15 feet. 

B. For copper and brass tube and pipe vertical support, spacing shall not exceed 10 feet. 

C. For cast iron pipe vertical support, spacing shall not exceed 15 feet. 

D. For PVC and CPVC vertical support, spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, with mid-story guides 

provided for piping 2 inches and smaller. 

3.3 PIPE SUPPORTS 

A. For un-insulated horizontal steel and wrought iron pipe, use malleable iron split pipe ring with 

turn buckle adjuster, Fig. 108 (MSS-11) and 114 (MSS-15) combined for pipes up to 8"; 

carbon steel double bolt pipe clamp with weldless eye nut, Fig. 290 (MSS-17) for pipes over 

8". 

B. For horizontal copper pipe and tube through 2 inches in size, use copper-plated malleable 

iron split pipe ring with turn buckle adjuster, Fig. CT-138R (MSS-10) and 114 combined. For 

larger copper pipe use Figure CT-65 with isolating insulation between hanger and pipe. 

C. For horizontal cast iron soil pipe, use clevis hanger, Fig. 590. 

D. For vertical, steel, wrought iron and cast iron pipe, use extension steel riser pipe clamps, Fig. 

261 (MSS-8), installed below a coupling or welded lugs, or Fig. 40 (MSS-42). 

E. For vertical copper pipe and tube, use copper-plated extension pipe clamp, Fig. CT-121 

(MSS-8). 

F. Exterior or floor supported piping on slabs shall be supported using restrained pipe stanchion 

saddle Figure 265 (MSS-38) for 4 inch piping and above, or 191 (MSS-37) for sizes less than 

4" diameter. 

G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods Figure 

46; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6" and over Figure 175. 

H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3" cast malleable iron hook Figure 126. 

I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4" and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp as 

specified under paragraph 3.1-F; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6" 

and over, or clevis hanger. 

J. For insulated piping where vapor barrier is to be maintained, use adjustable clevis hanger 

Figure 260 (MSS-1) with Figure 167 pipe shield, except that minimum gauge not less than 14 

through 3 inches in size, 12 through 12 inches in size and 1/8 inch thick through 26 inches in 

size. Shields shall be a minimum of 12 inches long. 




K. Shield for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. 


L. All ferrous pipe supports shall be cleaned and painted with one coat of rust inhibiting paint. 

3.4 INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS 

A. Hanger rods, use galvanized or plated steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140, or, 

253. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146 shall be used wherever possible. 

B. Chain wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be 

suspended from another pipe. No piping shall be supported from the roof deck. 

3.5 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS 

A. For attaching steel or carbon-plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete, use galvanized 

malleable iron concrete inserts, Fig. 282, 281 or 285 (MSS-18) as appropriate. Refer to the 

project details for additional requirements. 

B. For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. 

87 (MSS-23) with retaining clip for loads up to 630 lbs.; Figs. 133, 134 (MSS-28), 228 (MSS- 

30) center load clamps for loads larger than 630 lbs. In lieu of the above welded beam 

attachments Figures 54, 55, and 66 are acceptable for catalogued load ratings. At joists, 

Figure 60 steel washer plates are acceptable between joist angles located at joist panel 

points. 

C. Vertical expansion shields or toggles shall be used for suspending hanger rods where inserts 

have been omitted, in existing concrete construction or similar instances where inserts cannot 

be used. Where expansion shields or toggles are used, loading shall not exceed 25 percent 

of the manufacturers catalogued ultimate load capacity and a load test shall be performed on 

not less than four anchors. Where loads exceed those which can be attained using a single 

hanger, use Figure 47, 49, or 52 concrete plates. 

3.6 PIPE COVERING PROTECTION 

A. Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping shall not injure, compress or pierce insulation. 

Provide insulation protection shields, Fig. 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device, for 

cold piping. Insulation shields shall be a minimum of 12 gauge galvanized steel, 12 inches 

long through pipe size up to 12 inches in diameter, 1/8 inch thick galvanized steel 18 inches 

long for pipe up to 26 inches in diameter. Hot piping with compressible insulation shall be of 

a pipe size 2.5-inches and above, be provided with Figure 160 protection saddle. 

3.7 SLEEVES 

A. Position sleeves prior to placement of concrete, provide reinforcement at sleeves. 

B. Caulk between pipe and sleeve. At fire rated partitions, walls and floors, install a UL listed 

pipe penetration assembly and install in accordance with the manufacturers requirements, to 

provide an UL listed, fire rated assembly with a rating which equals or exceeds that of the 

item penetrated. 

C. At smoke tight walls and partitions, fully caulk around pipe/duct and sleeve and sleeve and 

wall to maintain smoke integrity. 

D. Sleeves shall meet the requirements of Section 15000, “General Provisions”. 




3.8 EQUIPMENT 

A. Support suspended equipment as generally specified above for piping. 


B. Support shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturers recommendations, except 

as otherwise detailed on the drawings. 

C. For rotating equipment, provide vibration isolation as specified in Section 15200. 

D. Install supports to provide full access to equipment for maintenance and servicing. 

E. Roof mounted equipment, not otherwise provided or specified with roof curb supports, shall 

be provided with pre-manufactured roof supports specifically designed for the support of 

mechanical equipment. Supports shall be constructed of aluminum or stainless steel, 

incorporate an integral screw type height adjustment device, integral deck flange, flashing 

and related appurtenances required to provide a wind-load rated, watertight installation, as 

manufactured by Thaler Metal Industries type MERS-900A (metal deck) or type MERS-920A 

(concrete deck). Supports shall be anchored to the building structure, and equipment 

anchored to supports to withstand the imposed wind loading. Bottom of Mechanical 

equipment shall not be less than 18 inches above the roof surface, or greater where required 

to comply with code minimums. 

F. Guy wire anchors shall be attached using Thaler type FARA-6 fall arrest anchors (metal roof) 

or FARA-1 fall arrest anchors (concrete roofs). 

G. All equipment installed outdoors shall be designed, constructed and installed to meet the 

applied wind force, refer to Section 15000. 

3.9 LOADING 

A. Confirm load imposed upon the building structure with the project structural engineer. 

3.10 SWAY BRACING 

A. For all pipe sizes 4 inches and larger that change in direction more than 45 degrees, provide 

rigid support sway bracing. 






1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 

SECTION 15170 – MOTORS 




B. Where other sections contain conflicting requirements, bring conflicts to the attention of the 

Architect/Engineer before proceeding. The contractors bid shall be based upon the more 

stringent requirement. 


A. Single phase electric motors. 

B. Three phase electric motors. 


A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 

B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. 

C. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 

D. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 

E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 


A. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. 

B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of General Conditions. 

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

A. Submit operation and maintenance data. 

B. Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication 

instructions. 

C. Where motors are submitted as integral components of equipment assemblies, ensure that 

the motors provided comply with the requirements of this section. 






A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors for general HVAC use, 

and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product development, testing, 

and manufacturing experience. 

1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to 1987 Edition of the National Electrical Code. 

B. Conform to State of Florida energy code. 


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Specifications. 

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Specifications. 

C. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and 

suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from 

equipment and store separately. 


2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS 

A. Electrical Service: Refer to the drawings for required electrical characteristics. 

B. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment and for temperature 

rise in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor, and 

motor enclosure type. 

C. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labeled for hazard classification, with over 

temperature protection. 

D. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load 

amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, Service 

Factor, Power Factor. 

E. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional 

horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end 

frame. 

2.2 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS 

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. 

B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. 

C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. 

D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A insulation, NEMA Service Factor, pre-lubricated sleeve or ball 

bearings. 





E. Enclosed Motors: Class A insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, pre-lubricated ball bearings. 

2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS 

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. 

B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. 

C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. 

D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A insulation, minimum 1.0 Service 

Factor, pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. 

2.4 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS 

A. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque. 

B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. 

C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B 


D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for Design B 

motors. 

E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. 

F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to 

determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance 

data. 

G. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of 

cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. 

H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged 

provision for re-lubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate 

bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard 

shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. 

I. Sound Power Levels: To ANSI/NEMA MG 1. 

J. Weatherproof Epoxy Treated Motors. Epoxy coat windings with rotor and starter surfaces 

protected with epoxy enamel. Bearings shall be double shielded with waterproof nonwashing 

grease. 

K. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when 

tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112-b and classified as premium efficiency. 

L. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage 

when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112. 

M. Motors connected to variable frequency drives shall be fully compatible with the drive, 

suitable for sustained operation, rated for variable torque service, inverter duty type. Where 

specifically permitted by the drive manufacturer, premium efficiency (IEEE Standard 112, 

Test Method B) motors may be used with Class F or H insulation, NEMA winding design “B”. 





3.1 APPLICATION 


A. Motors drawing less than one horsepower may be germane to equipment manufacturer and 

need not conform to these specifications. 

B. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where located outdoors or specifically noted 

otherwise. 

C. Motors shall be premium energy efficient type. 

D. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type or permanent split 

capacitor type. 

E. Motors located in exterior locations, air cooled condensers, explosion proof environments, 

and dust collection systems shall be totally enclosed type. 

F. Motors located in wet air streams such as draw thru cooling towers shall be totally enclosed 

weatherproof epoxy-treated type. 

3.2 NEMA OPEN MOTOR SERVICE FACTORS 

HP 1800 RPM 

¾ 1.25 

1 1.15 

1.5-150 1.15 

3.3 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE: THREE PHASE - OPEN, DRIP-PROOF, 

PREMIUM ENERGY EFFICIENT 

HP RPM (Syn) NEMA Frame Percent Efficiency Percent Power Factor 

1 1800 56,142T, 143T 82 84 

1-1/2 1800 56,145T 84 85 

2 1800 56,145T 84 85 

3 1800 56,145T, 182T 86 86 

5 1800 184T 87 87 

7-1/2 1800 213T 88 86 

10 1800 215T 89 85 

15 1800 254T 91 85 

20 1800 256T 91 86 

25 1800 284T 91 85 

30 1800 286T 92 88 

40 1800 324T 92 83 

50 1800 326T 93 85 

60 1800 364T 93 88 

75 1800 365T 93 88 

100 1800 404T 95 88 

125 1800 405T 95 88 





3.4 PERFORMANCE SCHEDULE: THREE PHASE - TOTALLY ENCLOSED, FAN 

COOLED, PREMIUM ENERGY EFFICIENT 

HP RPM (Syn) NEMA Frame Percent Efficiency Percent Power Factor 

1 1800 143T 82 84 

1-1/2 1800 145T 84 85 

2 1800 145T 84 85 

3 1800 182T 87 83 

5 1800 184T 88 83 

7-1/2 1800 213T 89 85 

10 1800 215T 90 84 

15 1800 254T 91 86 

20 1800 256T 91 85 

25 1800 284T 92 84 

30 1800 286T 93 86 

40 1800 324T 94 86 

50 1800 326T 94 86 

60 1800 364T 94 86 

75 1800 365T 95 86 






SECTION 15200 VIBRATION ISOLATION 


1.2 SCOPE 




A. Provide vibration isolation supports for all rotating and reciprocating mechanical equipment 

and piping as required to prevent transmission of vibration to building structure. Expected 

noise levels in various parts of the building shall generally conform to noise criteria 

recommendations set forth in 1984 ASHRAE Systems Handbook, Chapter 32, Page 32.13, 

Table 19. Mid-point of range of NC criteria curves applies. Contractor shall be responsible 

for selecting and installing vibration isolators as specified, or indicated or otherwise required 

to prevent transmission of vibration which would cause noise levels in excess of expected 

noise levels. Provide concrete bases as required for equipment. 


B. All vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and placing forms with steel 

reinforcing, designed and furnished by single manufacturer, or supplier, who will be 

responsible for adequate coordination of all phases of work. Deflections as scheduled in 

1984 ASHRAE Systems Handbook, Chapter 32, page 32.29, Table 30. Concrete material 

shall be as specified in Division 3. 

C. Vibrator isolation manufacturer is responsible for providing such supervision as may be 

necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of isolators. Upon completion of 

installation and after system is put into operation, manufacturers shall make final inspection 

and submit his report to Engineer in writing certifying correctness of installation and 

compliance with approved submittal data. 

D. Mason Industries used as basis of design. Provide products by Mason, B-Line, Amber 

Booth, Vibration Eliminator Co. or Vibration Mountings and Controls. 



B. Submittal data to show type, size dimensions, rated capacity, rated deflection, compressed 

spring height, solid spring height, identity color coding and labeling details, and location 

diagrams for each color coding and labeling details, and location diagrams for each isolator 

proposed and any other information as required for Engineer to check isolator selections for 

compliance with Specifications. All steel bases and concrete inertia bases completely 

detailed. Submittal data to include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting 

isolators. 

C. Coordinate submittals to indicate loading at each isolation point for actual equipment being 

furnished. 





2.1 EQUIPMENT 


A. Unless otherwise noted, all mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to 

prevent transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to building structure. 

Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with weight distribution so as to produce 

reasonable uniform deflection. Deflections as required to meet criteria established under 

paragraph 1.2, or as specified. 

B. All isolators exposed to outdoor weather with galvanized finish of all ferrous parts and bolts 

and nuts cadium- plated, or electro zinc plated. 

C. Vibration Isolation Mountings 

1. Double Deflection Neoprene Mountings (Mason Specification A) 

a. Double deflection neoprene mountings maximum static deflection 0.35". All metal 

surfaces neoprene covered and have friction pads both top and bottom. Bolt holes 

provided for areas where bolting is required. 

b. Pads shall be a minimum 3/4” thickness neoprene, Mason “super waffle” type. 

2. Free Standing Steel Spring (Mason Specification B) 

a. Spring type isolators free standing and laterally stable without any housing and 

complete with ¼" neoprene acoustical friction pads between base-plate and 

support. All mountings with leveling bolts rigidly bolted to equipment. Spring 

diameters no less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated load. Spring 

with minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of rated deflection. Springs 

shall be hot dipped galvanized or plastic coated. Mason Industries type SLF 

spring mounting. 

3. Pipe Isolation Hanger (Mason Specification E) 

a. Vibration hangars shall contain a steel spring and 0.3 inch deflection neoprene 

element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation 

bushing, and allow for a 30-degree arc of swing. Devices shall be pre-compressed 

with a release mechanism to free the spring after installation and a scale to 

indicate the actual deflection. Mason Type PC30N. 



A. Installation and adjustment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Vibration isolators shall provide required deflection under imposed loads and shall produce 

uniform loading and deflection even when equipment weight is not evenly distributed. 

Leveling bolts shall not be used as jacking devices. 

C. Vibration isolation types and deflections as specified, indicated or scheduled. 





D. Contractor and vibration isolation manufacturer or his regularly designed and factory 

authorized representative shall perform following tasks in addition to supply and installation of 

isolation equipment: 


1. Identify name, model number and other necessary identifying data for each item of 

mechanical equipment to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate resilient mounting 

systems with exact equipment furnished in regard to physical size, isolator locations, 

weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between vibration 

isolation device fabricator and equipment manufacturer required. 

2. Select piping systems isolators for proper coordination with physical arrangement of 

pipe lines and with physical characteristics of building. 

3. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently mounted 

equipment and piping to assure that vibration isolators are installed in strict 

accordance with normally accepted practices for critical environments. 

4. Replace at no extra cost to Owner, isolators which do not produce required 

deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct operating height, or 

which do not produce required isolation. 

5. Cooperation with other Contractors engaged in project so that installation of vibration 

isolation devices will proceed in manner that is in best interests of Owner. 

6. Notify Architect of project conditions which affect vibration isolation system 

installation or performance and which are found to be different from conditions 

indicated or specified. Should vibration isolation system installation proceed without 

such notification, remedial work required to achieve proper isolator performance shall 

be accomplished by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. 

7. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping 

supports, electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines, 

building construction, etc., and notify involved contractor as to these problems or 

potential problems. Where such situations cannot be easily resolved, notify Architect 

so that preventive or remedial action can take place on timely basis. Remedial 

measures required shall be undertaken by Contractor responsible at no additional 

cost to Owner. 

A. Piping runs 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be isolated for the greater of a distance of 20 feet 

from the connected equipment or at the first 3 hangers using Type "E" pipe isolation hangers, 

except that piping inside of the chiller room and main runs of a size larger than 4 inches shall 

be supported on spring type hangers, coordinate with Section 15141. 

B. Verify proper operation of existing inertia bases for condenser and secondary pumps. 

Replace springs as necessary to ensure proper deflection. 






SECTION 15252 – PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION 



1.2 SCOPE 



A. Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to cold 

surfaces of piping, tanks, fittings and other surfaces. 

B. Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and 

other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 

C. The term piping refers to pipe, fittings, valves, controls, and related system appurtenances. 

D. Attachments to piping surfaces shall be insulated the same as piping. 

E. All cold surfaces subject to condensation shall be insulated. 

F. Any existing insulation damaged during installation of new shall be replaced. Where new 

pipe is connected to existing, the insulation shall be continuous. 


A. Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame spread, fuel contribution and 

smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA_90A. Flame spread rating of not more 

than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50. 

B. Insulation valves shall be greater of that required by Chapter 13 of the Florida Budiling Code 

“Energy Efficiency”, or as specified herein. 

1.4 QUALIFICATION 

A. Insulating materials by Armacell, Rubatex, Owens Corning, Certainteed, Knauf, Manville and 

Pittsburg Corning. 

B. Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 



B. Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts showing complete descriptive data and installation 

instructions. 

C. Include a summary sheet indicating in tabular format the product, jacketing, mastic adhesive 

and thickness for each service and location. 





2.1 ALUMINUM JACKET - TYPE "E" 


A. 0.016 inch thick corrugated aluminum jacket, with one mil polyethylene film and 40 pound 

kraft paper vapor barrier secured with ½" aluminum bands. 

B. Fittings shall be covered with pre-formed aluminum jacket, as manufactured by Childers or 

equal. 

2.2 PIPE INSULATION - TYPE "H" 

A. Rigid Foamed Glass: Preformed split sectional pipe insulation of rigid foamed cellular glass 

for piping and flat block formed to fit equipment. Apply with butt joints staggered and all joints 

tightly butted and buttered with joint sealer. All joints fitted to eliminate voids, not filled with 

vapor seal coating. Wire in place with rustproof wire, 12 inches on center, but not less than 2 

wires per section. 

B. Indoor pipe, pipe fittings, elbows and equipment insulation in equipment rooms shall be 

covered with 1/8" layer of white open weave glass fabric (10 x 20 mesh) with all joints 

overlapped 2" and cover with second 1/8" layer of same mastic. Indoor concealed straight 

runs of pipe insulation shall be covered with factory-applied white, fire retardant, foil-scrimkraft 

all purpose jacket. 

C. Insulation located outdoors shall be finished with .016" thick aluminum manufactured by 

Childers. Aluminum shall be applied with longitudinal joints lapped to shed water. 

Circumferential joints between laps to weatherproof joints. Aluminum shall be banded in 

place with 1/2" wide aluminum bands. Fittings, valves, etc., shall be insulated with mitered 

sections of same material and jacketing as adjacent pipe. 

2.3 PIPE INSULATION - TYPE "S" 

A. Flexible closed-cell elastomeric, "K" valve of 0.27 at 75-degrees F equal to Armaflex Type 

"AP". Install using Armstrong 520 adhesive with 100 percent coverage of all seams and 

ends. Finish with two coats of a polyvinylchloride ultra-violet resistant finish where exposed 

to view inside the building or exposed to the weather approved by the manufacturer which will 

not crack when compressed, custom color blended where installed indoors to match the color 

of the surrounding surfaces. 



A. Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be 

rejected. Application details shall be in accord with the insulating materials suppliers' 

recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. 

B. Inspect piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing Contractor 

has completed leak tests and surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. 

C. Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All 

details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken 





vapor barrier is provided. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes 

connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal to metal 

contact between pipes and hangers. 

D. Insulation at pumps, strainers and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner 

that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall 

have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor 

barrier. Type S insulation shall not be used for removable sections of insulation. 

3.2 INSULATION SCHEDULE 

SERVICE 

A. Chilled Water Lines Supply and Return. Type H, 1½" thick pipe sizes up to 2". 2" thick on 

pipes 2½" through 6”, 2-1/2” thick pipe sizes 8” and larger, except underground piping 

thickness is 2” maximum. 

B. Chiller evaporator, suction lines, thermal expansion devices including downstream piping and 

cold chiller surfaces subject to condensation. Type ‘S’, 1-inch thick. 

C. Chilled water pumps. Type ‘H’, 2-inches thick, horizontally (horizontal split case) or vertically 

(end suction) split to allow for easy removal, stainless steel or aluminum jacketing with 

sections held together with stainless steel worm driven bands. 

D. Cold equipment, air separators, etc., Type ‘H’, 2-inches thick. 

E. In addition to the above, insulate all fittings, piping supports and equipment cold surfaces 

subject to condensation with materials and jacketing used for the piping to which it attaches. 

F. Flexible closed-cell elastomeric insulation WILL NOT BE PERMITTED as a substitution for 

Type "H" insulation. This includes its use on flanges, flow-meters, flexible connections, 

strainers, air separators, etc. Where removable sections of insulation are required, they shall 

be constructed from sections of Type "H" insulation, wire or banded into place. 

3.3 GUARDS 

A. Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation 

to extend up from floor 24". Guard to be galvanized sheet steel not less than 26 gauge. 

3.4 CONDENSATION 

A. Should condensation occur on any cold surface (including but not limited to piping, 

equipment, supports, framework), at any time from system activation through the warranty 

period, the insulation shall be reworked to prevent the condensation at no additional cost to 

the Owner. 







1.2 SCOPE 

SECTION 15510 – HYDRONIC PIPING 




B. Refer to Section 15545, “Water Treatment” for detailed flushing, cleaning and treatment 

requirements. 

A. Pipe and pipe fittings. 

B. Chilled water, condenser water, make-up water and condenser water blow down. 

C. Cleaning of Piping 

D. Treatment of Closed System 


A. ANSI/ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 

B. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications. 

C. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. 

D. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal. 

E. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. 

F. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. 

G. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and 

Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. 

H. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and 

Elevated Temperatures. 

I. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal. 

J. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube. 

K. ASTM A197 – Standard Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron. 





A. Conform to ANSI/ASME B31.9. 


A. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 

B. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 

C. Brazing shall be in accordance with ASME B31.5. 

D. Products shall be of domestic manufacture. 

E. Water treatment shall be performed in accordance with Section 15545. 


A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. 

B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. 

C. Include welder’s certification of compliance with ANSI/ASME SEC 9. 



B. Store and protect products under provisions of Specifications. 

C. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. 


2.1 CHILLED AND CONDENSER WATER, ABOVE GRADE 

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40, black. 


1. Fittings: ANSI/ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, 

to match pipe wall thickness. 

2. Joints: Screwed for pipe 2" and under; ANSI/AWS D1.1 welded for pipe over 2". 

3. Insulation: With closed glass cell insulation for chilled water, see Section 15252. 

Condenser water un-insulated. 

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn, may be used for chilled water, condenser 

water and reheat hot water under 2-inches in size, at the contractor’s option. 

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought 

copper, long radius. 




2. Joints: Brazed, 15% silver melting point above 1000 degrees. 


C. Chilled and hot water piping exposed to weather shall be shielded in aluminum jacketing. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS, OVERFLOWS, MAKE-UP WATER PIPING AND 

CONDENSER WATER BLOW DOWN 

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. 

1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29 solder wrought 

copper. 

2. Joints: Solder 95/5. 

B. CVPC Pipe (Condensate Water Blow down Only): ASTM F441, ASTM D2672, Type IV 

Grade 1, Cell Classification 23447 per ASTM D1784, Schedule 80. 

1. Fittings: ASTM F439, material to match pipe. 

2. Joints: Solvent cement and threaded sealant type shall be as approved by the 

manufacturer, formulated for use with CPVC. 

2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS 

A. Pipe Size 2" and Under: 250 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping; bronze 

unions for copper pipe, soldered joints. 

B. Pipe Size Over 2": 150 psig forged steel weld-neck flanges for ferrous piping; bronze slip-on 

flanges for copper piping. 

C. Dielectric fittings/unions between dissimilar metal. 



A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. 

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 

D. Hydrostatically test completed systems prior to application of insulation, see Section 15992. 

E. After completion, flush, fill, clean, and treat systems, see Section 15545. 

F. Un-insulated below grade steel piping shall be provided with bituminous coating. 


A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain 

gradient. Drawings are diagrammatic in nature and may not indicate every bend, offset or 

fitting which is required or necessary for coordination with the structure and the work of other 





trades which shall be provided under this contract at no additional cost to the Owner. 

B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work. 

Piping, inclusive of insulation shall be installed a minimum of 6 inches from walls. 

C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 

D. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or 

connected equipment. 

E. Provide clearance for installation of insulation, and access to valves and fittings. 

F. Provide access panels at valves and fittings that are not accessible. Locate valves and 

metering devices in easily accessible locations with adequate clearance to service devices. 

G. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain 

top of pipe level. 

H. At all welds and where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, 

scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 

I. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for identification, see Section 15085. 

J. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. 

K. Welding, brazing and soldering shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1. 

L. Install pre-insulated piping systems in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and 

under the field supervision of a technical factory representative, with field reports submitted to 

the Architect through the Contractor. 

M. Provide anchors and expansion loops for pre-insulated conduit systems as shown and/or 

required/recommended by the manufacturer, of a configuration approved for use with the 

product. 

N. Ends of CPVC pipe shall have burrs removed and be cleaned/primed with a product 

approved by the pipe manufacturer. 

O. Provide thread-o-lets for all temperature control sensors, coordinate with Section 15900. 

Provide an adjacent thread-o-let and install a pressure temperature test port. Have all 

proposed sensor locations approved in the field by the Commissioning agent. 


A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. 

B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder 

adapters to pipe. 

C. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical 

risers. 

D. Install plugcock valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. 

E. Provide spring loaded lift check valves on discharge of pumps. 





F. Use plug cocks for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off or 

isolating valves are also provided. 

G. Use butterfly valves where shown. 

H. Provide ¾" ball drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical 

risers, and at equipment. Pipe to nearest drain. Provide 1/4” ball valve air vents at system 

high points and similar locations where air could be trapped. Provide 2-inch system flushing 

ball valve in locations directed by the commissioning firm. 

I. Use dielectric fittings or couplings for dissimilar metals. 

J. Use pipe dope or teflon tape for screwed pipe connections. 

K. Screwed pipe joints must extend 1½" into female end, with no more than three exposed 

threads. 

L. For branch takeoffs, use pre-manufactured tees except on chilled and hot water systems, 

where the branch pipe is 3 diameters smaller than the main, pre-manufactured weld-o-lets 

may be used in lieu of tees. 

3.4 PIPING SCHEDULE 

A. Chilled and condenser water piping shall be black steel. 

B. Make-up water piping shall be soldered copper. 

C. New cooling tower equalizer lines shall be CPVC. 

D. Chemical treatment piping shall be CPVC. 

3.5 CLEANING/TREATMENT 

A. Clean system after all testing is completed. 

B. Test water to determine concentration of chemicals required to treat system. 

C. Provide bypass shot feeder for closed system chemical treatment. Provide blowdown and 

metered type chemical treatment for condenser water systems. Provide pre-treatment of 

boiler fed water systems. 

D. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder. 

E. Do not operate the equipment for any purpose until chemical treatment has been performed. 

Refer to Section 15545 for detailed requirements. 






SECTION 15515 – HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 


1.2 SCOPE 




A. Air vents. 

B. Strainers. 

C. Flow meters. 

D. Relief valves. 

E. Suction diffuser. 


A. Conform to ANSI/ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code Section 8D for manufacture of 

tanks. 


A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer 

throughout. 


A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division One. 

B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, clearances, service sizes, and finishes. 

Include product description, model and dimensions. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division One. 


A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division One. 

B. Include installation instruction, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement 

parts list. 


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division One. 




B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division One. 


2.1 AIR VENTS 


A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2" diameter pipe to form air chamber, with 1/4" brass 

ball valve at top of chamber. Valves shall meet Section 15100 requirements. 

B. Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper float, stainless steel float, stainless steel valve 

and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve. 

C. Washer Type: Brass with hydroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shutoff, 

and integral spring loaded ball check valve. 

D. Manufacturers: 

1. Bell & Gossett 

2. Armstrong 

3. Amtrol 

2.2 STRAINERS 

A. Size 2" and Under: Screwed bronze body ASTM B-62 for 175 psig working pressure, Y 

pattern with stainless steel perforated screen equal to 2½ times pipe area minimum. 

B. Size 2½" and Larger: Flanged cast iron body for 175 psig working pressure, or basket pattern 

with stainless steel perforated screen equal to 2½ times pipe diameter area as indicated. 

C. Blow down valves shall be provided for all strainers full size of tapping. Provide ball type 

valve with hose end connection, meeting the requirements of Section 15100. 

D. Screens shall be provided as follows: 

1. Chilled/condenser 

water systems: 1/4” through 4” = 0.062 inches 

Above 4” = 1/8 inches 

2. Start-up screens shall also be provided. 

E. Manufacturers: 

1. Muller Steam Specialty 

2. Sarco 

3. Armstrong 

4. Hoffman 




2.3 FLOW METERS 


A. Venturi principle type suitable for use with direct reading gage, threaded, soldered, welded or 

flanged piping connections for 125 psig working pressure, with pressure hose shut off valves. 

Material shall be bronze through 2 inches in size, steel above 2 inches. 

B. Venturies shall have a stamped metal or laminated tag attached with a brass chain with the 

following information: 

C. Manufacturer 

D. Size 

E. Design water flow 

F. Meter reading 

2.4 RELIEF VALVES 

A. Bronze or brass body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct 

pressure actuated, with internal enclosed spring and external release lifting lever, capacities 

ASME certified and labeled. 

B. Manufacturers: 

1. Watts 

2. Bell & Gossett 

3. Armstrong 

4. Amtrol 

2.5 AIR AND DIRT SEPARATOR 

A. Cast iron or steel body, screwed (through 2 inches) or flanged (above 2 inches) end 

connections, enlarged body with tangential nozzles tappings for expansion tank and drain 

connections, without strainer. 

B. Construct in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Division 

1. 

C. Provide with galvanized or painted finish. 

D. Provide base ring for floor mounted units. 

E. Equip with brass conical shaped air venting chamber. 

F. Provide with brass flushing valve on side of separator. 

G. Unit shall utilize “pall rings” for separation of gas and dirt. 

H. Provide with ball type blowdown valve. 




I. Manufacturers: 

1. Taco Model 4900-AD Series 

2. Spirax 

2.6 SUCTION DIFFUSER (IF APPLICABLE) 


A. Cast or ductile iron body and cover rated for 175 psig at 300 degrees F, with guide vanes, 

magnetic plug and integral pipe foot support. 

B. Removable stainless steel strainer and brass fine mesh start-up screen. 

C. Manufacturers: 

1. Armstrong 

2. Bell and Gossett 

3. Taco 


3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION 

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended 

performance. 

B. Support tanks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes with air 

eliminators. 

D. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated, provide drains at system 

low points. 

E. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to 

nearest drain. 

F. Provide air separator on suction side of system hot water circulation pump and connect to 

expansion tank. 

G. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection and shell side 

of heat exchanger 

H. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports or ceiling mounted 

supports. 

I. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat 

exchangers, and expansion tanks. 

J. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. Pipe backflow preventer to nearest floor drain or 

to edge of concrete pad for devices located outdoors. 

K. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of 

individual vent areas. Pipe make up water to suction side of pump. 




L. Install temperature wells furnished under Section 15900. 


M. Provide fine mesh stainless steel screen in all system strainers during initial flushing 

operations. Monitor pressure drop across strainers and remove accumulated debris. Once 

the system flushing has been completed to the satisfaction of the Commissioning agent, 

remove temporary screens. Refer to Section 15545 for detailed flushing requirements. 






1.1 SCOPE 

SECTION 15540 HVAC PUMPS 




1.2 WORK INCLUDED 

A. Base mounted pumps. 

B. In-line pumps. 


A. ANSI/UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps. 


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of 

pumps with minimum five years experience. Provide products from one of the following firms: 

1. Taco 

2. Paco 

3. Aurora 

4. Armstrong 

B. Alignment: Base mounted pumps shall be aligned by qualified millwright and alignment 

certified. 


A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01043. 

B. Submit certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system 

operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. 

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division One. 


A. Submit operation and maintenance data. 

B. Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication instructions, and replacement 

parts list. 






B. Store and protect products under provisions Specifications. 


2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Balance: Rotating parts, statically and dynamically. 


B. Construction: To permit servicing without breaking piping or motor connections. 

C. Pump Motors: Premium efficiency type to operate at 1800 maximum rpm. 

D. Pump Connections: Flanged or screwed. 

E. Configuration: Pump, base and motor shall be a catalogued combination provided by the 

pump manufacturer. Field fabricated pump bases are not acceptable. 

F. Balanced mechanical seals. 

G. Heating pumps shall be suitable for use with water up to 230 degrees F. 

2.2 BASE MOUNTED PUMPS 

A. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, long coupling drive. End suction or vertical split-case as 

scheduled. 

B. Casing: Cast iron, replaceable bronze wear rings, with suction and discharge gage ports, seal 

flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge, tested at 150% of the maximum 

working pressure. Minimum working pressure to be 175 psi. 

C. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft, trimmed to meet the scheduled performance, 

equal to or less than 90% of the maximum diameter which will fit into the casing. 

D. Bearings: Grease or permanently lubricated roller or ball bearings. 

E. Shaft: Alloy steel with stainless steel shaft sleeve. 

F. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat. 225 degrees F maximum continuous 

operating temperature. 

G. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard, Woods type. 

H. Baseplate: Cast iron or fabricated steel. 

I. Performance: See Schedule Sheet, efficiency shall not be less than the value scheduled. 

J. Type of pump shall be end suction or horizontal split case as scheduled. End suction pump 

shall be back pullout type. 

2.3 IN-LINE PUMPS 

A. Type: Vertical in-line, single stage, single or double suction type, 175 psi maximum working 

pressure, back pull-out design. 




B. Casing: Cast iron, ASTM A159. 

C. Impeller: Cast bronze, ASTM B584. 


D. Shaft: Alloy steel with stainless steel, copper alloy or aluminum bronze shaft sleeve. 

E. Seal: Carbon seal washer, ceramic seal seat. 

F. Drive: Direct coupled. 

G. Performance: Refer to Pump Schedule sheet. 

H. Bearings: Sealed for pumps of 5 HP and less, re-greaseable for larger sizes. 



A. Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and 

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 5 

percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 

D. Provide eccentric reducer at pump suction, concentric increaser at discharge. Support piping 

adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For base mounted pumps, 

provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches and over. 

E. See piping schematics for valves and accessories. 

F. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. 

G. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains. 

H. Lubricate pumps before start-up. Hand rotate pump shaft every three months during 

construction. 

I. Install base mounted pumps on concrete base, with anchor bolts, set and level, bolt and grout 

in place. 

J. Qualified millwright shall check, align, and certify base mounted pumps prior to start-up, after 

the pumps have reached their operating temperature, a “hot” alignment check shall be made. 

K. If pump does not meet designed performance within 5 percent then it shall be upgraded at no 

cost to Owner. 

L. Provide pressure gauge at pump, connected to both suction and discharge with isolating ball 

valves. 





SECTION 15545 CHEMICAL (WATER) TREATMENT 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SCOPE 


A. The other Contract Documents complement the requirements of this section. The 

General Requirements apply to the work of this section. 


A. Cleaning of piping systems. 

B. Treatment for closed systems. 

C. Treatment for open systems. 


A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division One. 

B. Submit shop drawings indicating system schematics, equipment locations, and controls 

schematics. 

C. Submit product data under provisions of Division One. 

D. Submit product data indicating chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment. 

E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division One. 

F. Submit manufacturer's field reports under provisions of Division One. 

G. Submit reports indicating start-up of treatment systems is completed and operating 

properly. 

H. Submit reports indicating analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment. 


A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Division One. 

B. Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and other equipment including spare 

parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. 

C. Include step by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations. 


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this 

Section with minimum five years documented experience. Company shall have local 

representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel. 





B. Provide water treatment materials and services by one of the following firms: 

1. Owners current chemical treatment provider. 


A. Conform to applicable EPA code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building 

mechanical systems, and for delivery to public sewage systems. 

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of 

Substantial Completion. 

B. Provide monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water 

analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating 

requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report to 

Owner after each visit. 

C. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services for warranty period. 

D. Include two hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on installation, 

care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems. Arrange course at 

startup of systems. 

E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to 

properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in 

writing based upon these inspections. 

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 

A. Submit maintenance materials under provisions of Division 1. 

B. Provide sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing during warranty period. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. System Cleaner: 

1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove 

grease and petroleum products; sodium tripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate. 

2. Algaecide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium 

hypochlorite, or microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyl 

tin oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or isothiazolones. 

B. Closed System Treatment (Chilled Water): 

1. Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH; polyphosphate. 

2. Corrosion inhibitors; liquid boron-nitrite, sodium nitrite and borax, sodium 

totyltriazole, low molecular weight polymers, phosphonates, sodium molybdate, or 

sulphites. 




3. Conductivity enhancers; phosphates or phosphonates. 

C. Condenser Water System Treatment (Cooling Towers): 


1. Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling; phosphonates, sodium polyphosphates, 

lignin derivatives, synthetic polymer polyelectrolytes, or organite phosphates. 

2. Acid to reduce alkalinity and pH; sulphuric acid. 

3. Corrosion inhibitor; zinc-phosphate, phosphonate-phosphate, phosphonatemolybdate 

and phosphonate-silicate, sodium tolyltriazole, or low molecular weight 

polymers. 

4. Algaecide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium 

hypochlorite, or microbiocides such as quaternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin 

oxide, methylene bis (thiocyanate), or isothiazolones. 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. By-pass (Pot) Feeder: Use existing for introduction of chemicals. 

B. Solution Metering Pump: Use existing. 

C. Liquid Level Switch: Use existing. 

D. Conductivity Controller: Existing to remain. 

E. Water Meter: Use existing. 

F. Solenoid Valves: Forged brass body globe pattern, normally open or closed as required, 

general purpose for indoor use, explosion-proof and watertight for outdoor installation 

solenoid enclosure, and continuous duty coil. (Replace existing.) 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water 

meter to record capacity in each system. 

B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning. 

C. Provide additional valving and drains as necessary to isolate new systems from existing 

and allow for flushing and re-circulating treatment. 

D. Systems to be thoroughly flushed prior to treatment, see Section 23 21 13, “Hydronic 

Piping”. 

3.2 CLEANING SEQUENCE 

A. Add cleaner to closed systems at concentration as recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Chilled Water Systems: Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible. 

Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain. Refill with clean water and 

repeat until system cleaner is removed. 





C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of 


D. Flush open systems with clean water for one hour minimum. Drain completely and refill. 

E. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. 

F. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is 

completed. Include disassembly of components as required. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.4 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT 

A. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by 

test. 

B. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test 

specimens. 

C. All water treatment connections to chilled water piping shall be insulated. 

3.5 CONDENSER WATER SYSTEMS (COOLING TOWERS) 

A. Existing condenser water control systems for inhibitor feed, blowdown and biocide feeds 

shall be used. Inhibitor application shall be meter activated, blowdown shall be 

conductivity activated, and biocide shall be meter fed with blowdown locked out to ensure 

biocide retention time. 

B. Existing conductivity controller to sample condenser water and operate a new 1-1/2 inch 

solenoid bleed valve and piping, wired to open when condensing water pump is 

operating. 

C. Introduce algaecide to tower by continuous feed with solution pump or solenoid valve on 

tank (chlorine). 

D. Provide 3/4 inch water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4 test 

specimens. 






SECTION 15684 – CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS 

(OWNER FURNISHED) 





B. Chiller schedules. 

C. The chiller is being pre-purchased by the Owner for installation by the Contractor. The 

Contractor shall carefully review the requirements of this section and shop drawings provided 

by the chiller manufacturer, for coordination of the installation. 

D. The Contractor shall obtain on-site services of the chiller manufacturer to oversee installation 

and start-up of the equipment. 


A. Chiller package. 

B. Charge of refrigerant and oil. 

C. Controls and control connections. 

D. Chilled water connections. 

E. Condenser water connections. 

F. Starters/Disconnects. 

G. Electrical power connections. 

H. Chiller insulation. 

I. ASHRAE 15 provisions. 


A. ANSI/ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 

B. ANSI/ASHRAE 90A - Energy Conservation in New Building Design. 

C. ANSI/ASME SEC 8 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 

D. ANSI/UL 465 - Central Cooling Air Conditioners. 

E. ARI 550 - Centrifugal or Rotary Water - Chilling Packages, Latest Edition 







B. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, 

required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping 

and connections, valves, strainers, and controls required for complete system. 


D. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, 

electrical requirements, wiring diagrams and dimensional characteristics. 

E. Submit written certification that components of package not furnished by manufacturer have 

been selected in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 

F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division One. 

G. Submit ARI certified performance data indicating energy input versus cooling load output 

from 0 to 100 percent in 25 percent increments of full load at specified and minimum 

condenser water temperature. 


A. Submit operation data under provisions of Division One. 

B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. 

Include trouble-shooting guide and installation manual. 

C. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Division One. 


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of the products specified in this 

Section with minimum five years documented experience. 

B. Provide equipment manufactured by one of the following: 

1. Trane 

2. York 


A. Conform to ARI 550 code for testing and rating of centrifugal chillers. 

B. Conform to ANSI/UL 465 code for construction of centrifugal chillers. 

C. Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 8 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing 

of centrifugal chillers. 

D. Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 (latest version) code for construction and operation of 

centrifugal chillers and equipment room design. Provide modifications to existing refrigerant 

monitoring system for compliance with applicable codes. 





E. Provide certification of inspection for conforming authority having jurisdiction approval. 

F. High Pressure 134a Chillers: Factory install check or manual isolation valves in the 

compressor discharge line to the condenser and the refrigerant liquid line leaving the 

condenser to allow for isolation and storage of the full refrigerant charge in the chiller 

condenser shell. In addition, provide isolation valve on the suction side of compressor from 

evaporator to allow for isolation and storage of full refrigerant charge in the chiller evaporator 

shell. 

G. Low Pressure R-123 Chillers: Chillers that operate on low pressure must have a high 

efficiency purge system to ensure that any potential non-condensable leakage into the vessel 

is immediately eliminated. The purge run time shall be monitored by the main unit controller 

to act as a leak detector if required. 


A. Deliver products; coordinate with Owner’s representative and phasing requirements. See 

contract drawings. 

B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division One. 

C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting 

units. 

D. Protect units from physical damage. Chillers shall ship without insulation to avoid damage 

during shipping and installation. Leave factory shipping covers in place until installation. 

Chillers shall not be kept outdoors or where exposed to the elements. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Provide five (5) year parts and labor warranty, commencing with beneficial use by the Owner. 

B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete chiller package as manufactured and delivered to 

site including materials and labor. 

C. Provide Owner with copies of all service records generated. 

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Furnish service and maintenance of chillers for period of one year from Date of Substantial 

Completion. 

1.11 SELECTION 

A. Select chiller to meet or exceed the scheduled operating conditions. Since the Engineer has 

no control over the chiller selection, the manufacturer is solely responsible for selecting a 

chiller that will operate satisfactorily under off-peak conditions. 

B. The chiller manufacturer shall provide a selection which will provide stable operation without 

surge or other potentially damaging operating anomalies for operation between 100 to 20 

percent of the scheduled chiller capacity at any condenser water temperature from 2-degrees 

above the scheduled condenser water entering temperature (but in no case less than 87degrees), 

down to 65-degrees, at the scheduled water flow rates. 




1.12 VERIFICATION OF CHILLER CAPACITY AND EFFICIENCY 

A. Factory Performance Test 

1. Factory performance test to be viewable over the internet. 


2. Performance to be measured at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% loading with constant 

condenser water temperature. 

3. A certified test report of all data shall be submitted to the Owner prior to completion of 

the project. The factory certified test report shall be signed by an officer of the 

manufacturer’s company. 

4. The equipment will be accepted if the test is conducted in conformance with AHRI 

Standard 550/590-2003 procedures and the proposed tolerances are met. 

5. If the equipment fails to perform within proposed tolerances, the manufacturer will be 

allowed to make necessary revisions to his equipment and retest as required. 

6. In the event that these revisions do not achieve submitted performance, the following 

penalties will be imposed: 

a. Capacity Test: For each ton below the allowable capacity, $1000 per ton will be 

deducted from the contract price. 

b. Allowable capacity = [(1 – tolerance) x design capacity] 

c. Power Consumption Penalty: All load points and the Power Consumption Penalty 

(P.C.P.) shall be based upon the tolerances specified above. The P.C.P. shall be 

calculated based upon the following formula: P.C.P. = [Measured kW – (measured 

tons x allowable kW/ton*)] x $2000/kW *Allowable kW/ton – [(1 + tolerance) x 

design kW/ton] 

d. Total Performance Penalty: The total performance penalty will be the sum of the 

capacity penalty and the power consumption penalty times the number of typical 

chillers, regardless if tested. 

e. Equipment manufacturer shall not invoice for the centrifugal chiller(s) until 

successful completion of the performance test or acceptance of penalty deduction 

from the contract. 

B. Each chiller shall be factory performance tested with the proposed refrigerant under full-load 

and part-load conditions as described above in an AHRI certified test facility. The 

manufacturer shall supply a certified test report to confirm performance as specified. Proper 

AHRI certification documents for the manufacturer’s test loop shall be made available for 

inspection upon request. 

C. The factory test instrumentation shall be per AHRI Standard 550/590-2003, and the 

calibration of all instrumentation shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and 

Technology (NIST). 

D. The performance test shall be run with clean tubes in accordance with AHRI 550/590-2003 to 

include the following: 

1. A downward temperature adjustment per AHRI 550/590-2003, Section C6.3 shall be 

made to the design leaving evaporator water temperature to adjust from the design 

fouling to the clean tube condition. 





2. An upward temperature adjustment per AHRI 550/590-2003, Section C6.3 shall be 

made to the design entering condenser water temperature to adjust from eh design 

fouling to the clean tube condition. 

3. There shall be no exceptions to conducting the performance test with clean tubes 

and with temperature adjustments in (1) and (2). The manufacturer shall clean tubes, 

if necessary, prior to test to obtain a test fouling factor of .0000hft2 F/Btu. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS 

A. Trane Product - CVHF Series. 

B. York – YK Series. 

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 

A. Provide factory assembled and tested, packaged, water cooled, liquid chillers consisting 

of centrifugal compressors, compressor motor, condenser, auxiliary heat recovery 

condenser, evaporator, refrigeration accessories, instrument and control panel including 

gages and indicating lights, auxiliary components and accessories, and motor starters. 

Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with ARI 550. 

B. Units shall have Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by 

ANSI/ASHRAE 90A. Scheduled full-load and part-load (NPCV) values shall not be 

exceeded. 

C. See Schedule for chiller sizes, efficiencies, capacities, electrical characteristics, and 

selection criteria. 

2.3 COMPRESSORS 

A. Compressor Casing: Cast iron, horizontally or vertically split with machined passages, 

leak tested with refrigerant trace gas. Provide sight glass for monitoring compressor 

rotation. 

B. Impellers: Single or multi-stage, in-line design, fully shrouded, statically and dynamically 

balanced, over-speed tested to 20 percent over operating speed, mounted on heat 

treated forged or rolled steel shaft, nonferrous, labyrinth seals between stages. 

C. Guide Vanes: Modulating radial blade dampers, on each stage, with externally mounted 

electric operator, suitable for capacity reduction to 15 percent of specified load without 

hot gas bypass when supplied with design entering water quantity and 75 degree F 

design temperature entering condenser water. 

D. Journal Bearings: Babbitt lined sleeve bearings, aluminum or steel backed, self aligning, 

pressure lubricated. 





E. Gear Box: Where required by the chiller design, gear box shall be the manufacturer’s 

standard design providing an even distribution of load and quiet operation and arranged 

to allow for field servicing. 

F. Lubrication: Direct drive, positive displacement oil pump, with oil cooler, pressure 

regulator, oil filters, thermostatically controlled oil heater, and motor controls motor. 

Interlock to start before chiller motor and run after motor is shut down. Provide sight 

glass for monitoring oil level. Provide cut off valves before and after oil filter. 

G. Refrigerant: Chiller shall operate on R-123 or 134a. Field charge chiller with refrigerant 

and oil. 

H. Handling Requirements for Refrigerants 

1. Follow minimum standards for refrigeration systems as required by ASHRAE 

Standard 15, with special attention to sections dealing with equipment room air 

monitoring. 

2. Two (2) separate refrigerant monitoring systems are currently in place. One (1) 

is for R-11 detection (Chillers 1, 2, and 3) and one (1) is for R-123. All costs of 

upgrading the monitoring system (labor and materials) to coordinate with the 

replacement chiller refrigerant is the responsibility of the chiller manufacturer. 

3. Where R-123 machines are provided the existing system shall be expanded to 

provide for two (2) additional R-123 monitoring locations, or at the chiller 

manufacturers option replaced. 

4. Where R-134a machines are provided either a new independent R-134a 

monitoring system shall be provided, or the existing monitoring system shall be 

replaced with a dual monitoring system. There shall not be less than one sensor 

at each chiller location (5 total). 

5. Electronic type sensors shall have sensor wiring run in rigid conduit, minimum of 

¾” in diameter. Suction type sensors shall utilize hard drawn copper tubing, or 

may use flexible tubing protected by ¾” rigid conduit. Suction type sensors shall 

be provided with inlet screens. 

6. Alarms, strobes, fire alarm and fan interface will be provided under the chiller 

installation contract. 

I. Motor: Shall be hermetic or semi-hermetic type as standard with the manufacturer. 

2.4 EVAPORATOR 

A. Provide evaporator of shell and tube type, seamless or welded steel construction with 

cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless copper tubes or red brass tubes with or 

without integral fins, rolled into tube sheets. High performance, internally enhanced 

tubes, 0.028 inches or thicker, measured at the root of the fin. 

B. Design, test, and stamp refrigerant side for design working pressure, in accordance with 

ANSI/ASME SEC. 8. 

C. Insulation shall be 1.5 inch thick, closed-cell elastomeric, K value of 0.27 at 75-degrees 

F, flexible foam, and cover all low temperature surfaces to include the evaporator and 





water boxes, suction elbow, economizer and motor cooling lines. Insulation shall be field 

applied and the responsibility of the chiller manufacturer. 

D. Where not integral with the chiller, provide thermometer wells for temperature controller 

and low temperature cutout. 

E. Provide refrigerant chambers with baffles to distribute entering liquid and separate liquid 

from leaving gas. 

F. Provide reseating type pressure relief valve on shell for R-134a machines where required 

by ANSI/ASHRAE 15. 

G. Construction and materials shall conform to ANSI B9.1 and ANSI/ASME SEC. 8. 

H. Fouling Factor for selection shall be 0.00010. 

I. Water boxes shall be of the marine type, fabricated from steel, be removable, have 

integral baffles coordinated with the number of passes, nozzle connections with grooved 

and beveled ends and include drain and vent connections. Water boxes shall allow for 

access, cleaning and maintenance of the evaporator tubes without removal of piping or 

rigging the evaporator end bells. Evaporator water boxes do not require hinges. 

2.5 CONDENSERS 

A. Provide condensers of shell and tube type, seamless or welded steel construction with 

cast iron or fabricated steel heads, individually replaceable, high efficiency, enhanced 

type seamless copper tubes or red brass tubes with integral fins, minimum 0.028 inch 

wall thickness rolled into tube sheets. 

B. Design, stamp and test refrigerant side for ASHRAE 15 Design working pressure, design, 

test and stamp water side for 150 psig working pressure; in accordance with ANSI/ASME 

SEC. 8. 

C. Provide carbon rupture disc (R-123) or reseating type pressure relief valve (R-134a) on 

shell in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15. 

D. Provide baffles to ensure even distribution of incoming gas and to concentrate noncondensable 

gases. 

E. Construction and materials shall conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 8. 

F. Fouling factor for selection shall be 0.00025. 

G. Water box shall be of the marine type, hinged on one end, include grooved piping 

connections with beveled ends for connection of condenser water piping, and include 

drain and vent connections. Water box shall allow for access, cleaning and maintenance 

of the condenser tubes without removal of piping or rigging for the condenser end-bells. 

Water boxes shall be hinged. 

2.6 PURGE SYSTEM 

A. For R-123 machines, compressor type purge system that operates independently of the 

unit and can be operated while the machine circulation water pumps are shutdown. No 

external water cooling source is to be required (Trane Earthwise). 





B. Any excess purge requirement will enable a fault indication light at the purge and a 

contact closure shall be provided for remote annunciation. 

C. The purge unit indication shall include: 

1. Lights indicating condenser running, fault indication and service operation. 

2. Elapsed time meter (monitor amount of leak rate). 

D. At standard operating conditions and with a condensing refrigerant temperature> 80 

degrees F, the purge shall be rated for no more than 0.7 lb. of non-condensibles per 1 lb 

of refrigerant. 

2.7 CONTROLS 

A. The chiller shall be controlled by a unit mounted, stand-alone, microprocessor based 

Direct Digital Control (DDC) system. A dedicated chiller microprocessor control panel is 

to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. 

1. Enclosure shall be unit mounted NEMA 250 Type 1 using wire duct suitable for 

unconditioned equipment room operation, 40 – 110 degrees F, 20 – 90 percent 

relative humidity. Zip tie type mountings are not acceptable. 

2. A color, touch sensitive liquid crystal display (LCD) shall be unit mounted and a 

minimum of 10.4" diagonal. The display shall be fully adjustable in height and 

viewing angle. Animated graphical representations of chiller subsystem 

operation shall be used to enhance the user interface. 

3. Display shall consist of a menu driven interface with easy touch screen 

navigation to organized subsystem reports for compressor, evaporator, 

condenser, purge and motor information as well as associated diagnostics. The 

controller shall display all active diagnostics and a minimum of 20 historical 

diagnostics. 

4. The controller shall have the ability to display all primary sub-system operational 

parameters on dedicated trending graphs. The operator must be able to create 

up to 6 additional custom trend graphs, choosing up to 10 unique parameters for 

each graph to trend log data parameters simultaneously over an adjustable 

period and frequency polling. 

5. The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring 

of chiller modules, sensors, actuators, relays and switches. The chiller control 

panel shall include controls to safely and efficiently operate the chiller. 

B. Provide the following minimum safety controls arranged so that operating any one will 

shut down machine and require manual reset: 

1. High refrigerant (condenser) pressure. 

2. Low refrigerant (evaporator) temperature. 

3. Low refrigerant (evaporator) pressure. 

4. High bearing temperature. 

5. Motor winding temperature. 

6. Motor overload. 

7. Low chilled water temperature. 

8. Low oil pressure (differential pressure switch). 




9. Phase imbalance 


C. Provide the following safety controls arranged so that operating any one will shut down 

machine and automatically reset: 

1. Chilled water differential pressure switch. 

2. Condenser water differential pressure switch. 

3. Flow switches shall be differential pressure type (paddle type will not be 

approved). Selected and provided by the chiller manufacturer. 

4. Short cycling. 

D. Provide the following minimum LCD display data. 

1. Entering/leaving evaporator water temperature. 

2. Entering/leaving condenser water temperature. 

3. Compressor motor winding temperature. 

4. Saturated evaporator and condenser water temperatures. 

5. Evaporator and condenser pressures. 

6. Oil temperature/pressure. 

7. Compressor motor starts and run hours. 

8. Compressor motor current, by phase. 

9. Compressor motor percent running load amps. 

10. Chilled water setpoint temperature. 

11. Purge operating mode (if purge unit installed). 

12. Purge operating unit parameters. 

13. Electrical current limit setpoint. 

14. Operating mode. 

15. Compressor motor voltage, by phase, KW. 

16. Other parameters as standard with the manufacturer. 

E. Provide the following operating controls: 

1. Solid state, chilled water temperature controller which controls electronic guide 

vane operator within throttling range setting of 0.8 degrees F and features 

adjustable load rate. Where not integral to the machine locate temperature 

sensor in leaving chilled water. 

2. Adjustable thirty minute off timer prevents compressor from short cycling. 

3. Demand limit device to manually set maximum current infinitely between 40 

percent and 100 percent of full load amperes. 

4. Remote chilled water supply temperature setpoint. 

F. Provide self-diagnostic digital display module with microprocessor to indicate faults. 

2.8 STARTER (PRE-PURCHASED BY OWNER) 

A. Starters will be of the reduced voltage solid state type and be remote mounted in 

switchgear which is being pre-purchased by the Owner through the CM in conjunction 

with the chiller. The chiller manufacturer shall obtain a copy of the switchgear 

specification (section 16349) and coordinate with the requirements contained therein. 

The chiller manufacturer shall carefully examine the switchgear specification and clearly 

state in their proposal any limitations, restrictions and/or requirements needed for full 

coordination and successful operation with the specified switchgear. 

B. Provide a suitably sized junction box for connection of medium voltage (4160 volt) 

conductors. Include voltage sensors and current transmitters for control panel monitoring 





of voltages and machine loading. Sensors/transmitters shall be factory wired to the chiller 

control panel. 

C. Prior to release of the chiller and as part of the shop drawing review process the chiller 

manufacturer shall obtain a copy of the switchgear submittal from the CM to verify the 

chiller starter being furnished is fully compatible with the chiller. The chiller manufacturer 

is responsible for examining the submittal and noting any incompatibility or option needed 

for complete compatibility and successful sustained operation of the chiller and starter 

combination. 

D. Should chiller/starter compatibility issues arise after installation the chiller manufacturer 

shall work diligently and in coordination with the switchgear manufacturer to determine 

the cause and develop a solution. Where the problem is due to incompatibility or a lack of 

coordination between the manufacturers the chiller manufacture shall correct at no 

additional cost to the owner any issue arising from a lack of coordination between the 

chiller and starter related to the review. 

2.9 PERFORMANCE 

A. See scheduled data. 

B. Chiller performance shall meet or exceed scheduled values. 

2.10 CONTROL INTERFACE 

A. The chiller manufacturer shall provide an interface to the control system provided under 

Section 15900. 

B. The interface shall allow for transfer/monitoring of the control panel information by the 

control system. 

C. Interface to the control system shall BacNET MS/TP and include bi-directional 

(read/write) communication capabilities. Where native BacNET is unavailable as a factory 

option a suitable gateway shall be furnished which provides for full two-way 

communication. Where a gateway is needed it shall be located in an enclosure with the 

chiller manufacturer responsible for providing power and programming support to 

interface to the EMS system. 

D. Programming of the control system shall be provided under Section 15900. Any 

configuration of the chiller BacNET interface shall be provided under this section. This 

section shall provide information necessary for data acquisition as required for execution 

of Section 15900 work. 

2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION 

A. Chiller shall be compatible for mounting on neoprene pad type isolators to include 

soleplates, jacking screws and leveling provisions. 

B. Neoprene pad isolators shall be selected and provided by the chiller manufacturer to 

properly support the machines weight. Isolators shall be bonded to a steel plate and 

provide deflections of not less than 0.35 inches when loaded. 








B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Include for connection of oil pump to separately 

fused circuit. 

C. Align chiller on concrete foundations, sole plates, and sub-bases. Level, grout, and bolt in 

place. 

D. Install units on vibration isolation pads. 

E. Provide connections to evaporator chilled water and condenser. See chilled water piping 

schematic for gauges, thermometers, and related accessories. Provide auxiliary purge piping 

where required. 

F. Evaporator and cold surfaces shall be field insulated. 

G. Arrange piping for easy dismantling and clearance to permit tube cleaning and removal. 

H. Provide piping from chiller rupture disc or relief valve to outdoors. Size shall be as 

recommended by manufacturer. Provide removable flanged flexible connection at disc/valve. 

I. Provide local interlock wiring for flow switches condenser and evaporator pumps. 

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 

A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division One. 

B. Provide services of factory trained representative to leak test, refrigerant pressure test, 

evacuate, dehydrate, charge, start-up, calibrate controls, and instruct Owner on operation 

and maintenance to Owner's satisfaction. 

C. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil. 

3.3 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division One and Section 15000. 






SECTION 15712 – MECHANICAL INDUCED DRAFT COOLING 

TOWER 


1.1 SCOPE 



B. Refer to Section 15000, paragraph entitled, “Anchoring of Equipment” for additional 

requirements regarding the construction and mounting of equipment installed outdoors. 

C. The cooling tower is being pre-purchased by the Owner for installation by the Contractor. 

The Contractor shall carefully review the requirements of this section and shop drawings 

provided by the tower manufacturer, for coordination of the installation. 

D. The Contractor shall obtain on-site services of the tower manufacturer to oversee installation 

and start-up of the equipment. 


A. Cooling tower. 

B. Controls. 

C. Ladder and handrails. 


A. ASME PTC-23 - Atmospheric Water-Cooling Equipment. 

B. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI) ATC-105 - Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers. 

C. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI) - Certification Standard STD-201. 

D. NFPA 214 - Standard on Water Cooling Towers. 



B. Submit shop drawings indicating suggested structural concrete supports including 

dimensions, sizes, and locations for mounting bolt holes using manufacturer's 







D. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, dimensions, weights and point loadings, 

accessories, required clearances, electrical requirements and wiring diagrams, and location 

and size of field connections. Submit schematic indicating capacity controls. 

E. Certify performance, based on CTI ATC-105 or CTI STD-201, and submit performance curve 

plotting leaving water temperature against wet bulb temperature. 

F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division One. 


A. Submit operation data. 

B. Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts lists, controls, and accessories. 

C. Submit maintenance data. 


A. Deliver products to site under provisions of specifications. 

B. Factory assemble entire unit. For shipping, disassemble into as large as practical 

sub-assemblies so that minimum amount of field work is required for re-assembly. 

C. Store and protect products under provisions of Specifications. 

D. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting 

units. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Provide five (5) year warranty. 

B. Warranty: Include coverage for cooling tower package, labor and materials, commencing 

from the date of Owner’s beneficial use. 

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Provide one set of spare parts including matched fan belts, replacement washer for the water 

make-up valve assemble, spare strainer, sealer and miscellaneous fasteners. 



A. Marley NC Series – Basis of Design 

B. BAC 3000 Series. 




2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS 


A. Provide units for outdoor use, factory assembled, stainless steel, sectional, crossflow, 

vertical discharge, side intake, mechanical induced draft type, with sump, fan, surface 

sections, drift eliminators, and motor. 

B. Provide CTI certified cooling towers which meet or exceed the specified performance in the 

cooling tower schedule. In addition to CTI certification, the manufacturer shall guarantee 

the cooling tower will meet or exceed the specified operating parameters for the on-site 

conditions. 

C. Cooling tower structure shall be Florida Building Code compliant, designed by licensed 

professional engineers in accordance with ASCE-7 for a wind load of not less than 140 

miles per hour or higher, and a load of not less than 80 pounds per square foot as required 

under the Florida Building Code 2007. The manufacturer shall submit certification that the 

tower has been designed in accordance with the provisions of the Florida Building Code. 

D. Tower design and construction shall comply with Factory Mutual requirements, and be 

listed in the FM Approval Guide, latest edition. 

2.3 COMPONENTS 

A. Framework and Casing: 300 Series (304 , 316 or as approved by the engineer) stainless 

steel framework with stainless steel panels. The casing and fan deck, hot water basin 

covers, maintenance platforms and similar components shall be designed for a 60 psf live 

load or a 200 pound concentrated load. 

B. Louvers: Formed as part of the fill sheet or formed stainless steel, sight tight spaced to 

minimize air resistance and splash out, FM approved. 

C. Fan: Multi blade, aluminum fixed pitch, individually adjustable, axial type, bearings with 

ANSI/AFBMA 9 or ANSI/AFBMA 11 L-10 life expectancy of 40,000 hours, with extended 

copper grease fittings. 

D. Motors: Each cell shall have a single, premium efficiency, totally enclosed air over (TEAO) 

type motor (in air stream) or TEFC (outside of air stream), 1.15 service factor, with special 

moisture protection, mounted on welded stainless steel frame in fan deck. Motor shall be 

designed specifically for cooling tower service. Fan motor shall be inverter duty type 

suitable for use with a variable frequency drive, designed in accordance with NEMA 

Standard MGI, Section IV, Part 31. Brake horsepower requirement shall not exceed the 

motors horsepower rating; motors shall be selected so as not to operate within the service 

factor. 

E. Drives shall be either belt or gear driven type. 

1. Belt Drive: Designed for minimum 150 percent motor nameplate power. By two 

(2) one-piece multi-groove V-type neoprene/polyester belts, and non-corrosive fan 

sheave/pulley. 

2. Gear drives shall be of the right angle type, industrial duty, oil lubricated, geared 

speed reducer which requires no oil change for the first five (5) years of operation. 

All gearbox bearings shall be rated for a L10 service life of 100,000 hours or more, 

with a AGMA quality class of 9 or better. The gearbox shall be suitable for 





sustained operation at variable speeds and allow for modulation between 100 to 10 

percent of the rated fan speed. 

F. Fan Cylinder: One piece, welded stainless steel fan assembly, as standard with the 

manufacturer. 

G. Fan Guard: One piece, conical, non-sagging, heavy-duty galvanized steel rod and wire 

guard. 

H. Access: Large (minimum 30” x 33”) stainless steel access doors at end of tower to allow 

access to eliminators and air plenum, with external stainless or aluminum access door 

platform, galvanized steel handrails, knee rail and toe board. Provide with minimum 36” 

wide internal stainless steel access walkway/platform with stainless steel handrails, knee 

rail and toe board for access between cells one to four, a potion of this walkway shall be 

exterior mounted between cells 3 and 4, located above the overflow level. Each cell shall 

have a stainless steel or aluminum internal ladder from the plenum walkway to an elevated 

fiberglass platform with an OSHA compliant stainless steel handrail and stainless steel 

support system for care and maintenance of the tower interior equipment. 

I. Safety: OSHA compliant, galvanized steel safety perimeter railings complete with knee rail 

and toe board, safety cage and ladder from roof surface to fan deck provided at each tower 

end (cell one and four) with self-closing safety gate at the top of the ladder and upper 

walkway between cells three (3) and four (4). Ladder shall serve the top deck, as well as 

the intermediate level access door platform. Hand rails shall be designed to withstand a 

200 pound concentrated load in any direction. 

J. Distribution Basin: Dual open, gravity type distribution basin utilizing weirs and 

interchangeable plastic metering orifices, with flow control valves. Provide with bolted 

distribution covers. Construction shall be stainless steel. Provide with dam or similar 

provisions to allow for variable flow operation at one-half of the scheduled condenser water 

flow rate. At reduced water flow rates the entire fill surface area shall remain wetted. 

K. Fill: Vertical sheets of minimum 15 mil thick polyvinyl chloride plastic hung from stainless 

steel supports, elevated above the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning. Fill shall be 

capable of withstanding 125-degree F hot water temperature. 

L. Drift Eliminators: Two or three pass polyvinyl chloride plastic, or FRP to limit drift loss to 

0.005 percent of total water circulated. 

M. Collection Basin: Self cleaning stainless steel with depressed sump box, stainless steel 

mesh strainer, bottom outlet. Existing concrete basins are being re-used. Where the tower 

manufacturer does not require the use of a basin, they shall include costs associated with 

modification of the existing concrete basins to accept the tower, and provide documentation 

the tower is Building Code compliant without the use of a basin. 

N. Float Valves: Provide replacement brass or bronze make-up valve with plastic or copper 

float (electronic not acceptable), two (2) per cell. 

O. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be stainless steel to prevent dissimilar metal 

reaction. 

P. Finish: Steel components shall be stainless steel, except as otherwise noted. 





Q. Separate, independent tower cells shall be provided, a common multi-cell tower 

arrangement is not acceptable. 

R. Dual top inlet connections with flow balancing valves. Flow control valves shall be of the 

right angle configuration, cast iron body, disc type, stainless steel operating stem with 

locking handle or at the contractors option a plug type valve may be used. Plug valves shall 

be non-lubricated, 175 psi working pressure, ductile iron flanged body, eccentric plug 

constructed of synthetic coated ductile iron, stainless steel bearings, and hand wheel with 

worm gear manual actuator. 

S. Provide with extended lubrication lines. 

2.4 ACCESSORIES 

A. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD): Provide variable frequency drives for each tower cell fan 

refer to specification section 16485 entitled “Variable Frequency Drives”. Drives will be 

remote mounted, and therefore shall not be affixed to the tower structure. 

B. Vibration Limit Switch: Provide a manual reset for each cell with adjustable sensitivity 

vibration limit switch in a NEMA 4 enclosure, to interrupt the VFD control circuit. 

2.5 CAPACITY 

A. Tower performance shall meet or exceed values scheduled on the drawings. 

B. Performance shall be certified by the cooling tower institute in accordance with CTI 

Standard STD-201. 

C. Where doubt exists as to the as-installed cooling tower performance within the first year of 

operation, at the Owners expense, a thermal performance test may be conducted by a 

qualified (NEBB or AABC) third party, in accordance with CTI/ASME standards for field 

testing. Should the tower fail to perform within the test tolerances, the cooling tower 

manufacturer shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of the test and make corrections as 

are appropriate and agreeable to the Owner, to address and/or compensate for the tower 

performance deficiency. 



A. Install towers per piping diagram on drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions. 

B. Install tower on structure as instructed by manufacturer. 

C. Install within tower compound. Elevate tower to maintain maximum positive suction head on 

condenser water pump. 

D. Install tower on neoprene pad type vibration isolators, minimum ¾-inch thickness equal to 

Mason type. 





E. Connect condenser water piping with flanged connections to tower. Pitch condenser water 

supply to tower and condenser water suction away from tower. 

F. Provide hose bib on make-up water supply to tower. Connect make-up water piping with 

brass flanged or union connections to tower. 

G. Provide full flow make-up water bypass with valve to fill sump. Connect valved drain and 

overflow and route to sanitary or storm as indicated. 

H. Provide equalizer line between cells and a manual butterfly valve for servicing/isolation. 

I. Provide connections to water treatment system. 

J. Wire vibration switch into fan VFD circuit under Division 16 to shut down upon excessive 

vibration. 

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Field testing will be performed under provisions of Division One. 

B. Test under actual operating conditions and verify specified performance. 

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 

A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Division One. 

B. Inspect tower after installation and submit report prior to start-up, verifying installation is in 

accordance with specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. If tower fails to meet 

field performance, then it shall be up-sized at no cost to Owner. 

C. Supervise rigging, hoisting, and installation. 

D. Start-up and instruction of Owners operating personnel to Owner's satisfaction. 

E. Cooling tower shall not operate until water treatment has been initiated. 

F. Adjust balancing valves for even distribution of water to hot water basins, and from basins 

across fill. 






SECTION 15900 – CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 



A. Head End Operators Workstation (OWS) Computer and Accessories 

B. Microprocessor Based Building Controller 

C. Microprocessor Based Controllers 

D. Software, Programming, and Graphics for new OWS 

E. Control Equipment, network devices, power, signal and communication wiring systems 

F. Sequence of operation 

G. Demolition of existing control devices, wiring, conduit, tubing 

H. Update of existing control system graphics, database and programming. 

I. Providing a multiplexed interface to new and existing chillers and VFD’s. 

1.2 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION 

A. Hydronic Piping: 

1. Control valves, water flow switches, temperature sensor wells, gauge taps, flow 

meters and isolation valves. 

2. Installation performed under other Division 15 sections. 

1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED UNDER OTHER DIVISIONS 

A. Equipment Wiring Systems: 

1. Installation and connection of power wiring shall be performed under Division 16. 

Power wiring shall be defined as follows: 

a. Wiring of power feeds through all disconnect starters to electric motors. 

b. 120 VAC Power feeds to all BAS building and CAC control panels. 

c. Wiring of any remote start/stop switches and manual or automatic motor speed 

control devices not furnished by the BAS/ATC Contractor. 

B. Existing Chiller Interface: 

1. Under Section 15000, a Johnson Controls “E-Link” will be provided for installation 

and integration in this section. 




1.4 AGENCY LISTINGS 

A. UL 916 PAZX Energy Management Systems 

B. FCC-Part 15 Subparagraph J. Class A, Emissions requirements. 

1.5 GENERAL PROVISIONS 


A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions and supplementary 

General Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 


A. Section 15000 - General Provisions. 

B. Section 15515 – Hydronic Specialties. 

C. Section 15684 – Centrifugal Water Chillers. 

D. Section 15712– Cooling Towers 

E. Section 15995 – Commissioning. 

F. Section 16010 – Basic Electrical Requirements. 

G. Section 16050 – Basic Materials and Methods. 

1.7 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 

1.8 SCOPE 

A. The BAS/ATC systems as specified herein shall be provided in their entirety by the BAS/ATC 

Contractor. The BAS/ATC Contractor shall base his Bid on the system as specified, general 

control notes, the sequence of operations and the points list. These items shall be 

considered complementary in that the work required by any one shall apply to all. In the case 

of a conflict, the more stringent requirement as solely determined by the Engineer shall 

prevail. 

B. In general, the proposal shall be based on a completely electronic/DDC system including 

valve actuators. 

C. The documents (specifications and drawings) set forth the basic requirements to be met to 

provide a completely functional system fully integrated with the equipment and systems 

furnished under this contract. The documents do not identify all possible elements, products 

or work elements which may be required to provide a complete system but shall be included 

in the contractor’s base bid and provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 

A. The BAS/ATC systems shall be supplied and installed completely under the BAS/ATC 

Contract. Control components shall be mounted and wired by the BAS/ATC Contractor 

except as noted in 1.3. A 120 volt power source (1 box) will be provided in each equipment 

room or floor under Division 16. Extension of power to control panels, actuators and similar 

devices requiring same shall be performed under this section of the specifications. Power 

supplies and control transformers shall be provided under this section of the specifications. 





Where mechanical equipment is connected to emergency power systems; the controls for 

this equipment shall also be connected to emergency power circuits. 

B. The engineering, installation, calibration, software programming and checkout necessary for 

complete and fully operational BAS/ATC systems, as specified hereafter, shall be provided by 

the BAS/ATC Contractor. The contractor shall provide full user training and demonstration of 

the system in all modes of operation. 

C. The BAS/ATC systems shall be designed, installed, commissioned and serviced by 

manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-place 

support facility within 50 miles of the site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and 

necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installing contractors are 

not acceptable. 

D. The system shall be web enabled to provide for remote monitoring over the internet worldwide 

web. All necessary software and integration shall be provided. 

E. Perform all required commissioning sub tasks as specified in the Commissioning 

specifications noted in Division 1, General Requirements, and 15995, “Commissioning”. The 

Contractor shall designate an individual to serve on the commissioning team and shall 

cooperate as required concerning all commissioning related activities, meetings, 

documentation, field tests, etc. The Contractor shall provide all technically qualified 

personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and materials on a continuous basis in order to 

perform their required tasks at the required time period, and provide all required or requested 

assistance by the commissioning provider to complete the commissioning process. The 

Contractor is required per referenced specifications to complete all applicable Pre-Functional 

Test report forms on the systems being commissioned. This may include as well, start-up 

check list forms. 

F. The existing control system is as manufactured by Honeywell. Under this project, the 

Honeywell controls for the chiller plant shall be removed and be replaced with a new system. 

Demolition work includes: 

1. Removal of existing chiller plant control panels wiring, conduit and devices. 

2. Update of the existing Honeywell head-end database, graphics and software 

associated with the demolished equipment. 

G. The new system shall accommodate the ultimate removal of the existing Honeywell system in 

its entirety and expansion to serve all of the existing air-side equipment with no additional 

costs for control system software upgrades, licenses, or similar items. The system shall 

support not less than five (5) remote workstations. 

H. The HVAC system has complex interactions, the full details of which cannot be fully 

determined and are NOT included in the sequences or operation. The Contractor shall 

include adequate time for troubleshooting and revising sequences per the direction issued by 

the Engineer, AT NO ADDITIONAL INCREASE IN THE CONTRACT AMOUNT. Provide 

trend logs as directed by the Engineer for troubleshooting, and revisions to sequences as 

issued in the BASE CONTRACT AMOUNT. 


A. Control components and services shall be provided by one of the following: 

1. Siemens Building Technologies Building Automation Division. 




2. Trane 


A. The following data/information shall be submitted for approval. 

1. Complete sequences of operation and programming. 


2. Control system CAD generated drawings including number and color coded point-topoint 

wiring diagrams and all pertinent data to provide a functional operating system. 

3. Valve schedules showing size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment. 

4. Data sheets for all hardware and software control components. 

5. Thermostat/sensor locations. 

6. Building Management System panel locations. 

7. Graphical Screens 

8. Proposed Alarms, Trend-Logs and Reports 

9. Mounting locations for immersion temperature sensors, pressure sensors and flow 

meters on Contractors piping shop drawings. 

10. Panel layout drawings. 

B. The following shall be submitted prior to Substantial Completion: 

1. Training Manuals 

2. Sensor Calibration Reports 

3. As-Built documents 

4. Operation and Maintenance manuals 

C. At the time of initial submittal of sequences of operation, the Contractor shall arrange and 

attend a meeting to be held at the Engineers office. The purpose of the meeting is to review the 

programming logic to be used to implement the sequence of operation on the drawings. Where the 

Contractor has sequences/programming that accomplishes the intent of the sequence of operation, he is 

encouraged to present them for consideration by the Engineer, who shall have the final say as to the 

sequence/programming to be used. Follow-up meetings shall be held if appropriate. 

PART 2. PART 2 – PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS 


A. Approved Systems 

1. Siemens Building Technologies – APOGEE 




2. Trane – Tracer ES 

B. Approved Installing Contractors 

2.2 GENERAL 

1. Siemens 

2. Trane 


A. The Building Automation System shall include but not be limited to the following components. 

1. The Operator Interface shall consist of software and hardware that allows full user 

monitoring and adjustment of system parameters via simple to use, English language 

menus, with graphical representation of equipment, valves and dampers and room 

temperatures. The system shall share information with other workstations over 

Ethernet TCP/IP. Communication protocol between the local workstations and the 

building level/floor level networks shall be BACNET MS/TP based. 

2. Modular Building Controllers shall manage the Energy and Building Management 

capabilities of the automation system, provide distributed custom programming 

capability for central plant and future AHU control, as well as facilitate remote 

communications and central monitoring. 

3. Custom Application Controllers shall provide distributed, custom-engineered control 

in accordance with the sequences of operation. 

4. Terminal Equipment Controllers shall provide distributed, pre-engineered control, 

specific to the mechanical equipment specified. 

5. The Data Communications capability shall allow data to be shared between the 

various controllers in the architecture. 

6. The system software shall include system software for www-web enabled application 

functions, application software for distributed controllers, graphics, and operator 

interface software. 

7. End devices such as sensors, actuators, dampers, valves, and relays. 

8. Electrical components, wiring and conduit. 

9. Network interface to other equipment including chillers, variable frequency drives, 

and other items as indicated. 

10. The system shall be UL-864-UUKL listed. 

B. The failure of any single component shall not interrupt the control strategies of other 

operational devices. System expansion shall be through the addition of end devices, 

controllers, and other devices described in this specification. 

2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE 

A. A new personal computer interface shall be provided for the new local OWS that will allow the 

building operator to view and acknowledge all alarms, access/edit all system and controller 





database information, view all system displays and reports, and customize all systems as 

described in this specification. 

B. The OWS shall allow for controller programming modifications, controller point database 

addition/deletions/modifications, controller level time of day equipment scheduling 

additions/deletions/modifications, controller point alarming criteria 

additions/deletions/modifications, automatic controller database backups, and automation 

controller database downloads on memory failures. 

C. All of the above functions shall be performed from a single software program consisting of 

simple to use, mouse driven menus, with the provision of graphical representations of all new 

and existing mechanical equipment. 

D. The new personal computer head-end shall have the following minimum features: 

1. 2.6 gigahertz 64 bit Intel processor, 8MB cache. 

2. 24-inch flat screen LCD color monitor. 

3. 750 Gigabyte hard drive. 

4. Graphics card; N Vidia GEForce GTS 240. 

5. Sound card and stereo speakers. 

6. 10/100 MHz Ethernet Network card. 

7. Dual drives 16x DVD-ROM + 16x DVD + RW. 

8. Norton or McAfee security software – 24 months. 

9. Enhanced wireless keyboard. 

10. Wireless Laser Mouse. 

11. USB and parallel ports. 

12. Windows 7, 2003 or XP Professional operating system as compatible with the BAS 

operating system requirements. 

13. MS Works Plus 2008 Suite software. 

14. HP Color Laser printer minimum. 

15. 500 VA UPS power supply. 

16. 8 GB RAM. 

17. 2-year service plan. 

18. Where higher performance components/software is required it shall be provided at no 

additional cost. 




2.4 MODULAR BUILDING CONTROLLERS 


A. Where required for the system architecture, stand-alone, microprocessor based Modular 

Building Controllers shall be utilized to manage the global strategies described in Application 

software section. 

B. The operating system of the Modular Building Controller shall manage the input and output 

communications signals to allow distributed terminal equipment controllers to share real and 

virtual point information and allow central monitoring and alarms. 

C. Data shall automatically be shared between Modular Building Controllers when they are 

networked together. 

D. The database and custom programming routines of remote Modular Building Controllers shall 

be editable from a single operator station. 

E. The controller shall continually check the status of all processor and memory circuits. If a 

failure is detected, the controller shall: 

1. Assume a predetermined failure mode. 

2. Emit an alarm. 

3. Display card failure identification. 

2.5 CUSTOM APPLICATION EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER 

A. Custom application equipment controllers shall be stand-alone, microprocessor based, fully 

programmable, fully configurable controllers, providing custom programming capability and 

provide control for non-standard sequences. 

B. Controllers shall have sufficient memory to support its operating system, database and 

programming requirements. Programming shall be memory resident and either retained in 

permanent memory or be provided with not less than 72 hours of battery backup. 

C. Devices shall incorporate a port for connection of a portable operator interface to allow for 

programming, editing, and similar functions. 

D. The central plant system shall have a minimum of two (2) CAC’s with the points split across 

two (2) controllers to increase reliability. 

2.6 APPLICATION SPECIFIC TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS 

A. Terminal Equipment Controllers shall be stand-alone, microprocessor based Direct Digital 

Controllers with sufficient memory to handle its operating system, database and programming 

requirements. 

B. The Terminal Equipment Controller shall be clearly labeled as to controller type, where it is to 

be installed, and software address (if applicable). The controller shall be fully tested upon 

installation to ensure that it is properly matched to the equipment it is controlling. 

C. The controller shall communicate with other devices on the communication network and be 

fully integrated with the other system components. 




2.7 CONTROLLER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions. 


1. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient shall be mounted within waterproof 

enclosures, and shall be rated for operation at -40 deg. F to 155 deg. F. 

2. Controllers used in conditioned ambient shall be mounted in dust-proof enclosures, 

and shall be rated for operation at 32F to 120F. 

3. Controllers used outdoors and control wiring (sensor, power and communication) 

between outdoor and indoor devices shall be provided with lightning surge protection. 

B. Input/output points shall be as indicated on the drawings and as required to satisfy the 

sequence of operation. 

2.8 INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE 

A. Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into the system through Modular Building, Custom 

Application or Terminal Equipment Controllers. Any critical points requiring immediate 

reaction shall be tied directly into the controller hosting the control software algorithm for the 

critical function. 

B. Binary inputs shall allow the monitoring of on/off signals from remote devices. The binary 

inputs shall provide a wetting current of 12mA at 12VDC to be compatible with commonly 

available control devices. All status points shown on the point list shall be contact closure, 

end switch, positive proof differential pressure or current sensing binary switches. 

C. Analog inputs shall allow the monitoring of low voltage, current, or resistance signals and 

shall have a minimum resolution of 0.1% of the sensing range. Analog inputs shall be 

compatible with, and field configurable to commonly available sensing devices, 4-20mA. 

D. Binary outputs shall provide a continuous low voltage signal for on/off control of remote 

devices. Where specified in the sequence of operations or indicated on the points list, binary 

outputs shall have 3-position (on/off/auto) override switches, status lights, and shall be 

selectable for either normally open or normally closed position. 

E. Analog outputs shall provide a modulating signal for the control of end devices. Outputs shall 

provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 milliampere signal as required to provide proper 

control of the output device. 

1. Each Analog control point shall utilize a separate output. Sequencing of several 

actuators (i.e., heating and cooling, or economizer and cooling) from one analog 

output shall not be acceptable. 

2. Tri-State output is not acceptable, except where specifically noted in submittals as a 

deviation, and approved by the Engineer. 

2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES 

A. CONTROL VALVES 

1. Butterfly valves shall be of the replaceable resilient seat type, polyester coated full 

lug type ductile iron body, stainless steel stem, aluminum bronze disk, extended 

neck, bi-directional rated for not less than 150 psi. Valves shall be Bray Series 31. 




B. VALVE ACTUATORS 


1. Actuators for butterfly valve shall be of the electric 120 volt industrial type in a UL 

listed waterproof NEMA type 4X die cast aluminum housing with the following 

features: 

a. Single phase split-capacitor motor, class F insulation or better, with built-in UL 

approved automatic reset thermal overloads with a 25-percent duty cycle for on/off 

(2-position) operation. 

b. Self locking worm drive gear coupled to a multi-staged spur gear train, permanently 

lubricated, sized to withstand locked rotor conditions. 

c. Pre-wired actuator switches landed to a terminal block. 

d. UL listed SPDT travel switches rated for a 10A at 126 VAC, 0.5A at 125V DC with 

infinitely adjustable cams. 

e. Polyester coated waterproof enclosure, captive cover bolts with two (2) threaded 

conduit entries and integral visible clear polycarbonate display labeled and color 

coded to indicate valve position. 

f. Stainless steel manual mechanical travel stops adjustable from the exterior of the 

housing. 

g. Aluminum polyester coated manual handwheel for manual positioning without 

electric power, with an automatic power cutout switch when the manual handwheel 

is engaged. 

h. Torque limiting system that operates throughout the actuator travel and 

automatically disconnects power if a high torque condition is sensed. 

i. Self-regulating heater to control condensate build-up. 

j. Actuators shall mate directly to the valve shaft and directly bolt onto the top of the 

valve without the use of interposing linkages. 

k. Actuators shall be Bray Type R4. 

C. TEMPERATURE SENSORS 

1. Temperature sensors shall be Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) or Thermistor 

type. RTD transmitters shall be compatible with the sensor furnished. 

2. Immersion sensors shall be thermistor or RTD type and provided with a separable 

stainless steel or brass well. Compatible transmitters shall be provided for RTD 

sensors. Wells shall be filled with a thermal conducting paste, and installed so as not 

to obstruct flow; provide oversized fittings where required. Where not otherwise 

noted, accuracy shall be +/- 0.36 degrees F or better. Where indicated, provide 

matched sensor pairs with an accuracy of +/- 0.10 degrees F, NIST certified at two 

(2) points. Basis of design is Kele Model ST-W. 

D. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES 

1. Differential Pressure Switches shall be furnished as indicated for status purposes in 

air and water applications. Provide single pole double throw switch with fully 

adjustable differential pressure settings. 




E. CURRENT SWITCH 


1. Solid-state UL listed current switch with self induced power, 600 volt isolation rating, 

split core type. 

2. Adjustable trip setpoint from 1 to 135 amps plus or minus 1 percent. 

3. Suitable for use between 0-95 percent relative humidity, 5 to 185 degrees F. 

4. LED power and trip status indication and integral mounting bracket. 

F. FLOW METERS 

1. Electro-magnetic pick-up retractable insertion type, suitable for use with chilled and 

hot water systems, wetted parts 316 stainless steel, hot tap insertion tool. 

2. Performance +/- 1.0 percent of full scale 80 to 1 turndown ratio. 

3. 4-20mA, 0-10 VDC or pulse output as compatible with the control system. 

4. Integral LCD display of flow rate. 

5. Provide Onicon Model F-3500 with D-1200 display. 

G. LIGHTNING ARRESTORS 

1. Gas tube type designed to protect against high voltage transients. Device shall have 

an impulse breakdown of 300-750 volts, insulation resistance greater than 100 M 

Ohms, and heavy duty impulse life of 80 percent survival to 400 surges of 500 amps. 

H. PILOT LIGHTS 

1. UL listed NEMA Type 4 or 13 small pilot light, full voltage type with red lens and push 

to test circuitry. 

I. SELECTOR SWTICHES 

J. RELAYS 

1. UL listed two or three-position as appropriate for the intended use, with on-off or 

hand-off auto legend plate, maintained position type with quick connect terminals. 

1. UL listed mount type, single or double pole contacts and coil voltage as required by 

circuitry, continuous duty rating, contact amperage rating to suit application with 10 

amp minimum. Provide with encapsulating polycarbonate dust cover, and cover plug 

in terminations with matching socket. 

K. TERMINAL BLOCKS 

1. Terminal blocks shall be UL listed and shall be of the direct-mount multiple type, with 

fully encased polyamide construction that prohibits contact with the conductor. 

Conductors shall insert from the side and be held in-place by a screw accessible from 

the front, but recessed into the block. Barrier type strips are not acceptable. 

Mounting shall be either direct or rail type. 




L. ENCLOSURES 


1. Enclosures shall be UL listed, NEMA 1 cabinet, fabricated or not less than 16-gauge 

steel with 16-gauge perforated sub-panels for component mounting, and have 

removable hinged doors. Enclosures shall be sized to house the controllers, power 

supplies, transformers, relays, wire duct, din rails, and miscellaneous equipment 

required to support the application. Enclosure power supply shall provide at least 

one (1) 40 VA and one (1) 100 VA transformer with individual on/off switches and 

circuit breakers, and two (2) 120 VAC outlets. Enclosures and power supplies shall 

be UL listed, Class II. Provide one (1) enclosure per AHU CAC, and at other 

locations as required. Door shall include a keyed locking mechanism, and be 

furnished with not less than two (2) keys per panel, and all panels shall be keyed 

alike. Enclosures shall include suitable knockouts for conduit penetrations and have 

an enamel finish. 

M. BREAK-GLASS STATION 

1. Industrial duty NEMA 4X enclosure. 

2. Integral hammer chained to enclosure. 

3. Two (2) SPST normal open; two (2) SPST normally closed contacts. 

4. Intect Controls Model I-EBG1-2. 

N. WET-BULB TRANSMITTERS 

1. Combination outdoor humidity/dry bulb temperature sensor/transmitter designed 

specifically for monitoring wet-bulb conditions. Unit shall use a capacitive RH sensor 

and RTD temperature sensor with a wet-bulb accuracy of +/- 3-degrees F between 0 

to 100 degrees F and provide dual 4-20 mA signals. Unit shall be provided in a 

shielded enclosure suitable for outside mounting. Basis of design is General Eastern 

WB3A-0. 

O. CURRENT TRANSDUCER 

1. Solid-state UL recognized current sensor/transducer with self induced power, 600 

volt isolation rating, AC amperage to DC current type. 

2. 4-20 mA output for loads up to 20 amps, accuracy plus or minus 1.0 percent; for 

larger loads, use in conjunction with an external current transformer. 

3. Suitable for use between 0-95 percent relative humidity, -22 to 140 degrees F. 

4. Basis of Design – Kele Model 4CMA. 

P. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE - FLUIDS 

1. High output, low differential pressure capacitance type sensor for wet-to-wet 

differential pressure measurement. 

2. Not to exceed accuracy of +/- 0.25 percent full scale, non-linearity of +/- 0.20 percent 

full scale, hysteresis of 0.10 percent full scale, non-repeatability of 0.05 percent full 

scale. 





3. Electronic circuitry to linearize output versus pressure and compensate for thermal 

effects. 

4. Stainless steel/aluminum case, wetted parts compatible with 17-4 PH stainless steel, 

300 Series stainless steel, viton and silicon o-rings. 

5. 3-way isolation valve manifold. 

6. Range as suitable for intended use. 

7. 4-20 mA or 0 – 10 VDC output. 

8. NIST calibration certificate. 

9. Basis of design SETRA Model 230, or equal by Rosemount. 

2.10 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 

A. Furnish the following applications software for building and energy management. All software 

applications shall reside and run in the system controllers. Editing of applications shall occur 

at the operator workstation. 

1. SCHEDULING 

a. The scheduling program shall have a minimum of 32 named master schedules. 

Each master schedule shall have a minimum of eight day schedules (seven plus 

holiday). 

b. To these master schedules, a minimum of 24 system loads (HVAC equipment etc.) 

or groups of loads can be assigned. 

c. The master schedule shall be individually editable for each day of the week and 

holiday. 

d. On any day, a minimum of six time of day events may be edited including: 

1) equipment start/stop 

2) occupied/unoccupied 

2.11 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE 

A. The following Building Management capabilities shall be furnished as part of the Building 

Automation System: 

1. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL 

a. The Direct Digital Control program shall allow modulating control of remote devices 

based on sensed data. 

b. Standard control strategies shall include proportional, proportional plus integral, 

and proportional plus integral plus derivative control. 

c. Control routines shall be flexible enough to allow operator to set parameters and 

make adjustments. 

d. Direct Digital Control loop setup and modification shall be done through preformatted 

edit screens, with parameters listed in English language. 





e. Program shall include a dynamic graphic display printout routine to indicate the 

status and real-time performance of the control loop. As an alternative, auto tuning 

loops or another method of testing and proving control loop response may be 

provided. 

2. CUSTOM PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE 

a. A custom control language capability shall be provided to allow the operator to 

create real time, equation based, custom control routines. 

b. All binary and analog points in the Building Automation System shall be available 

as inputs to the custom routines. 

c. Equation operations shall include math functions such as addition, subtraction, 

multiplication, division, square root, minimum, maximum, and average. Logical 

functions such as greater than, less than, equal to, not equal to, less than or equal 

to, greater than or equal to, variable timing and delays shall also be allowed. 

3. TOTALIZING 

a. A totalizing program shall be provided to enable the building operator to monitor 

and totalize any user-defined flow such as water flow, electricity, natural gas, 

steam and air. 

4. RUN TIME MAINTENANCE 

a. The system shall monitor equipment status and generate maintenance messages 

based upon user designated run time, starts and/or calendar date limits. 

b. A minimum of 32 separate devices shall be monitored under this function. 

5. REPORTS AND LOGS 

a. The system shall include the capability to store, review and print reports and logs. 

b. Trend Logs - A custom report generator allowing the user to trend and store at 

least 24 sample points based on a user-defined schedule. 

c. Event Logs - The system shall track system events including alarms, logons and 

diagnostics. 

d. Input/Output Status Reports - This reporting tool shall allow the operator to review 

the status of all system points. 

e. HVAC Equipment Reports - Reports shall be provided which indicate the HVAC 

equipment status as well as the status of all input/output points of connected 

HVAC equipment. 

f. Custom Report Capability - The building operator shall be provided with a simple 

method of creating custom reports. 

g. Paging – The system shall pass alarms and/or equipment status as selected at the 

OWS via alphanumeric beeper type paging systems. 

h. E-Mail – The system shall pass alarms and/or equipment status as selected at the 

OWS via internet e-mail to web enabled devices with addresses as specified at the 

OWS. 

i. Web Enabled – The system shall allow access to the graphics and OWS functions 

via remote web enabled access according to established security levels as set in 




2.12 GRAPHICS 


the OWS. Where licensed software is required, provide not less than five (5) 

copies. 

6. ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER PROTECTION 

a. A software program shall be provided to allow each individual piece of HVAC 

equipment to be individually programmable with "minimum on", and "minimum off" 

timers to protect HVAC equipment from rapid cycling due to system or operator 

error. 

b. Minimum on/off timer program shall have priority over all application software 

functions except fire shutdown and smoke evacuation modes. 

c. For system startup purposes, timers shall be set at 15 minutes of at an acceptable 

time as documented by the HVAC equipment supplier. 

d. Timers shall be individually programmable from 0 to 120 minutes. 

A. The Operator Workstation Human-Machine Interface shall be graphical in nature. 

B. Graphics shall be a combination of data and pictorial representation of equipment and 

systems. 

C. Graphics shall be dynamic and display actual operating data; equipment/system graphics 

shall be animated to represent operation. Rapidly varying and/or oscilating data such as 

flows shall be filtered and smoothed. 

D. Scheduling, revising setpoints, assigning maintenance status, acknowledging alarms and 

similar functions shall be performed through the graphical interface. 

E. Alarms and critical parameters shall be displayed in a format to make the data/status 

conspicuous such as red text and a flashing background. 

F. Provide graphics of all systems and equipment organized in logical levels. 

G. Provide a chiller plant “dashboard” which summarizes the chiller plant load and operating 

efficiency. 


3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. All electrical work performed in the installation of the BAS/ATC system as described in this 

specification shall be per the National Electrical Code (NEC), applicable state and local codes 

and meet Division 16 requirements, except that minimum 1/2 “ conduit is acceptable. All 

wiring shall be installed in conduit run parallel to building lines properly supported and sized 

at a maximum of 40% fill. Except that communications cabling, where concealed above 

ceilings may be run without conduit if plenum rated wiring is used and it is supported in cable 

tray or bridal rings. In no case shall field installed conduit smaller than 1/2" trade size be 

allowed. Miscellaneous electrical devices, relays, contactors, transformers, switches, fuses, 

wiring and similar electrical items shall be provided and meet Division 16 requirements. 

B. Devices installed outdoors shall be in NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosures. Provide filtered 

forced ventilation fans where heat build-up is of concern. 





C. Provide lightning protection arrestors for all wiring of sensors and/or controllers located 

outdoors. 

D. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labor to operate the control system during the Test 

and Balance phase of the project. 

E. Confirm mounting location of all temperature and pressure sensors with the Test and Balance 

and Commissioning firms. Where measurements, testing or operation indicate the selected 

location is inappropriate or does not provide an accurate representation of the actual 

conditions due to stratification, eddy flows and similar phenomenon, relocate sensors and 

associated wells, hardware and mountings at no additional cost to the Owner. 

F. Coordinate acquisition and display/presentation of equipment connected to the EMS through 

multiplexed interfaces. 

G. Where equipment is indicated to be connected to emergency sources of power, controllers 

and actuators shall also derive their power from emergency powered sources, coordinate 

with Division 16. 

3.2 OWNER TRAINING 

A. The BAS/ATC contractor shall provide 3 copies of an operator's manual describing all 

operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the temperature 

control and Building Automation System supplied. This contractor shall instruct the owner's 

designated representatives in these procedures during the startup and test period. The 

duration of the instruction period shall be no less than 24 hours, during normal working hours. 

Refer to Section 15000, “General Provisions”, paragraph entitled, “Training” for additional 

requirements. 

3.3 CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENTS 

A. After completion of the installation, perform final calibrations and adjustments of the 

equipment provided under this contract and supply services incidental to the proper 

performance of the ATC and BAS system under warranty below. 

B. Provide input and assist in start-up of variable speed drives controlled by the BAS/ATC 

system. 

C. Provide real-time calibration of all flow and temperature sensors, measurement swill be made 

by the Test and Balance firm and furnished to this contractor for calibration. 

D. Provide real-time testing/verification for all control sequences, alarms and modes of failure. 

E. Provide input and assistance in operational troubleshooting to include but not limited to 

trendlogging, revisions to setpoints, deadbands, time intervals and sequences. 

3.4 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE 

A. Upon completion of the calibration, contractor shall startup the system and perform all 

necessary testing and run diagnostic tests to ensure proper operation. Contractor shall be 

responsible for generating all software and entering all database (including occupancy 

schedules) necessary to perform the sequence of control and specified software routines. An 

acceptance test in the presence of the owner's representative and/or commissioning agent 

shall be performed. 





B. All sequences shall be demonstrated and confirmed in the presence of the Owner. 

C. Participate in commissioning and certify that all control equipment meets pre-functional tests. 

After pre-functional tests are accepted, participate in commissioning functional testing. 

3.5 WARRANTY 

A. All BAS/ATC devices and installation shall be warranted to be free from defects in 

workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion by 

the Owner. Any equipment, software, or labor found to be defective during this period shall be 

repaired or replaced without expense to the owner. Factory authorized warranty service shall 

be available within 50 miles of job site. 

3.6 GRAPHICS 

A. Provide graphical screens for each chiller, pump and cooling tower with active display of 

monitored conditions, control output values and setpoints. 

B. Provide a graphical display of the chilled and condenser water systems. 

C. Once graphics are operational, provide an informal demonstration with the Owner and 

Engineer. Incorporate comments and revise as requested. 

PART 4. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 

4.1 GENERAL 

A. Control sequences shall be provided for each item of equipment connected to the automation 

system. 

B. Sequences do not refer to specific deadbands, delays and ranges required for stable 

operation, but shall be provided and be fully user adjustable at the operator workstation. 

C. Where proposed sequences could defeat the equipment manufacturers recommended 

safeties or be injurious to the equipment controlled, alert engineer of conflict prior to 

proceeding with the work. 

D. Provide modification of sequences, setpoints, deadbands, delays and ranges based upon 

actual performance of controlled equipment, in base contract price at no additional cost to the 

Owner. 

E. Demonstrate sequence of operation in the presence of the Owner for all controlled 

equipment, to include generation of alarms and simulation of equipment failures. 

F. In addition to specific equipment alarms noted in the sequence, provide standard alarms for 

items such as sensor failure, out of range and similar items. 

G. Coordinate sequences and data acquisition for trend logging, report generation, run hours 

and preventive maintenance functions. 






SECTION 15990 START-UP REQUIREMENTS FOR HEATING, 

VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) SYSTEMS 


A. An independent Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) Contractor shall perform TAB work 

for the HVAC systems. The TAB Contractor shall be hired by the Contractor and perform all 

TAB activities. 

B. The Contractor shall assist the TAB Contractor in performing his work as noted in PART 3 - 

EXECUTION and in Section 15991 - TAB of HVAC Systems, Section 01800 – General 

Commissioning Requirements, and Section 15995 – Commissioning. 

PART 2. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

A. Provide all necessary dampers, replacement of belts and sheaves and similar items as 

required to assist in TAB activities. 

PART 3. PART 3 – EXECUTION 

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the TAB Contractor a complete set of supplemental 

instructions, addenda, approved HVAC shop drawings, equipment performance data sheets, 

change orders, etc. The Owner will furnish to the TAB Contractor, a complete set of 

mechanical plans and specifications. 

B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the TAB Contractor to establish written schedules for 

pre-TAB inspections and for TAB work. The TAB Contractor shall inspect the installation of 

piping, ductwork, equipment and controls as the work progresses to ensure the installation 

will allow for proper test, adjustment, balancing and commissioning. The Contractor shall 

inform the TAB Contractor in writing of the following milestones: 

1. Piping: 30%, 60%, 100% Complete 

2. Major Equipment: Set-in-place, Connected 

3. Controls, 45%, 90%, 100% Complete 

Substantial Completion and Final Completion milestones shall be noted on the 

VAC/TABschedules. TAB work shall be scheduled to be completed prior to Substantial 

Completion. HVAC/TAB schedule shall be consistent with and shown on the project's Critical 

Path Management schedule. Any change in construction schedules which affects the TAB 

work shall be coordinated with the TAB Contractor. 

C. The Contractor shall notify the TAB Contractor of hydronic system commissioning so that the 

TAB Contractor can monitor the cleaning, flushing, filling and chemical treatment, and 

observe water samples being drawn and tested. Provide chemical treatment test report to 

the TAB Contractor within ten (10) calendar days of completed tests. 





D. Final TAB work shall not commence until the TAB Contractor has received written notice from 

the Contractor that all HVAC systems are 100% complete and are fully operational. For large 

projects, TAB work shall be phased on a building-by-building or system-by-system basis. 

E. The Contractor shall place all HVAC systems and equipment into complete operation during 

each working day of TAB work. 

F. The Contractor shall provide access to HVAC systems and equipment by supplying ladders, 

lifts and/or scaffolding, providing and opening access panels and equipment room doors. 

Where the TAB Contractor requests access to any device, make provisions to provide same. 

G. The TAB Contractor shall provide to the Contractor TAB punch lists of non-complying HVAC 

work as they are discovered or at least weekly. The Contractor shall replace or repair noncomplying 

work within two (2) work days of receipt of written punch list and shall provide 

written notification of repairs to the TAB Contractor. 

H. The Mechanical Contractor shall verify the following items to ensure proper start-up and 

preliminary adjustments of hydronic systems. 

1. Verify that the hydronic systems are properly flushed, filled, purged and chemically 

treated. 

2. Verify that the strainer baskets/screens are clean. 

3. Verify that pump/motor shaft is correctly aligned. 

4. Verify proper pump rotation amps and overload elements are installed. 

5. Verify that all balancing valves are fully opened and are equipped with adjustable 

memory stops. Verify that all bypass valves are full closed and 3-way valves are in 

full flow to system equipment. 

6. Verify that gage cocks, pressure gages and thermometers are properly installed at 

coils, pumps, chillers, heat exchangers, etc. Extensions to allow for pipe insulation 

are required. Gage cocks and pressure gages at pumps shall utilize pump flange 

taps in order for head measurements to correlate with the pump performance map. 

Gage cocks at chillers shall utilize evaporator and condenser manifold gage taps in 

order for head measurements to correlate with the manufacturer's data. 

7. Verify capacity of pump motor overload elements (1.25*FLA). 

8. Verify that all venturis are properly installed with the minimum upstream and 

downstream straight pipe lengths. 

9. Verify expansion tanks are properly charged, air vents have been installed at system 

high points and air has been vented from piping and equipment. 

10. Verify that coils are properly connected for counterflow, flanges/unions are above the 

coil pull space, and thermometer wells, gauge cocks, balancing valves and venturis 

are installed correctly. 

11. Verify proper operation of heat exchangers and they are set for proper operating 

temperatures. 





12. Verify setpoints for chillers, towers and similar equipment match design 

requirements. 

I. The Contractor shall verify the following items to ensure proper start-up and preliminary 

adjustment of the Automatic Control systems. 

1. Verify control components are installed, functional including electrical interlocks and 

safeties, sensors and limit switches. 

2. Verify variable frequency drives have been programmed, set-up and are properly 

communicating with the control system, and adjusted in manual and bypass modes 

of operation. 

3. Verify controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design conditions. 






SECTION 15991 – TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING AND 

COMMISSIONING (TAB) OF HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR 

CONDITIONING (HVAC) SYSTEMS 


1.1 SCOPE OF SERVICES: 

A. The TAB Consultant shall be a firm certified by either the Associated Air Balance Council 

(AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 

B. The TAB Consultant shall provide all technically qualified personnel, equipment, 

instrumentation, and materials on a continuous basis in order to complete TAB services in a 

timely manner. 

C. The scope of services shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 

1. Review Project Documents to ascertain that the HVAC systems are designed in such 

a manner that TAB may be accomplished. Alert Engineer/Contractor of concerns 

that could possibly preclude successful testing adjusting and balancing of the system 

within 30 days of award of Contract. 

2. Provide pre-TAB inspections of the HVAC systems during construction to assure that 

the systems are installed in conformance with Project Documents and approved shop 

drawings. 

3. Perform TAB of the HVAC systems in accordance with industry standards, and 

submit certified TAB Report. Report any items not installed, improperly installed or 

not functioning properly. Items not corrected in a timely fashion (Friday of each 

week) shall be noted in writing to the Contractor with a copy to the Architect/Engineer 

and Owner. 

4. Provide a Certificate of Conformance (NEBB) or Certificate of Warranty (AABC) 

attesting to the performance of the services provided. 

5. Calibration measurements for all automatic temperature control devices, 

maintenance of temperature setpoints and confirmation of control sequences, shall 

be performed. 

6. Witness pipe flushing, pressure testing. 

7. Troubleshooting functions to include providing measurements to assist in determining 

system operational issues, and render suggested solutions. 

8. Include costs associated with call-backs to resolve operational issues that manifest 

after occupancy and Owner acceptance. Include one inspection 90 days after 

occupancy to ensure satisfactory conditions are being maintained. 





1.3 FIRMS 


A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) - National Standard for Field Measurement and 

Instrumentation, Total System Balance, latest edition. 

B. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) - Procedural Standard for Testing, 

Balancing, and Adjusting of Environmental Systems, latest edition. 

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc., (ASHRAE) - 

HVAC Systems and Applications Handbook, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, latest edition. 

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) - HVAC 

Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, latest edition. 

A. TAB services shall be provided by one of the following firms: 


1. Dade Test and Balance 

2. GFS Consulting, Inc. 

3. Total Dynamic Balance 

A. Submit pre-TAB inspection reports. 

B. Submit certified TAB report for all HVAC systems. 

C. Submit certificate of conformance attesting to full completion of the TAB work in accordance 

with the standards and requirements of the certifying agency (AABC or NEEB). 

1.5 INSTRUMENTATION 

A. All instrumentation shall be provided by the TAB firm. 

B. Instrumentation shall be calibrated by a certified firm at a frequency not less than the 

prescribed by the certifying agency. 

1.6 DOCUMENTS 

A. The Contractor shall furnish the TAB firm with a complete set of construction documents and 

HVAC system shop drawings. 

PART 2. PRE-TAB INSPECTIONS 

A. Provide periodic inspections during construction and written report of findings submitted to 

the Owner, Contractor and Architect within seven (7) calendar days after each inspection. 

The frequency of inspections shall be determined by the TAB Consultant to provide adequate 

inspection coverage but shall NOT be less than bi-monthly during HVAC system installation. 

Inspection reports shall define area inspected and shall itemize TAB punch items. 




B. Inspections shall include, but not be limited to, the following areas: 


1. Piping Systems (Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Make-up Water, etc.): Verify the 

proper installation of pipe fittings, balancing devices, flow measurement devices, 

flexible connections, pressure & temperature test ports, thermometers & pressure 

gauges, etc. 

2. HVAC Equipment: Verify that the manufacturer, model number, power supply, motor 

horsepower, accessories, etc. are per approved shop drawings. When shop 

drawings of a different manufacturer than scheduled in the Project Documents are 

approved, the data per the shop drawings shall be listed in the TAB report as design 

data. Verify that the motor starter's overload protectors are correct for the motor's 

rated load amperes. 

3. Installation of HVAC Equipment: Verify that the installation is per Project Documents 

and/or manufacturer's recommendations per approved shop drawings. Pay special 

attention to field modifications required to accommodate field conditions, particularly 

at inlets/outlets of control valves, flow meters and similar items of equipment that 

could adversely affect performance and/or generate objectionable noise levels. 

4. Hydronic System Commissioning: Monitor the cleaning, flushing, filling and chemical 

treatment. Observe water samples being drawn and labeled. Advise the Owner 

whether or not the system is acceptable. 

C. Distribute inspection schedule and inspection reports. 

PART 3. TAB WORK 

A. Coordinate TAB work schedule through the Contractor, with the HVAC work being performed 

under Division 15. 

B. Provide personnel on a continuous basis in order to complete the TAB work in a timely 

manner. The TAB work shall be completed before Owner occupancy and the 100% 

construction review. After Owner occupancy, access to occupied areas may be restricted 

and work schedules shall be modified accordingly. Work after normal business hours shall 

be coordinated with the Owner's project manager. 

C. Inform the Contractor on a regular basis of work progress, work schedules and potential 

problem areas which may delay the timely completion of TAB work. 

D. Permanently mark the final position of dampers and valves. 

PART 4. TAB REPORT 

A. Publish a preliminary TAB report within fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the 100% 

construction review. The publishing of the preliminary TAB report shall not be delayed for 

unresolved punch items. Measured data for non-complying systems shall be provided so that 

all parties are working with the same information to resolve outstanding items. 

B. Publish a corrected report, certified by the Test and Balance firm as being an accurate 

representation of the data gathered, to be used at the 100% construction review. 





C. Publish a final report, certified by the Test and Balance firm as being an accurate 

representation of the data gathered, with a certificate of conformance after successful 

completion and acceptance of the project. 

D. Provide for recheck of air quantities and data as directed by the Owner at the final inspection. 

If test show a measurement deviation of 10 percent from the reported data, the report will be 

rejected and all systems and measurements retaken with a new report issued at no additional 

costs to the Owner. 

PART 5. TAB REPORT REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provide reports in hard cover, letter size, 3-ring binders with identification on front and binder. 

Include set of reduced HVAC floor plans with air outlets and equipment identified to 

correspond with Test Reports. Include pump and fan curves with operating conditions 

marked. 

B. Pumps 

C. Chillers 

1. Adjust pumps to +10%/-0% of specified flow rate. Provide no flow pump head and 

operating point plotted on curve. For variable speed drives, plot no flow and 

operating points at full speed (60 hertz). Record differential pressure and motor data. 

2. Record pump total flow, final amps, heater sizes and nameplate info. 

3. Verify start-up strainers have been removed. 

1. Record entering and leaving chilled and condenser water temperatures, flow-rates, 

motor amps voltage, percent load and inlet vane position. Perform log-test for a 

minimum of one hour with not less than six readings and compute capacity and 

actual kw/ton. 

2. Record pressure drop across evaporator and condenser. 

D. Cooling Towers 

1. Record entering and leaving condenser water temperatures and flow rate, fan speed, 

motor amps and voltage, outside air drybulb and wetbulb temperatures. Perform logtest 

for a minimum of one hour with not less than six readings and compute actual 

heat rejection and the approach (chiller and tower test shall be performed 

concurrently). 

E. Control Devices 

1. Verify operation of all control devices and proper response of equipment to control 

commands. 

2. Verify through real-time measurements calibration and readings of control sensors. 

3. Verify operation of primary/secondary decoupling and staging of chillers (lead/lag). 

4. Check for proper operation and control of valves, terminal boxes, supply fans, 

exhaust fans and similar equipment. 




F. Report Forms 


1. Submit test reports on standard AABC, NEBB or SMACNA forms. Forms shall be 

expanded to include all data listed, logs and records as well as any required data not 

listed. Each test report shall bear the name of the person who recorded the data, the 

date when the data was recorded, and the seal of the supervisor. Test reports shall 

be computer generated. 

2. Title Page 

a. Date 

b. Project's name and address 

c. Architect's name and address 

d. Mechanical Engineer's name and address 

e. General Contractor's name and address 

f. Division 15 Contractor's name and address 

g. TAB Consultant's name, address and phone number 

h. Section 15900 Contractor’s name and address. 

i. Dates test was conducted 

3. Certification Page 

a. Project's name and address 

b. Certification statement 

c. TAB Consultant's name 

d. TAB supervisor's name 

e. Certification number 

f. Date 

g. Seal and signature of TAB supervisor 

h. Certificate of Conformance/Warranty 

4. D. Instrument Calibration Report 

a. Instrument 

b. Manufacturer 

c. Model number 

d. Serial number 

e. Range 

f. Calibration date 

5. Preface 

6. Provide a general discussion of the types of systems, anomalies and performance 

problems. Include remarks that could aid in maintenance and reading and 

understanding the report. 




7. Test Reports 


a. Provide test reports for all items tested. 

b. For air devices, provide an identification scheme or sketch to identify devices. 






SECTION 15992 TESTS – PIPING SYSTEMS 



1.2 SCOPE 



A. Provide labor, materials and supervision necessary to perform all piping tests for all systems 

as follows: 

1. Chilled and Condenser Water System 

B. Additional tests may be specified in other sections. These shall be performed in addition to 

those specified in this section. 

C. Should governing bodies require tests over and above those specified herein, they shall be 

performed by the Contractor and certified for approval by such governing bodies or agencies. 

D. Provide certified test reports for all systems. 

1.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Contractor shall provide all devices, equipment, gases, etc., necessary to make tests 

required. Devices installed in the work shall not be used for test purposes. 

B. Materials shall be subjected to standard test by manufacturer before shipment. 

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Make test during installation and after completion. Tests shall be made at expense of 

Contractor. 

B. Piping concealed in building construction, chases, etc., shall be proved before being 

concealed. Contractor failing to make such tests must assume all costs of removing and 

replacing defective piping and must pay all costs of cutting and repairing building construction 

made necessary by this neglect to end of guarantee period. 

C. Make tests prior to insulating piping or backfilling of underground work. 

D. Make hydrostatic tests with cold water. The minimum duration shall be two (2) hours. 

E. Test in presence of the Code Official Having Jurisdiction, and the Owner's representative, 

who may direct Contractor to perform tests in presence of some other appointed witness. In 

no case shall Contractor perform a test without its being witnessed. Contractor will be 

responsible for correct testing, observation of results, and corrections necessary. 

F. Provisions shall be made so that every item may thoroughly inspected, and in no case shall 

any part of construction be obscured. 





G. Do not apply test pressures to a hot valve. In event such testing is necessary, install 

temporary block ahead of valve. Final test of connection against hot valve shall be by 

examination of work under service pressure. 

H. Any device connected into system which cannot assume test pressure shall be disconnected 

and protected from damage. 

I. All parts of system under test must be under constant supervision with authority to bleed off 

excess pressure that may develop. No tests shall remain on work unless continuously 

attended. Use care so that excess pressure does not develop because of temperature 

changes. 

J. Work shall be completely leak free at any joint, fittings, accessory, or attachment. If repairs 

are necessary, re-test work after correction. Correct defects made manifest by these tests 

before proceeding with other work. 

1.5 CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS 

A. For each system tested, provide a certificate testifying that the system was tested as 

specified and provide the following data: 

1. Identification of system tested referencing specific equipment connected to system. 

2. Date tested. 

3. Test pressure and duration of test. 

4. Recorded test pressure at end of test. 

5. Media used for testing. 

6. List necessary repairs made before the system passed the leak test. 

7. Signature of Contractor. 

8. Signature of witness. 

9. Other data as required by the system specification. 

1.6 CHILLED WATER AND CONDENSER WATER SYSTEMS 

A. Hydrostatic Test at 150 percent of design pressure, but in no case less than 125 psig. 

Maintain pressure for not less than four hours with no addition of water. 

B. After test, flush piping with clean water removing debris and sediment. 

C. Treat chilled and condenser water system after flushing and cleaning is completed as per 

Sections 15510 and 15545. 






SECTION 15995 COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 DESCRIPTION 

A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 15 responsibilities in the commissioning 

process. 

B. The systems to be commissioned are listed in Division 1 Section 01800 “Commissioning.” 

C. Commissioning requires the participation of Division 15 to ensure that all systems are operating 

in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents. The general commissioning requirements 

and coordination are detailed in Division 1 Section 01810 “Commissioning.”. Division 15 shall 

be familiar with all parts of Division 1 and the commissioning plan issued by the CA and shall 

execute all commissioning responsibilities assigned to them in the Contract Documents. 

D. The Commissioning Authority (CA) will be an independent firm hired by the Owner. 

1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES 

A. Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. 

B. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB 

contractors of Division 15 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only): 

1. Construction and Acceptance Phases 

a. Include all cost of commissioning in the contract price. 

b. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other meetings necessary to 

facilitate the CX process. 

c. Contractors shall provide the CA with normal cut sheets and shop drawing 

submittals of commissioned equipment. 

d. Provide additional requested documentation, prior to normal O&M manual 

submittals, to the CA for development of start-up and functional testing 

procedures. 

1) Typically this will include detailed manufacturer installation and start-up, 

operating, troubleshooting and maintenance procedures, full details of any 

owner-contracted tests, fan and pump curves, full factory testing reports, if 

any, and full warranty information, including all responsibilities of the Owner 

to keep the warranty in force clearly identified. In addition, the installation, 

start-up and checkout materials that are actually shipped inside the 

equipment and the actual field checkout sheet forms to be used by the 

factory or field technicians shall be submitted to the Commissioning 

Authority. 

2) The Commissioning Authority may request further documentation necessary 

for the commissioning process. 

3) This data request may be made prior to normal submittals. 

e. Provide a copy of the O&M manuals and submittals of commissioned equipment, 

through normal channels, to the CA for review and approval. 

f. Contractors shall assist in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned 

equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment 

documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 

g. Provide assistance to the CA in preparing the pre-functional and specific functional 

performance test procedures as specified in Division 01 Section 01810 

“Commissioning.” Subs shall review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety 

and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used 

during the tests. 

h. Develop a full start-up and initial checkout plan using manufacturer’s start-up 

procedures and the pre-functional checklists from the CA for all commissioned 





equipment. Submit to CA for review and approval prior to startup. Refer to 

Division 01 Section 01810 “Commissioning” for further details on start-up plan 

preparation. 

i. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the mechanical-related 

portions of the pre-functional checklists for all commissioned equipment. 

j. Perform and clearly document all completed startup and system operational 

checkout procedures, providing a copy to the CA. 

k. Address current A/E punch list items before functional testing. Air and water TAB 

shall be completed with discrepancies and problems remedied before functional 

testing of the respective air- or water-related systems. 

l. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the 

functional performance tests. Ensure that they are available and present during 

the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary 

tests, adjustments and problem-solving. 

m. Provide skilled technicians to perform functional performance testing under the 

direction of the CA for specified equipment in Division 1 Section 01810 

“Commissioning.” Assist the CA in interpreting the monitoring data, as necessary. 

n. Correct deficiencies (differences between specified and observed performance) as 

interpreted by the CA, CM and A/E and retest the equipment. 

o. Prepare O&M manuals according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying 

and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. 

p. During construction, maintain as-built red-line drawings for all drawings and final 

CAD as-builts for contractor-generated coordination drawings. Update after 

completion of commissioning (excluding deferred testing). 

q. Provide training of the Owner’s operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as 

specified. 

r. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to 

maintain the validity of the warranty. 

2. Warranty Period 

a. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by the CA. 

b. Correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to O&M manuals and asbuilt 

drawings for applicable issues identified in any seasonal testing. 

C. Mechanical Contractor. The responsibilities of the HVAC mechanical contractor, during 

construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are: 

1. Provide startup for all HVAC equipment in accordance with the phasing requirements set 

forth in the contract documents, except for the building automation control system. 

2. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor and CA by: 

a. Putting all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continuing the 

operation during each working day of TAB and commissioning, as required. 

b. Including cost of sheaves and belts that may be required by TAB. 

c. Providing temperature and pressure taps according to the Construction 

Documents for TAB and commissioning testing. 

3. Install a P/T plug at each water sensor which is an input point to the control system. 

4. Prepare a preliminary schedule for Division 15 pipe system testing, flushing and cleaning, 

equipment start-up and TAB start and completion for use by the CA. Update the 

schedule as appropriate. 

5. Notify the CM or CA depending on protocol, when pipe system testing, flushing, cleaning, 

startup of each piece of equipment and TAB will occur. Be responsible to notify the CM 

or CA, ahead of time, when commissioning activities not yet performed or not yet 

scheduled will delay construction. Be proactive in seeing that commissioning processes 

are executed and that the CA has the scheduling information needed to efficiently 

execute the commissioning process. 

D. Controls Contractor. The commissioning responsibilities of the controls contractor, during 

construction and acceptance phases in addition to those listed in (A) are: 

1. Sequences of Operation Submittals. The Controls Contractor’s submittals of control 

drawings shall include complete detailed sequences of operation for each piece of 





equipment, regardless of the completeness and clarity of the sequences in the 

specifications. They shall include: 

a. An overview narrative of the system (1 or 2 paragraphs) generally describing its 

purpose, components and function. 

b. All interactions and interlocks with other systems. 

c. Detailed delineation of control between any packaged controls and the building 

automation system, listing what points the BAS monitors only and what BAS points 

are control points and are adjustable. 

d. Start-up sequences. 

e. Normal operating mode sequences. 

f. Shutdown sequences. 

g. Capacity control sequences and equipment staging. 

h. Detailed sequences for all control strategies. 

i. Effects of power or equipment failure with all standby component functions. 

j. Sequences for all alarms and emergency shut downs. 

k. Seasonal operational differences and recommendations. 

l. Initial and recommended values for all adjustable settings, setpoints and 

parameters that are typically set or adjusted by operating staff; and any other 

control settings or fixed values, delays, etc. that will be useful during testing and 

operating the equipment. 

m. To facilitate referencing in testing procedures, all sequences shall be written in 

small statements, each with a number for reference. For a given system, numbers 

will not repeat for different sequence sections, unless the sections are numbered. 

2. Control Drawings Submittal 

a. The control drawings shall have a key to all abbreviations. 

b. The control drawings shall contain graphic schematic depictions of the systems 

and each component. 

c. The schematics will include the system and component layout of any equipment 

that the control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is 

primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls. 

3. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be 

included in the final controls O&M manual submittal. 

4. Assist and cooperate with the TAB contractor in the following manner: 

a. Meet with the TAB contractor prior to beginning TAB and review the TAB plan to 

determine the capabilities of the control system toward completing TAB. 

b. For a given area, have all required pre-functional checklists, calibrations, startup 

and selected functional tests of the system completed and approved by the CA 

prior to TAB. 

c. Provide a qualified technician to operate the controls to assist the TAB contractor 

in performing TAB, or provide sufficient training for TAB to operate the system 

without assistance. 

5. Assist and cooperate with the CA in the following manner: 

a. Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building; execute the functional 

testing of the controls system as specified for the controls contractor in Division 01 

Section 01800 “Commissioning.” Assist in the functional testing of all equipment 

specified in Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning.” Provide two-way radios 

during the testing. 

b. Execute all control system trend logs specified or required to demonstrate system 

operation. 

c. The controls contractor shall prepare a written plan indicating in a step-by-step 

manner, the procedures that will be followed to test, checkout and adjust the 

control system prior to functional performance testing, according to the process in 

Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning.” 

6. Provide a signed and dated certification to the CA and CM upon completion of the 

checkout of each controlled device, equipment and system prior to functional testing for 

each piece of equipment or system, that all system programming is complete as to all 

respects of the Contract Documents, except functional testing requirements. 





7. List and clearly identify on the as-built equipment and piping drawings, the locations of all 

differential pressure sensors (water). 

E. TAB Contractor. The duties of the TAB contractor, in addition to those listed above are: 

1. Six weeks prior to starting TAB, submit to the CM the qualifications of the site technician 

for the project, including the name of the contractors and facility managers of recent 

projects the technician on which was lead. The Owner will approve the site technician’s 

qualifications for this project. 

2. Submit the outline of the TAB plan and approach for each system and component to the 

CA, CM and the controls contractor six weeks prior to starting the TAB. This plan will be 

developed after the TAB has some familiarity with the control system. 

3. A running log of events and issues shall be kept by the TAB field technicians. Submit 

hand-written reports of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others, contract 

interpretation requests and lists of completed tests to the CA and CM at least once a 

week once TAB has initiated. 

4. Communicate in writing to the controls contractor all setpoint and parameter changes 

made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB which affect the control 

system setup and operation. 

5. Provide a draft TAB report within two weeks of completion. A copy will be provided to the 

CA. The report will contain a full explanation of the methodology, assumptions and the 

results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and column 

headings. The report should follow the latest and most rigorous reporting 

recommendations by AABC or NEBB. 

6. Provide the CA with any requested data, gathered, but not shown on the draft reports. 

7. Provide a final TAB report for the CA with details, as in the draft. 

8. Conduct functional performance tests and checks on the original TAB as specified for 

TAB in Section 15991. 

1.3 RELATED WORK 

A. Refer to Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning” for a listing of all sections where 

commissioning requirements are found. 

B. Refer to Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning” for functional testing requirements. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT 

A. Division 15 shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the testing requirements of this 

Division. 

B. Refer to Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning” for additional Division 15 requirements. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 


A. Division 15 shall provide submittal documentation relative to commissioning as required in this 

Section Part 1, Division 01 Section 01300 “Submittals,” and Division 01 Section 01800 

“Commissioning”, and Division 15 Sections. 

3.2 STARTUP 

A. The HVAC mechanical and controls contractors shall follow the start-up and initial checkout 

procedures listed in the Responsibilities list in this section and in Division 1 Section 01800 

“Commissioning.” Division 15 has start-up responsibility and is required to complete systems 

and sub-systems so they are fully functional, meeting the design objectives of the Contract 





Documents. The commissioning procedures and functional testing do not relieve or lessen this 

responsibility or shift that responsibility partially to the commissioning agent or Owner. 

B. Final system functional testing shall begin upon completion of all phases of construction. 

Phased functional testing shall proceed at the completion of each project phase once the 

installed equipment associated with the phase has been checked out and proper start-up 

completed. Beginning system testing before full completion does not relieve the Contractor 

from fully completing the system, including all pre-functional checklists as soon as possible. 

3.3 TAB 

A. Refer to the TAB responsibilities above. 

3.4 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS 

A. Refer to Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning” for a list of systems to be commissioned 

and a description of the process, and to Sections 15991 and 15992 for specific details on the 

required functional performance tests. 

3.5 TESTING DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVALS 

A. Refer to Division 1 Section 01800 “Commissioning” for specific details on non-conformance 

issues relating to pre-functional checklists and tests. 

B. Refer to Division 1 Section 01800 “Commissioning: for issues relating to functional performance 

tests. 

3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS 

A. The following O&M manual requirements do not replace O&M manual documentation 

requirements elsewhere in these specifications. 

B. Division 15 shall compile and prepare documentation for all equipment and systems covered in 

Division 15 and deliver this documentation to the GC for inclusion in the O&M manuals, 

according to this section and Division 1 Section 01700 “Project Closeout,” prior to the training of 

owner personnel. 

C. The CA shall receive a copy of the O&M manuals for review. 

D. Special Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation that may be 

specified elsewhere, the controls contractor shall compile and organize at minimum the 

following data on the control system in labeled 3-ring binders with indexed tabs. 

1. Three copies of the controls training manuals in a separate manual from the O&M 

manuals. 

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals containing: 

a. Specific instructions on how to perform and apply all functions, features, modes, 

etc. mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other 

features of this system. These instructions shall be step-by-step. Indexes and 

clear tables of contents shall be included. The detailed technical manual for 

programming and customizing control loops and algorithms shall be included. 

b. Full as-built set of control drawings (refer to Submittal section above for details). 

c. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment. 

d. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance of the 

system. 

e. Full as-built print out of software program. 

f. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility. 

g. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and 

mechanical drawings with their control system designations. 

h. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and methods 

by sensor type, etc. 

i. Control equipment component submittals, parts lists, etc. 





j. Warranty requirements. 

k. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (not 

commissioning tests). 

3. The manual shall be organized and subdivided with permanently labeled tabs for each of 

the following data in the given order: 

a. Sequences of operation 

b. Control drawings 

c. Points lists 

d. Controller / module data 

e. Thermostats and timers 

f. Sensors and DP switches 

g. Valves and valve actuators 

h. Program setups (software program printouts) 

4. Field checkout sheets and trend logs should be provided to the CA for inclusion in the 

Commissioning Record Book. 

E. Special TAB Documentation Requirements. The TAB will compile and submit the following with 

other documentation that may be specified elsewhere in the Specifications. 

1. Final report containing an explanation of the methodology, assumptions, test conditions 

and the results in a clear format with designations of all uncommon abbreviations and 

column headings. 

2. The TAB shall mark on the drawings where all critical measurements were taken and 

cross reference the location in the TAB report. 

F. Review and Approvals. Review of the commissioning related sections of the O&M manuals 

shall be made by the A/E and by the CA. Refer to Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning” 

for details. 

3.7 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL 

A. The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately to ensure 

that training is completed. Refer to Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning,” for additional 

details. 

B. The CA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the 

training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section 01800 

“Commissioning” for additional details. 

C. Mechanical Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training 

responsibilities: 

1. Provide the CA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training according to 

the outline described in Division 01 Section 01810 “Commissioning.” 

2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the 

understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC 

equipment including, but not limited to, pumps, chillers, cooling towers, controls, water 

treatment systems, refrigerant detection system(s), etc. 

3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on 

each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including 

startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc. 

4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the 

requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired 

or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 

5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on 

each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece 

of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer’s representative. Practical 

building operating expertise, as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of 

the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to 

execute the training. 

6. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as 

requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment 

being discussed. 





7. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and 

maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for 

reference. 

8. Training shall include: 

a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material 

included in the O&M manuals. 

b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating 

requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts 

inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes 

possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. 

c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. 

d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. 

e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 

f. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans 

and manuals in the facility. 

g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 

9. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including 

manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all 

pieces of equipment. 

10. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and 

overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system. 

11. Training shall occur after final functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise 

by the Owner. 

12. Duration of Training. The mechanical contractor shall provide training on each piece of 

equipment according to the schedule listed in Division 01 Section 01800 

“Commissioning.” 

D. Controls Contractor. The controls contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 

1. Provide the CA with a training plan four weeks before the planned training according to 

the outline described in Division 01 Section 01800 “Commissioning.” 

2. The controls contractor shall provide designated Owner personnel training on the control 

system in this facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on all the 

capabilities of the control system. 

3. Training manuals. The standard operating manual for the system and any special 

training manuals will be provided for each trainee, with three extra copies left for the O&M 

manuals. In addition, copies of the system technical manual will be demonstrated during 

training and three copies submitted with the O&M manuals. Manuals shall include 

detailed description of the subject matter for each session. The manuals will cover all 

control sequences and have a definitions section that fully describes all relevant words 

used in the manuals and in all software displays. Manuals will be approved by the CA. 

Copies of audiovisuals shall be delivered to the Owner. 

4. The trainings will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees. 

5. The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. For the on-site 

sessions, the most qualified trainer(s) will be used. The Owner shall approve the 

instructor prior to scheduling the training. 

6. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the 

requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired 

or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 

7. The controls contractor shall attend sessions other than the controls training, as 

requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment 

being discussed. 

8. There shall be two (2) training sessions: 

a. Training I. Building Systems. The training shall be held on-site for a period of 8hours 

of actual hands-on training after the completion of system commissioning. 

The session shall include instruction on: 

1) Specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this building and 

specific instruction for operating the installed system, including HVAC 





systems, lighting controls and any interface with security and 

communication systems. 

2) Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and 

restart routines, changing setpoints and alarms and other typical changed 

parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment, 

optional control strategies that can be considered, energy savings strategies 

and set points that if changed will adversely affect energy consumption, 

energy accounting, procedures for obtaining vendor assistance, etc. 

3) All trending and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization, 

etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and 

graphically and printing trends. Trainees will actually set-up trends in the 

presence of the trainer. 

4) Every screen shall be completely discussed, allowing time for questions. 

5) Use of remote access to the system via phone lines or networks. 

6) Graphics generation 

7) Point database entry and modifications 

8) Understanding DDC field panel operating programming (when applicable) 

b. Training II. The second training will be conducted on-site six months after 

occupancy and consist of 4-hours of training. The session will be structured to 

address specific topics that trainees need to discuss and to answer questions 

concerning operation of the system. 

E. TAB: The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 

1. TAB shall meet for 2 hours with facility staff after completion of TAB and instruct them on 

the following: 

a. Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data 

type. 

b. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may 

affect the proper delivery of air or water. 

c. Identify and discuss any pumps that are close to or are not meeting their design 

capacity. 

d. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are 

not finished. 

e. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB. 

3.8 DEFERRED TESTING 

A. Refer to Division 1 Section 01800 “Commissioning” for requirements of deferred testing. 

3.9 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS 

A. Written work products of Contractors will consist of the start-up and initial checkout plan 

described in Division 1 Section 01800 “Commissioning” and the filled out start-up, initial 

checkout and pre-functional checklists. 





Division 16 

Electrical


SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 



A. Requirements specified within this section apply to all sections in Division 16, ELECTRICAL. 

Work specified herein shall be performed as if specified in the individual sections. 

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. All electronic boards as part of electrical equipment shall meet the atmospheric conditions of 

the space the equipment is installed in. All electronic boards which are not installed in a 

conditioned environment shall be fungus-resistant. 

B. All electrical equipment shall be rated for the conditions the equipment is installed in. 

1.3 STANDARDS, CODES, PERMITS, AND REGULATIONS 

A. Perform all work; furnish and install all materials and equipment in full accordance with the 

latest applicable rules, regulations, requirements, and specifications of the following: 

1. Local Laws and Ordinances. 

2. State and Federal Laws. 

3. National Electrical Code (NEC). 

4. State Fire Marshal. 

5. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). 

6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 

7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 

8. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 

9. National Electrical CONTRACTOR'S Association (NECA) Standard of Installation. 

10. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 

11. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 

12. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). 

13. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 

14. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 

15. Florida Building Code, including Broward County amendments. 





B. Conflicts, if any, which may exist between the above items, will be resolved at the discretion 

of the ENGINEER. 

C. Wherever the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the above 

items, the requirements of the Specifications or Drawings govern. Code compliance is 

mandatory. Construe nothing in the Contract Documents as permitting work not in 

compliance with these codes. 

D. Obtain all permits and pay all fees required by any governmental agency having jurisdiction 

over the work. Arrange all inspections required by these agencies. On completion of the 

work, furnish satisfactory evidence to the ENGINEER that the work is acceptable to the 

regulatory authorities having jurisdiction. 

1.4 ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 

A. Work Provided Under this Contract: 

1. Removal of the existing 4160V switchgear and starters as shown on plans. 

2. Removal of existing 480V distribution and starters as shown on plans. 

3. Install owner provided 4160V Switchboard and Softstarts (Starters) as indicated on 

plans and specifications complete in place. 

4. Install owner provided 480V Motor Control Center as indicated on plans and 

specifications complete in place. 

5. Install owner provided 1200A circuit breaker in Substation “D” for new MCC as 

indicated on plans and specifications complete in place. 

6. Install owner provided VFDs and disconnect switches for new Cooling Towers as 

indicated on plans and specifications complete in place. 

7. Provide and install electrical distribution systems as shown on drawings and 

specifications. 

8. Delivery of Owner provide equipment. Includes all transportation charges, including, 

but not limited to, switching, trucking, loading and unloading at deliver site and 

special handling. 

9. Coordinate with System Study Engineer, make adjustments and modifications and 

attached labels as required under specification 16015. 

B. Temporary Power: 

1. Provide temporary power for all office trailers and for all construction areas. 

C. Demolition Constraints and Suggested Construction Sequences: 

1. Refer to drawings for Demolition Constraints and suggested construction sequences. 

The drawings show the equipment that will be demolished or replaced as part of this 

project. The suggested construction sequences are just a guideline to assist the 

Contractor with understanding the project and Contractor must adjust as needed to 

avoid conflicts. The Contractor must submit in writing a detailed construction 





sequence plan to be approved by the Owner and the Engineer prior to beginning 

construction. 

1.5 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 

A. The electrical contractor shall meet or exceed the criteria described below: 


1. The electrical contractor shall be licensed in the State of Florida. 

2. The electrical contractor shall have successful completed (3) Medium Voltage 

projects similar in size within the last (3) years. Provide project description, dollar 

amount, owner address and contact. 

3. The electrical contractor shall have, in their employ, the following full time employees 

that will be assigned to perform the electrical work of this contract: 

a. A minimum of (1) Licensed Master Electrician who is overall responsible for the 

supervision of personnel performing the construction, installation startup and 

testing of all electrical related facilities and systems. 

b. A minimum of (1) Licensed Journeyman Electrician responsible for the daily 

construction activities and guidance of the electrical contractor’s on site 

employees. The Licensed Journeyman’s primary assignment will be the 

construction of the electrical facilities of this project until project completion. The 

Licensed Journeyman shall be certified in Palm Beach County or shall meet the 

reciprocity standards of Florida State Statue 489 Part II. A minimum of (1) 

Licensed Electrician who has (5) years Medium Voltage installation experience 

and cable splicing certification. 

4. ` The electrical contractor shall not be involved in any current or pending litigation 

which may have a material negative impact on the ability to complete the project. The 

electrical contractor shall provide a statement advising all current or pending 

litigations. 

A. Quality Control Submittals: 

1. Voltage Field Test Results. 

2. Voltage Balance Report. 

3. Equipment Line Current Report. 

4. Site test certification and reports as specified in other Division 16, ELECTRICAL 

sections. 

5. As part of the electrical submittal, the contractor shall provide a minimum of ¼”=1’-0” 

scaled layout of the electrical equipment in the electrical room or major electrical 

equipment in a mechanical room showing sizes of all equipment and their spatial 

relationship. Non-electrical equipment shall be approved before finalizing the 

electrical layout in mechanical rooms. 




B. The following information shall be provided for all electrical equipment: 


1. A copy of each specification section, with addendum updates included, and all 

referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each 

paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate 

requested deviations from specification requirements. Check-marks () shall denote 

full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are 

indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be 

underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified 

paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined shall signify 

compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. The submittal shall 

be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. 

2. Electrical equipment submittals shall be made by specification section. Submit one 

package per specification section and do not group multiple specification sections 

under one submittal package. 

3. Provide complete conduit and equipment layouts: a scaled plan layout of the 

electrical room(s) showing spatial relationships of all equipment as well as the overall 

size of the room. Minimum scale shall be ¼”=1’-0”. 

4. Provide a conduit plan for major power, instrumentation and control conduits, both 

interior and exterior, showing routing, size and stub up locations for buried or in slab 

conduits. 

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 

A. All chemical rooms and areas shall be designated as corrosive. 

B. All indoor chemical and process equipment areas shall be considered wet locations. 

C. Electrical equipment in rooms designated as Classified by NFPA 70 (national electrical code) 

as Division 1 or Division 2 shall meet all requirements set forth for that classification as 

described in NEC article 500. 

D. All outdoor electrical panel and instrumentation control panels, shall be mounted with 

supports to meet the local wind loading requirements, indicated or not on drawings. All panels 

shall be mounted steady and securely. 

1.8 INSPECTION OF THE SITE AND EXISTING CONDITIONS 

A. The Electrical Drawings were developed from past record drawings and information supplied 

by the OWNER. Verify all scaled dimensions prior to submitting bids. 

B. Before submitting a bid, visit the site and determine conditions at the site and at all existing 

structures in order to become familiar with all existing conditions and electrical system which 

will, in any way or manner, affect the work required under this Contract. No subsequent 

increase in Contract cost will be allowed for additional work required because of the 

CONTRACTOR's failure to fulfill this requirement. 

C. Carry out any work involving the shutdown of the existing services to any piece of equipment 

now functioning in existing areas at such time as to provide the least amount of 

inconvenience to the OWNER. Do such work when directed by the ENGINEER. 

D. After award of Contract, locate all existing underground utilities at each area of construction 

activity. Protect all existing underground utilities during construction. Pay for all required 





repairs without increase in Contract cost, should damage to underground utilities occur during 

construction. 

1.9 RESPONSIBILITY 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for: 

1. Complete systems in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents. 

2. Coordinating the details of facility equipment and construction for all Specification 

Divisions which affect the work covered under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. 

3. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown or specified, but 

which are required by good practice to provide complete functional systems. 

4. Coordinate with equipment supplier for dimensions of the equipment and ask the 

supplier to ship the equipment in section if the equipment is too large to enter the 

room (door) where the equipment will be installed. The cost to assembly the 

equipment at the job site shall be included in the bid price. 

1.10 INTENT OF DRAWINGS 

A. Electrical plan Drawings show only general location of equipment, devices, and raceway, 

unless specifically dimensioned. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the proper 

routing of raceway, subject to the approval of the ENGINEER. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide materials and equipment listed by UL wherever standards have been established by 

that agency. 

B. Equipment Finish: 

1. Provide manufacturers' standard finish and color, except where specific color is 

indicated. 

2. If manufacturer has no standard color, provide equipment with ANSI No. 61, light 

gray color. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless 

specifically dimensioned. 

B. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified. 




3.2 RUBBER MATS 


A. A three foot wide rubber mat shall be furnished and installed on the floor and in front of each 

switchgear, switchboard, MCC, VFD, and SSRVS assembly. The mat shall be long enough 

to cover the full length of each line-up. The mat shall be 1/4 inch thick with beveled edges, 

canvas back, solid type with corrugations running the entire length of the mat. The mat shall 

be guaranteed extra quality, free from cracks, blow holes, or other defects detrimental to their 

mechanical or electrical strength. The mat shall meet OSHA requirements and the 

requirements of ANSI/ASTM D-178 J6-7 for Type 2, Class 2 insulating matting. 

3.3 LOAD BALANCE 

A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment. 

B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panel boards, 

motor control centers, and other equipment where balancing is required. 

C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain 

accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit 

arrangement. 

3.4 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP 

A. Voltage Field Test: 

1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to project 

when installation is essentially complete and is in operation. 

2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded 

conditions. 

3. Record supply voltage (all three phases simultaneously on the same graph) for 24 

hours during normal working day. 

a. Submit Voltage Field Test Report within 5 days of test. 

4. Unbalance Corrections: 

a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined 

by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from 

loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal. 

b. Obtain a written certification from a responsible power company official that the 

voltage variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections 

are not made. 

B. Equipment Line Current Tests: 

1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. 

2. Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply 

voltage magnitude or balance. 

3. If any phase current for any piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, 

prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and 

corrective action taken. 




C. Startup: 


1. Demonstrate satisfactory operation of all 4160 and 480-volt electrical equipment. 

Participate with other trades in all startup activities. 





SECTION 16015 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 


The Systems Study and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis under PART 1 and PART 2 has been prepurchased 

by the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer/Vendor providing the 

study for the Owner and provide all information required by the Engineer/Vendor to complete the 

study. Contractor shall provide all requirements, adjustments, modifications as indicated in Parts 1 

and 2 of this specification and the entirety of Part 3 of this specification. The Contractor is referred 

to as the “Installing” or “Installation” “Contractor”. 

PART 1 -- GENERAL 

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. The requirements of this specification shall apply to the new electrical distribution system at PBIA 

Chiller Room added under this contract. The end result shall be a fully protected, and properly 

coordinated, system with proper arc flash safety labels and personal protective equipment 


B. Furnish short-circuit and protective device coordination studies as described herein. The 

coordination study shall begin with existing transformers/switchboards – T-3 and T-4 to new 

switchgear “CP” and also from existing Substation “D” to new “MCC1.” Include all of the 

electrical protective devices down to, and including, the main breakers/fuses and feeder circuits. 

The study shall also include variable frequency drives, harmonic filters, power factor correction 

equipment, transformers and protective devices associated with variable frequency drives, 

emergency and standby generators associated paralleling equipment and distribution switchgear. 

C. Furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study per NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the 

Workplace, reference Article 130.3 and Annex D. 


A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this section: 

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 

a. IEEE 141 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution and 

Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 

b. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial 

Buildings 

c. IEEE 242: Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial 

and Commercial Power Systems. 

d. IEEE 399: Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System 

Analysis. 

e. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers 

Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems 

f. IEEE 1584-2002: Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations. 

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 

a. C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements for Liquid-immersed Distribution, 

Power, and Regulating Transformers. 

b. ANSI C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in 

Enclosures 

c. ANSI C37.010 – Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers 

Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis 





d. ANSI C 37.41 – Standard Design Tests for High Voltage Fuses, Distribution 

Enclosed Single-Pole Air Switches, Fuse Disconnecting Switches and 

Accessories 

e. ANSI C37.5 – Methods for Determining the RMS Value of a Sinusoidal Current 

Wave and Normal-Frequency Recovery Voltage, and for Simplified Calculation of 

Fault Currents 

3. National Fire Protection Association: 

a. NFPA 70E: National Electrical Safety Code Chapter 1. 

b. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code. 

4. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA): 

a. 29-CFR, Part 1910, sub part S. 


A. Shop drawings: the results of the short-circuit; protective device coordination and arc flash 

hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a preliminary and final summary report. Submit 

five (5) three-ring binder bound copies of the complete preliminary and final study reports. The 

preliminary short circuit and device coordination study report shall be submitted within 30 days of 

notice to proceed and shall be a basis for approval of all other electrical equipment in the power 

distribution system. The final short circuit and device coordination study report shall incorporate 

all comments from shop drawing submittals and include the arc-flash hazard analysis. The 

supplier shall coordinate with the installing Contractor to ensure proper arc-flash warning labels 

are applied to all appropriate electrical equipment installed under this contract when the final 

study has been approved. 


A. Short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash studies shall be prepared by the 

manufacturer furnishing the electrical power distribution equipment or a professional electrical 

engineer registered in the State of Florida, hired by the manufacturer, in accordance with IEEE 

242 and IEEE 399. 

B. Manufacturer shall have unit responsibility for the equipment and protective device coordination. 

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. An initial, complete short circuit and arc flash study must be submitted and reviewed before 

Engineer will approve Shop Drawings for switchgear, unit sub stations, breakers, MCC’S, 

switchboard, VFD’S, manufactured industrial control panels and circuit breaker panelboard 

equipment. Failure to do so will delay the approval of major equipment submittals. 

B. The short circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash studies shall be updated prior to 

Project Substantial Completion. Utilize characteristics of as-installed equipment actual wire run 

lengths and materials. 

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 

2.1 GENERAL 

A. Supplier shall coordinate with installing Contractor for all field data as required for the power 

system studies. The Engineer performing the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc 





flash hazard analysis studies shall furnish the installing Contractor with a listing of required data 

immediately after award of the contract. The supplier shall coordinate with the Owner for existing 

System Study to expedite collection of the data to eliminate unnecessary delays and assure 

completion of the studies as required for final approval of the distribution equipment shop 

drawings and/or prior to the release of the equipment for manufacturing. 

B. Source combination may include present and future utility supplies, motors, and generators. 

C. Load data utilized may include existing and proposed loads obtained from Contract Documents 

provided by Owner or installing Contractor. 

D. Equipment and component titles used in the studies shall be identical to the equipment and 

component titles shown on the Drawings. 

E. Perform studies using digital computer with a software package such as SKM Power*Tools for 

Windows DAPPER, CAPTOR and ARC FLASH, or approved equal. 

F. Perform complete fault calculations for all busses on utility and generator power sources. Perform 

load flow and voltage drop studies for major feeders and loads with long feeder runs. Analysis 

shall include expected fault currents at industrial control panels manufactured in accordance with 

UL 508A and NEC article 409. 

G. Fault source combinations shall include large motors, large transformers, utility and generator. 

H. Utilize proposed and existing load data for the study obtained from Contract Documents and 

field survey. Coordinate with local power utility for available fault currents from utility services. 

I. Existing Equipment: 

1. Include fault contribution of existing motors, services, generators and equipment, as 

appropriate, in the study. 

2. Obtain required existing equipment data from the field and FPL. 

J. Provide a comprehensive report document containing the short circuit, device coordination and 

arc flash studies. As a minimum the report structure shall contain the following: 

1. Executive Summary. 

2. Methodology. 

3. One Line Diagram(s). 

4. Short Circuit Analysis. 

5. Short Circuit Analysis Results/Conclusions/Recommendations. 

6. Device Coordination Analysis. 

7. Recommended protective devices settings. 

8. Arc Flash Analysis. 

9. Arc Flash PPE recommendations. 




2.2 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY 

A. General: 


1. Use cable impedances based on copper conductors. Use actual conductor impedances if 

know. If unknown, use typical conductor impedances based on IEEE Standards 141, latest 

edition. 

2. Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars. 

3. Use cable and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees C. 

4. Use 600-volt cable reactances based on use of typical data of conductors to be used in this 

project. 

5. Use transformer impedances 92.5 percent of "nominal" impedance based on tolerances 

specified in ANSI C57.12.00. 

B. Provide: 

1. Calculation methods and assumptions. 

2. Selected base per unit quantities. 

3. One-line diagrams annotated with results of short circuit analysis including: 

a. Three phase, line-to-line and single line to ground faults. 

b. Equipment Short Circuit Rating. 

4. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution 


5. DAPPER Short circuit report, demand load report, load flow report and input data reports. 

6. Results, conclusions, and recommendations. 

C. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed 

symmetrical three-phase bolted fault, bolted line-to-ground fault, and bolted line-to-line fault at 

each: 

1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 

2. Main breakers, generator breakers and feeder breakers. 

3. Low voltage switchgear, switchboard and/or distribution panelboard. 

4. Unit substations. 

5. Motor control centers. 

6. Standby generator. 

7. Automatic Transfer Switch (if applicable). 

8. All branch circuit panelboards. 




9. Variable Frequency Drives. 


10. Industrial control panels manufactured in accordance with UL 508A and NEC article 409. 

11. Other significant locations throughout the system. 

12. Future load contributions as shown on one-line diagram. 

D. Protective Device Evaluation: 

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short circuit ratings Verify all 

equipment, main breakers, ATS, and protective devices are applied within their ratings. 

2. Adequacy of switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, unit substations and 

panelboard bus bar bracing to withstand short-circuit stresses 

3. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short-circuit stresses 

4. Cable and busway sizes for ability to withstand short-circuit heating besides normal load 

currents. 

5. Notify Owner in writing, of existing, circuit protective devices improperly rated for the 

calculated available fault current 

2.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 

A. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for distribution system, graphically 

displayed on log-log scale paper. Time Current Curve plots from SKM CAPTOR program are 

acceptable. 

B. Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of 

system associated with time-current curves on that sheet. 

C. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or 

asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed. 

D. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, tap, 

time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended. 

E. Perform device coordination on time-current curves for low voltage distribution system(s). 

F. Provide Individual protective device time-current characteristics on log-log paper or software 

generated graphs. 

G. Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets: 

1. Electric utility's relays or protective device (if applicable). 

2. Electric utility's fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and 

damage bands (if applicable). 

3. Medium voltage equipment relays (if applicable). 

4. Medium and low voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, 

tolerance, and damage bands. 





5. Low voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturer’s tolerance bands. 

6. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI transformer withstand 

parameters. 

7. Transformer damage curves. 

8. Conductor damage curves. 

9. ANSI transformer with stand parameters. 

10. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. 

11. Ground fault protective devices and settings (if applicable). 

12. Pertinent motor starting characteristics and motor damage points. 

13. Pertinent generator short circuit decrement curve and generator damage point. 

14. Circuit breaker panelboard main breakers, where appropriate. 

15. Motor circuit protectors for major motors 

H. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is 

provided, while providing proper protection. 

I. Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer: 

1. Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary protective device operating band within 

the transformer's characteristics curve, including a point equal to 58 percent of ANSI 

C57.12.00 withstand point. 

2. Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin between primary protective device 

and associated secondary device characteristic curves. 

J. Separate medium voltage relay characteristics curves from curves for other devices by at least 

0.4-second time margin. 

2.4 ARC FLASH ANALYSIS 

A. Perform incident energy calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584-2002 Guide for Performing 

Arc Flash Hazard Calculations for all equipment analyzed in the short circuit study. Tabular 

results and recommended labels from SKM ARC FLASH are acceptable. 

B. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent 

devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. 

C. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant 

locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, 

panelboards, bussway and unit substations, variable frequency drives, and industrial control 

panels) where work could be performed on energized parts. 

D. The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all medium voltage, low voltage and significant 

locations in 240 volt and 208 volt systems fed from transformers equal to or greater than 125 

kVA. Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis on low voltage systems 120V and below is not required. 





E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based upon the calculated 

arc flash boundary considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2. 

F. The Arc Flash Hazard analysis shall include calculations for maximum and minimum 

contributions of fault current magnitude. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility 

contribution is at a minimum and shall assume a minimum motor load. Conversely, the maximum 

calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall assume motors to be 

operating under full-load conditions. 

G. Arc flash computation shall include both line and load side of main breaker calculations, where 

necessary. 

H. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. 

Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2. 

I. Furnish recommendations for Personal Protective Equipment, in accordance with OSHA 

standards, and proper labels to be located on the electrical equipment in accordance with NEC 

Article 110.16. 

J. Use manufacturer data for: enclosure type; gap between exposed conductors or buss way; 

grounding type; number of phases and connection; and working distance. 

2.5 TABULATIONS 

A. Input Data: 

1. Three-phase and line-to-ground available contribution with associated X/R ratios. 

2. Short circuit reactances of rotating machines and associated X/R ratios. 

3. Cable type, construction, size, quantity per phase, length, impedance and conduit type. 

4. Bus data, including impedance. 

5. Transformer primary & secondary voltages, winding configurations, kVA rating, impedance, 

and X/R ratio. 

B. Short Circuit Data: 

1. Source fault impedance and generator contributions. 

2. X to R ratios. 

3. Asymmetry factors. 

4. Motor contributions. 

5. Short circuit kVA. 

6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. 

C. Recommended Protective Device Settings: 

1. Phase and ground relays: 

a. Relay name. 




. Device number. 

c. Description. 

d. TCC catalog number. 

e. Short circuit ratings. 

f. Current transformer ratio. 

g. Current tap. 

h. Time dial setting (as applicable). 

i. Instantaneous pickup setting (as applicable). 

j. Ground fault setting (as applicable). 

k. Specialty, non-overcurrent device settings. 

l. Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable 

2. Circuit Breakers: 

a. Breaker name. 

b. Breaker Description. 

c. Model number. 


e. Short circuit rating. 

f. Frame/Sensor rating. 

g. Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground). 

h. Adjustable time-current characteristic. 

i. Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 

j. Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable 

3. Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP): 

a. MCP name. 

b. MCP Description. 




f. Frame/Sensor rating. 

g. Instantaneous settings. 

4. Fuses: 

a. Fuse name. 

b. Fuse Description. 




f. Fuse rating. 

D. Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations. 

1. Arcing fault magnitude 

2. Device clearing time 

3. Duration of arc 

4. Arc flash boundary 

5. Working distance 

6. Incident energy 

7. Hazard Risk Category 

8. Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction 

2.6 STUDY ANALYSES 

A. Written Summary: 





1. Scope of studies performed. 

2. Explanation of bus and branch numbering system. 

3. Prevailing conditions. 

4. Selected equipment deficiencies. 

5. Results of short circuit and coordination studies. 

6. Comments or suggestions. 

B. Suggest changes and additions to equipment rating and/or characteristics. 


C. Notify Engineer in writing of existing circuit protective devices improperly rated for new fault 

conditions. 

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 

3.1 GENERAL 

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established by coordination study. 

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with the short 

circuit and protective device coordination studies. 

C. Notify Engineer in writing of any required major equipment modifications. 






SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND 

METHODS 





a. C55,1, Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors. 

b. C62.11, Standard for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Circuits. 

c. Z55.1, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment. 

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel 

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 

b. A240, Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel 

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 

c. A570, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, 

Structural Quality. 

3. Federal Specifications (FS): 

a. W-C-596, Connector, Receptacle, Electrical. 

b. W-S-896E, Switches, Toggle, Flush Mounted. 

4. National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard of 

Installation. 

5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 

a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 

b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. 

c. c. CP I, Shunt Capacitors. 

d. ICS 2, Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 

e. e. KS 1, Enclosed Switches. 

f. f. LA I, Surge Arrestors. 

g. g. PB 1, Panelboards. 

h. h. ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications. 

i. i. WD I, General Requirements for Wiring Devices. 






6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 

7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 

a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. 

b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. 

c. 198C, Standard for Safety High-Interrupting-Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting 

Types. 

d. 198E, Standard for Class Q Fuses. 

e. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals. 

f. 489, Standard for Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. 

g. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 

h. 810, Standard for Capacitors. 

i. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters. 

j. 1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks. 

k. 1561, Standard for Dry-Type General-Purpose and Power Transformers. 

A. Shop Drawings: 

1. Hardware. 

2. Panelboards and circuit breaker data. 

3. Fuses 

4. Transformers. 

5. All other miscellaneous material part of this project. 

6. Wire pulling compound. 

B. Quality Control Submittals: 

1. Test Report: Sound test certification for dry type power transformers (O to 600-volt, 

primary). 


A. UL Compliance: Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall 

conform to UL Standards and have an applied UL listing mark. 

1.4 SPARE PARTS 

A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts: 

1. Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current rating installed. 





2.1 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES 

A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc- or cadmium-plated. 

B. Cast Metal: 

1. Box: Cast ferrous metal. 


2. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast ferrous metal, with stainless steel screws. 

3. Hubs: Threaded. 

4. Lugs (Cast Mounting) Manufacturer: 

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type FS or FD. 

b. Appleton; Type FS or FD. 

C. Cast Aluminum: 

1. Material: 

a. Box: Cast, copper-free aluminum. 

b. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, cast copper-free aluminum with stainless steel 

screws. 

2. Hubs: Threaded. 

3. Lugs: Cast mounting. 

4. Manufacturers: 

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type FS-SA or FD-SA. 

b. Appleton; Type FS or FD. 

D. PVC-Coated Sheet Steel: 

1. Type: One-piece. 

2. Material: Zinc- or cadmium-plated. 

3. Coating: All surfaces; 40-mil PVC. 

4. Manufacturer: Appleton. 

E. Nonmetallic: 

1. Box: PVC. 

2. Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws. 

3. Manufacturer: Carlon; Type FS or FD, with Type E98 or E96 covers. 




2.2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 


A. Outlet Boxes Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article OUTLET AND 

DEVICE BOXES. 

B. Large Sheet Steel Box: NEMA 250, Type 1. 

1. Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel. 

2. Cover: Full access, screw type. 

3. Machine Screws: Corrosion-resistant. 

C. Large Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

1. Box: Cast malleable iron, hot-dip galvanize finished, with drilled and tapped conduit 

entrances. 

2. Cover: Hinged with screws. 

3. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 

4. Manufacturers, Surface Mounted Type: 

a. Crouse-Hinds; Series W. 

b. O.Z./Gedney; Series Y. 

5. Manufacturers, Recessed Type: 

a. Crouse-Hinds; Type WJBF. 

b. O.Z./Gedney; Series YR. 

D. Large Stainless Steel Box: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 

1. Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240, Type 304 stainless steel. 




a. Hoffman Engineering Co. 

b. Robroy Industries. 

E. Large Steel Box: NEMA 250, Type 4. 

1. Box: 12-gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed exterior, 

over phosphated surfaces, with final ANSI Z55.1, No. 61 gray enamel on exterior 

surfaces. 







a. Hoffman Engineering Co. 

b. Robroy Industries. 

F. Large Nonmetallic Box: 

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X. 


2. Box: High-impact, fiberglass-reinforced polyester or engineered thermoplastic, with 

stability to high heat. 



5. Conduit hubs and mounting lugs. 


a. Crouse-Hinds; Type NJB. 

b. Carlon; Series N, C, or H. 

c. Robroy Industries. 

2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKER, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS 

A. NEMA AB I, UL 489 listed for use at location of installation. 

B. Minimum Interrupt Rating: As shown or as required. 

C. Thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, indicating type, showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED 

indicating positions of the operating handle. 

D. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. 

E. Locking: Provisions for padlocking handle. 

F. Multipole breakers to automatically open all poles when an overload occurs on one-pole. 

G. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, Industrial Use, 4X - outdoors, wet locations and corrosive 

areas, unless otherwise shown. 

H. Interlock: Enclosure and switch shall interlock to prevent opening cover with switch in the 

ON position. 

I. Do not provide single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties where multipole circuit breakers 

are shown. 

2.4 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, 0 TO 600 VOLTS 

A. NEMA KS 1. 





B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external 

markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions. 

C. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. 

D. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12, industrial use, 4X- outdoors, wet locations and corrosive 

areas, unless otherwise shown. 

E. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in the ON position. 

2.5 TERMINAL BLOCK (0 TO 600 VOLTS) 

A. UL 486E and UL 1059. 

B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes. 

C. Capable of termination of all control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes. 

D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact 

with wire between the compression screw and yoke. 

E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal. 

F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal. 

G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection. 

H. Terminals: 

1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping. 

2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space. 

3. Individual, rail mounted. 

I. Marking system allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags. 

J. Manufacturers: 

1. Weidmuller. 

2. Ideal. 

3. Electrovert. 

2.6 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS 

A. Material: 

1. Dry indoors - galvanized. 

2. All Other Areas: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel or fiber-reinforced epoxy, as 

required. 




B. Finish: 

1. Dry indoors - galvanized. 


2. All Other Areas: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel or fiber-reinforced epoxy, as 

required. 

C. Inserts: Continuous. 

D. Beam Clamps: Gray cast iron. 


1. B-Line. 

2. Unistrut. 

2.7 NAMEPLATES 

A. Material: Laminated plastic. 

B. Attachment Screws: Stainless steel. 

C. Color: White, engraved to a black core. 

D. Engraving: 

1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: Name of drive controlled on one, two, or three lines, 

as required. 

2. Panelboards: Panelboard designation, service voltage, and phases. 

E. Letter Height: 

1. Pushbuttons/Selector Switches: 1/8 inch. 

2. Panelboards: 1/4 inch. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Install equipment in accordance with NECA 5055. 

3.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES 

A. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in the wiring or raceway 

system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 

B. Size: 

1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box 

extensions not permitted. 





a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such that conduit 

knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space. 

2. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch sheet steel device box. 

C. Locations: 

1. Drawing locations are approximate. 

2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features, relocate 

outlets as directed by ENGINEER. 

D. Mounting Height: 

1. General: 

a. Measured to centerline of box. 

b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, mount as 

directed by ENGINEER. 

E. Install plumb and level. 

F. Flush Mounted: 

1. Install with concealed conduit. 

2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of boxes flush 

with finished surface. 

3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. 

G. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural 

member. 

H. Install bar hangers in frame construction, or fasten boxes directly with wood screws on wood, 

bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and 

machine screws threaded into steelwork. 

I. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are 

acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. 

J. Provide plaster rings where necessary. 

K. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. 

L. Install stainless steel mounting hardware in industrial areas. 

M. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support 

fixture. 

N. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused 

openings. 

O. Box Type (Steel Raceway System): 




1. Exterior Locations: 

a. Exposed Raceways: Cast metal. 

b. Concealed Raceways: Cast metal. 

c. Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal. 

d. Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal. 

2. Interior Dry Locations: 

a. Exposed Rigid Conduit: Cast metal. 

b. Exposed EMT: Sheet steel. 

c. Concealed Raceways: Sheet steel. 

d. Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal. 

e. Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Sheet steel. 

f. Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal. 

3. Interior Wet Locations: 

a. Exposed Raceways: Cast metal. 

b. Concealed Raceways: Cast metal. 

c. Concrete Encased Raceways: Cast metal. 

d. Lighting Circuits, Ceiling: Sheet steel. 

e. Class I, II, or III Hazardous Areas: Cast metal. 

4. Cast-In-Place Concrete Slabs: Sheet steel. 

P. Box Type (Rigid Aluminum Raceway System): Cast aluminum. 

Q. Box Type (Nonmetallic Raceway System): 

1. Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic. 

2. Exposed Raceways: Nonmetallic. 

3. Concealed Raceways: Nonmetallic. 

4. Concrete Encased Raceways: Nonmetallic. 


R. Box Type, Corrosive Locations (PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Raceway System): PVC 

coated cast metal.. 

3.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 

A. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit 

runs. 

B. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation. 





C. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right-angle 

bends. 

D. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable 

codes. 

E. Installed boxes shall be accessible. 

F. Do not install on finished surfaces. 

G. Install plumb and level. 

H. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural 

member. 

I. Install bar hangers in frame construction, or fasten boxes directly with wood screws on wood, 

bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, and 

machine screws or welded threaded studs on steelwork. 

J. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are 

acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. 

K. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. 

L. At or Below Grade: 

1. Install boxes for below grade conduits flush with finished grade in locations outside of 

paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 

2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just 

above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location. 

3. Obtain ENGINEER's written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, 

roadways, or walkways. 

4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights. 

M. Flush Mounted: 

1. Install with concealed conduit. 

2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. 

3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface. 

N. Mounting Hardware: 

1. Noncorrosive Interior Areas: Galvanized. 

2. All Other Areas: Stainless steel. 

O. Location/Type: 

1. Finished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 1. 




2. Unfinished, Indoor, Dry: NEMA 250, Type 12. 


3. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet and Corrosive: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 

4. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Wet, Dust, or Oil: NEMA 250, Type 13. 

5. Unfinished, Indoor and Outdoor, Hazardous: NEMA 250, Type 7 and Type 9, where 

indicated. 

6. Underground Conduit: Concrete Encased. 

7. Corrosive Locations: Nonmetallic. 

3.4 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL 

A. Furnish zinc-rich primer; paint cut ends prior to installation, where applicable. 

B. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment and raceway 

systems. 







SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 

A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 


1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 

Division I, Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Fourteenth Edition. 


a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated. 

b. C80.3, Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated. 

c. CS0.5, Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 

d. C80.6, Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)-Zinc Coated. 


a. A123 El, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Coatings on Iron 

and Steel Products. 

b. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground 

Precast Concrete Utility Structures. 

4. National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard of 

Installation. 


a. RN 1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit 

and Intermediate Metal Conduit. 

b. TC 2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). 

c. TC 3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 

d. TC 6, PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. 

e. VE 1, Metallic Cable Tray Systems. 

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC) 


a. 1, Standard for Safety Flexible Metal Conduit. 

b. 6, Standard for Safety Rigid Metal Conduit. 

c. 360, Standard for Safety Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 

d. 514B, Standard for Safety Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. 






e. 514C, Standard for Safety Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and 

Covers. 

f. 651, Standard for Safety Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit. 

g. 651A, Standard for Safety Type EB and Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPF Conduit. 

h. 797, Standard for Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing. 

i. 870, Standard for Safety Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. 

j. 1242, Standard for Safety Intermediate Metal Conduit. 

k. 1660, Standard for Safety Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 


1. Manufacturer's Literature: 

a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit. 

b. Electric metallic tubing. 

c. Rigid aluminum conduit. 

d. PVC Schedule 40 conduit. 

e. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit. 

f. Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. 

g. Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid-tight conduit. 

h. Conduit fittings. 

i. Wireways. 

2. Precast Manholes and Handholes: 

a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature. 

b. Traffic loading calculations. 

c. Accessory information. 

3. Cable Tray Systems: 

a. Dimensional drawings, calculations, and descriptive information. 

b. NEMA load/span designation and how it was selected. 

c. Support span length and pounds-per-foot actual and future cable loading at 

locations, with safety factor used. 

d. Location and magnitude of maximum simple beam deflection of tray for loading 

specified. 

e. Layout drawings and list of accessories being provided. 

4. Conduit Layout: 

a. Plan and section type, showing arrangement and location of conduit and duct bank 

required for: 




1.3 UL COMPLIANCE 

1) Low and medium voltage feeder and branch circuits. 

2) Instrumentation and control systems. 

3) Communications systems. 

4) Empty conduit for future use. 

b. Reproducible mylar; scale not greater than 1 inch equals 20 feet. 


1) Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit. 

2) Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees. 

A. Materials manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL 

Standards and have an applied UL listing mark. 


2.1 CONDUIT AND TUBING 

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 

1. Meet requirements of ANSI C80.1 and UL6. 

2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated protective layer. 

B. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): 

1. Meet requirements of ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 

2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized, with chromated and lacquered protective layer. 

C. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit: 

1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors. 

2. Material: Galvanized steel, with an extruded PVC jacket. 

D. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit: 

1. Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket. 

2. UL 1660 listed for: 

a. Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors. 

b. Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors. 


a. Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex. 

b. T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC. 




2.2 FITTINGS 

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: 

1. General: 

a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 

b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw fittings not permitted. 

2. Bushing: 


a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C. 

b. Manufacturers: 

1) Thomas & Betts; Type BIM. 

2) O.Z./Gedney; Type HB. 

3. Grounding Bushing: 

a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with 

solderless lugs. 


1) Appleton; Series GIB. 

2) O.Z. Gedney; Type HBLG. 

4. Conduit Hub: 

a. Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat. 


1) O.Z. Gedney; Series CH. 

2) T & B; Series 370. 

5. Conduit Bodies: 

a. Material: Malleable iron, sized as required by NFPA 70. 

b. Manufacturers (For Normal Conditions): 

1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded Unilets. 

2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or 8 threaded condulets. 

3) Killark; Series O Electrolets. 

c. c. Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations): 

1) Appleton. 

2) Crouse-Hinds. 

3) Killark. 

6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 

7. Conduit Sealing Fitting Manufacturers: 

a. Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU. 

b. Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS. 




c. Killark; Type EY or EYS. 

8. Drain Seal Manufacturers: 

a. Appleton; Type SF. 

b. Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or EZD. 

9. Drain/Breather Fitting Manufacturers: 

a. Appleton; Type ECDB. 

b. Crouse-Hinds; ECD. 

10. Expansion Fitting Manufacturers: 

a. Deflection/Expansion Movement: 

1) Appleton; Type DF. 

2) Crouse-Hinds; Type XD. 

b. Expansion Movement Only: 

1) Appleton; Type XJ. 

2) Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ. 

11. Cable Sealing Fittings: 


a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. 

b. For Conductors With OD of 1/2 Inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at connector entry. 

c. Manufacturers: 

1) Crouse-Hinds; CGBS. 

2) Appleton; CG-S. 

B. Electric Metallic Tubing: 

1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 

2. Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression nuts. Set 

screw and drive-on fittings not permitted. 

3. Compression Ring: Stainless steel. 

4. Coupling Manufacturers: 

a. Appleton; Type 95T. 

b. Crouse-Hinds; Type CPR. 

5. Connector Manufacturers: 

a. Appleton; Type 86T. 

b. Crouse-Hinds; Type CPR. 




C. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit: 


1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 

105 degrees C. 

2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings. 

3. Long design type extending outside of box or other device at least 2 inches. 

4. Manufacturer: T & B; Series 5300. 

D. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit: Meet requirements of UL 514B. 

1. Type: One-piece fitting body, complete with lock nut, O-ring, threaded ferrule, 

sealing ring, and compression nut. 


a. Carlon; Type LT. 

b. Kellems; Polytuff. 

c. T & B; LT Series. 

E. Watertight Entrance Seal Device: 

2.3 WIREWAYS 

1. New Construction: 

a. Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring, pressure ring, 

grommet seal, and pressure clamp. 

b. Manufacturer: O.Z./Gedney; Type FSK or WSK, as required. 

2. Gored-Hole Application: 

a. Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane 

clamp. 

b. Manufacturer: O.Z./Gedney; Series CSM. 

A. Meet requirements of UL 870. 

B. Type: Steel-enclosed, with removable, hinged cover. 

C. Rating: Outdoor raintight if outdoor, and indoor if indoor. 

D. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 


1. Square D. 

2. B-Line Systems, Inc. 





A. Identification Devices: 

1. Raceway Tags: 


a. Material: Permanent, nylon. 

b. Shape: Round. 

c. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. 

d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted. 

B. Raceway Coating: 

1. Material: Bitumastic or plastic tape coating. 


a. Koppers bitumastic; No. 505. 

b. Scotchwrap; No. 51, plastic tape. 

C. Wraparound Duct Band: 

1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive. 

2. Manufacturer: Raychem; Type TWDB. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Conduit and Tubing sizes shown are based on the use of copper conductors. Reference 

Section 16120, CONDUCTORS, concerning conduit sizing for aluminum conductors. 

B. All installed Work shall comply with NECA 5055. 

C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted. 

D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture. 

E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust-tight seals 

until time for pulling in conductors. 

F. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above 

sealing fitting. 

G. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide 

junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point. 

H. Group raceways installed in same area. 

I. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs. 





J. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of 

passageways. 

K. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or 

intersections of vertical planes. 

L. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course with reinforcing steel. 

M. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations. 

N. Paint threads, before assembly of fittings, of galvanized conduit or IMC installed in exposed 

or damp locations with zinc-rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound. 

O. All metal conduit to be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, 

wires, or cables. 

P. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams. 

Q. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part 

embedded within slab. 

R. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to 

surface and have no curved portion exposed. 

3.2 CONDUIT APPLICATION 

A. Diameter: Minimum 3/4 inch. 

B. Exterior, Exposed: 

1. Rigid galvanized steel. 

C. Interior, Exposed: 


1. Rigid galvanized steel. 

2. Electric metallic tubing in a conditioned environment. 

A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically 

operated valves, instrumentation, and other equipment where flexible connection is required 

to minimize vibration: 

1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. 

2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible. 

3. Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic, liquid or PVC-coated metallic, liquid-tight. 

4. Length: 18-inch minimum, 60-inch maximum, of sufficient length to allow movement 

or adjustment of equipment. 





B. Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltight and 

Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. 

C. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. 

3.4 PENETRATIONS 

A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown. 

B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted. 

C. Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Fire-stop openings around penetrations to maintain fireresistance 

rating. 

D. Apply single layer of wraparound duct band to all metallic conduit in contact with concrete 

floor slabs to a point 2 inches above concrete surface. 

E. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry-pack, or use 

watertight seal device. 

F. Entering Structures: 

3.5 SUPPORT 

1. General: Seal raceway at the first box or outlet with minimum 2 inches thick 

expandable plastic compound to prevent the entrance of gases or liquids from one 

area to another. 

2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor: 

a. Provide a watertight seal. 

b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on each 

side. 

c. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on the 

accessible side. 

d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal device into 

construction with one or more integral flanges. 

e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a 

permanent, watertight manner. 

3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: 

a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. 

b. Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or condulet attached to 

exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment. 

c. Seal penetration with silicone type sealant as specified in Section 07270, FIRE 

STOPPING. 

A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements, and 

in any case not exceeding 10 feet. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other 

raceways. 




3.6 BENDS 


B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze-supported conduit, allow 40 

percent extra space for future conduit. 

C. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows: 

1. Wood: Wood screws. 

2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 

3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, 

with lock washers and nuts. 

4. Steelwork: Machine screws. 

D. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. 

Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or 

hangers. 

A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. 

B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. 

C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. 

D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or 

bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending. 

E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so 

that bends are parallel. 

F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of 

run, and raceways are same size. 

G. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of 

cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility. 

3.7 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS 

A. Provide on all raceways at all structural expansion joints, and in long tangential runs. 

B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 50 degrees F maximum temperature variation. 

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3.8 WIREWAYS 


B. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown. 




3.9 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES 


A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Provide manufacturer's premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic 

conduit terminating in threaded hubs. 

B. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: 

1. Rigid Galvanized Conduit: 

a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. 

b. Install grounding bushing. 

c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or 

ground pad; if neither ground bus nor pad exists, connect jumper to lag bolt 

attached to metal enclosure. 

d. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required. 

e. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having 

threaded hubs. 

2. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide gland compression, insulated connectors. 

3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors. 

4. Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain relief 

connectors. 

C. Motor Control Center, Switchboard, Switchgear, and Free-Standing Enclosures: Terminate 

conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide a grounding jumper extending to 

equipment ground bus or grounding pad. 

3.10 EMPTY RACEWAYS 

A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end. 

B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells. 

C. Provide nylon pull cord. 

D. Identify, as specified in Paragraph IDENTIFICATION DEVICES, with waterproof tags 

attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point. 

3.11 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 

A. Raceway Tags: 

1. Identify origin and destination. 

2. Install at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every 50 feet of 

exposed Raceway, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted. 

3. Provide nylon strap for attachment. 




3.12 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 


A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during 

construction. 

B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over all conduit openings 

during construction. 

C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars. 

D. Touch up damage to coating on PVC-coated conduit with patching compound approved by 

manufacturer. 







SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS 



1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 386, Standard for Separable Insulated 

Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V. 


a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel- 

P1ated Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 

b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 

c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, 

Medium-Hard, or Soft. 

d. B263, Standard Test Method for Determination of Cross- Sectional Area of 

Stranded Conductors. 

3. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC): 

a. CS 5, Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 

35 kV. 

b. CS 6, Ethylene- Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 

Through 69 kV. 

4. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, Inc. (ICEA): T-29-250, Procedure for 

Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test With a Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 

Btu/hour. 

5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 

a. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements or High-Voltage Alternating 

Current Cable Terminations. 

b. 404, Standard for Cable Joints for Use with Extruded Dielectric Cable Rated 

5,000V through 46,000V and Cable Joints for Use with Laminated Dielectric Cable 

Rated 2,500V through 500,000V. 

6. National Electrical Contractors Association, Inc. (NECA): 5055, Standard of 

Installation. 

7. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 

a. CC 1, Electric Power Connectors for Substations. 

b. WC 3, Rubber-insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of 

Electrical Energy. 






c. WC 5, Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and 

Distribution of Electrical Energy. 

d. WC 7, Crosslinked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene-lnsulated Wire and Cable for the 

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 

e. WC 8, Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission 

and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 

f. WC 55, Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire. 



a. 13, Standard for Safety Power-Limited Circuit Cables. 

b. 44, Standard for Safety Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables. 

c. 62, Standard for Safety Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. 

d. 486A, Standard for Safety Wire Connector and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper 

Conductors. 

e. 486B, Standard for Safety Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with 

Aluminum Conductors. 

f. 510, Standard for Safety Insulating Tape. 

g. 854, Standard for Safety Service-Entrance Cables. 

h. 910, Standard for Safety Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of 

Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Air Handling Spaces. 

i. 1072, Standard for Safety Medium-Voltage Power Cables. 

j. 1277, Standard for Safety Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional 

Optical-Fiber Members. 

k. 1581, Standard for Safety Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and 

Flexible Cords. 


1. Wire and cable descriptive product information. 

2. Wire and cable accessories descriptive product information. 

3. Cable fault detection system descriptive product information. 

4. Manufactured wiring systems descriptive product information. 

5. Manufactured wire systems rating information. 

6. Manufactured wire systems dimensional drawings. 

7. Manufactured wire systems special fittings. 

8. Busway descriptive product information. 




9. Busway rating information. 

10. Busway dimensional drawings. 

11. Busway special fitting information. 


12. Busway-equipment interface information for equipment to be connected to busways. 

B. Quality Control Submittals: 


1. Certified Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below. 

2. Certified Factory Test Report per AEIC CS6, including AEIC qualification report for 

conductors above 600 volts. 




2.1 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 

A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 3, WC 5, and WC 7. 

B. Conductor Type: 

1. 120- and 277-Volt Lighting, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded copper. 

2. 120-Volt Receptacle Circuits, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded copper. 

3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper. 

C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN, except for sizes No. 6 and larger, with XHHW insulation. 

2.2 CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS 

A. EPR Insulated Cable: 

1. Extrusion: Single-pass, triple-tandem, of conductor screen, insulation, and insulation 

screen. 

2. Type: 5 kV, shielded, UL 1072, Type MV-90. 

3. Conductors: Copper, concentric lay Class B round stranded in accordance with 

ASTM B3, ASTM B8, and ASTM B263. 

4. Conductor Screen: Extruded, semiconducting ethylene-propylene rubber in 

accordance with NEMA WC 8 and AEIC CS 6. 

5. Insulation: 133 percent insulation level, ethylene-propylene-rubber (EPR), containing 

no polyethylene in accordance with NEMA WC 8, and AEIC CS 6. 




6. Insulation Thickness: 90 mils, 5 kV, nominal. 


7. Insulation Screen: Thermosetting, semiconducting ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR), 

extruded directly over insulation in accordance with NEMA WC 8, and AEIC CS 6. 

8. Metallic Shield: Uncoated, copper shielding tape helically applied with 17-1/2 percent 

minimum overlap. 

9. Jacket: Extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound applied over the metallic shield 

in accordance with NEMA WC 8. 

10. Operating Temperature: 90 degrees C continuous normal operations, 130 degrees C 

emergency operating conditions, and 250 degrees C short-circuit conditions. 


a. Okonite Co. 

b. Pirelli Wire and Cable. 

c. Cablec Corp. 

d. Southwire. 

2.3 600-VOLT RATED CABLE 

A. General: 

1. Type: TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 

20,000 Btu/hr, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 Listed Power Limited Circuit Cable 

meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725. 

2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working 

voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 

3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 

4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet 

locations. 

5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant. 

B. Wire and Connectors: 

1. Cable shall be rated for 600 volts and shall meet the requirements below: 

2. Conductors shall be stranded 

3. All wire shall be brought to the job in unbroken packages and shall bear the data of 

manufacturing; not older than 12 months. 

4. Type of wire shall be XHHW or THHN, rated 75 degrees C suitable for wet locations 

except where required otherwise by the drawings. 

5. No wire smaller than No. 12 gauge shall be used unless specifically indicated. 




6. Conductor metal shall be copper. 


7. All conductors shall be megger tested after installation and insulation must be in 

compliance with the Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Minimum Values 

of Insulation Resistance. 

C. Type l-Multiconductor Control Cable: 

1. Conductors: 

a. No. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper. 

b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon. 

c. UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-I. 

d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape. 

e. Color Code: In accordance with NEMA WC 5, Method 1, Sequence K-2. 

2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test. 

3. Cable Sizes: 


No. of 

Conductors 


b. Rome Cable. 

D. Type 2-Multiconductor Power Cable: 


Max. Outside 

Diameter (inches) 

Jacket Thickness 

(mils) 

3 0.41 45 

5 0.48 45 

7 0.52 45 

12 0.72 60 

19 00.83 60 

25 1.00 60 

37 1.15 80 

a. Class B stranded, coated copper. 

b. Insulation: Chemically crosslinked ethylene-propylene with Hypalon jacket. 

c. UL 1581 listed as Type EPR, rated VW-1. 

d. Color Code: Conductors, size No. 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors, NEMA 

WC5 Method 1, color 5 per Article POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING. 

Conductors, size No. 6 AWG and larger, NEMA WC5, Method 4. 

2. Cable pass the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test. 





Conductor 

Size 


Minimum 

Ground Wire 

Size 

No. of 

Conductors 

12 12 2 

3 

4 

10 10 2 

3 

4 

8 10 3 

4 

6 8 3 

4 

4 6 3 

4 

2 6 3 

4 

1/0 6 3 

4 

2/0 4 3 

4 

4/0 4 3 

4 


Max.Outside 

Diameter 

(Inches) 

0.42 

0.45 

0.49 

0.54 

0.58 

0.63 

0.66 

0.72 

0.74 

0.81 

0.88 

0.97 

1.01 

1.11 

1.22 

1.35 

1.32 

1.46 

1.56 

1.78 

Nominal Jacket 

Thickness (Mils) 

45 

45 

45 

60 

60 

60 

60 


b. Pome Cable. 

E. Type B-No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for 

noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 55 

requirements. 

1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 

2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped 

to provide 100 percent coverage. 

3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD. 


a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting 

requirements of ASTM B8 

b. 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. 

c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. 

d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. 



Permit Set 

60 

60 

80 

80 

80 

80 

80

e. Color Code: Pair conductors black and red. 



b. Alpha Wire Corp. 


6. The following test shall be performed on instrumentation and control system cables. 

All tests shall be end-to-end test of installed cables with the ends supported in free 

air, not adjacent to any ground object. All test data shall be recorded on forms 

acceptable to the Engineer. Complete records of all tests shall be made and 

delivered to the Engineer. 

a. Continuity tests shall be performed by measuring wire/shield loop resistances of 

signal cable as the wires, taken one at a time, are shorted to the channel shield. 

No loop resistance measurement shall carry by more than +2 ohms from the 

calculated average loop resistance valve. 

b. Insulation resistance tests shall be performed by using a 500 volt megohmeter to 

measure the insulation resistance between each channel wire and channel shield, 

between individual channel shields in a multi-channel cable, between each 

individual channel and the overall cable shield in multi-channel cable, between 

each wire and ground, and between each shield and ground. Values of resistance 

less than 10 megohms shall be unacceptable. 

F. Type B1-No. 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed 

for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 


1. 1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal. 

2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, 

overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 

3. Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD. 


a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting 

b. 

requirements of ASTM B8. 

20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire. 


d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. 

e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and white. 




G. Type B2-No. 18 AWG, Multi-Twisted, Shielded Pairs with a Common, Overall Shield 

Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer 

cable, meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 






a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in accordance with 

ASTM B8 

b. Tinned copper drain wires. 

c. Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18. 

d. Insulation: 15-mil PVC. 

e. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. 

f. Color Code: Pair conductors black and red with red conductor numerically printed 

for group identification. 

g. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer. 

2. Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped for 100 

percent coverage. 



Number 

of Pairs 

Maximum Outside 

Diameter 

(inches) 


Thickness 

(mils) 

4 0.50 45 

8 0.68 60 

12 0.82 60 

16 0.95 80 

24 1.16 80 

36 1.33 80 

50 1.56 80 



H. Type B3-No. 18 AWG, Multi-twisted Pairs with a Common Overall Shield Instrumentation 

Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer cable meeting 

NEMA WC 55. 


a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in accordance with 

ASTM B8. 

b. Tinned copper drain wire size 18 AWG 


d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. 

e. Color Code: Pair conductors black and red, with red conductor numerically printed 

for group identification. 





2. Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped for 100 

percent coverage. 



Number 

Of Pairs 



Maximum Outside 

Diameter 

(inches) 


Thickness 

(mils) 

4 0.46 45 

8 0.63 60 

12 0.75 60 

16 0.83 60 

24 1.06 80 

36 1.21 80 

50 1.42 80 

I. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Output Power Cable: 

1. Section applies to power cables routed between the output of VFD’s and motor 

terminals. 

2. Cable shall be rated for 600 volts type MC and shall meet the requirements below: 

a. Conductors shall be stranded copper. 

b. All wire shall be brought to the job in unbroken packages and shall bear the data of 

manufacturing; not older than 12 months. 

c. Type of wire shall be XHHW or RHW rated 75 degrees C suitable for wet locations. 

d. No wire smaller than No. 12 gauge shall be used unless specifically indicated. 

e. Cable construction shall consist of three insulated current-carrying phase 

conductors and three bare ground conductors, symmetrically placed between the 

phase conductors, and twisted beneath a continuous aluminum armor and overall 

polymeric jacket. 

f. Armor must be continuous corrugated aluminum armor (CCA) manufacture. 

Aluminum interlocked armor (AIA) construction is not acceptable. 

3. Each ground conductor size (circular mil area) shall be one-third (1/3) of the NEC 

required size (circular mil area) for a single ground conductor. If one third of the 

required circular mil area does not correspond to a standard size (circular mil area) of 

construction, the next largest size of standard construction shall be us All conductors 

shall be megger tested after installation and insulation must be in compliance with the 

Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Minimum Values of Insulation 

Resistance. 





a. Southwire – ARMOR-X. 

b. Approved Equal. 

J. Ethernet Cat. 6e UTP Cable (Copper): 


1. Section applies to all Ethernet Cable (Copper) except for Fiber Optic cable. 

2. Conductor Physical Characteristics: 4 twisted pairs (8 conductors), 23 AWG solid 

bare Copper with Polyolefin Insulation. Overall Nominal Diameter: 0.235 inch. 

Operating Temperature Range: -20’C to +75’C. Model Number – 7881A, Belden Inc. 

3. NEC/UL specification CMR, UL444, UL verified category 6. 

4. Manufacturer: 

a. Belden Inc. 

2.4 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS 

A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or THHN/THWN, 

insulation. 

2.5 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 

A. Tape: 

1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33, rated for 90 

degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 

2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 

88. 

3. Arcs and Fireproofing: 

a. 30-mil, elastomer 

b. Manufacturers and Products: 

1) Scotch; Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth tape binder. 

2) Plytnount; Plyarc 30, with Plymount Plyglas glass cloth tape binder. 

B. Identification Devices: 

1. Sleeve: Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed black 

markings. 

2. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped on plate. 

3. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch minimum. 

C. Connectors and Terminations: 

1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors: 




a. Manufacturers and Products: 

1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 

2) Burndy; Insulink. 

3) ILSCO. 

2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator: 



2) Burndy; Insulink. 

3) ILSCO. 

D. Cable Lugs: 

1. In accordance with NEMA CC I. 

2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 

3. Insulated, Locking-Fork, Compression Lugs: 



2) ILSCO; ILSCONS. 

4. Un-insulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: 


1) Square D; Versitide. 

2) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 

3) ILSCO. 

5. Un-insulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators: 


b. Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 

c. Burndy; Quiklug. 

d. ILSCO. 

E. Cable Ties: Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 

1. Manufacturers and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP. 

F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: Thermally stabilized, crosslinked polyofin. 

1. Manufacturers and Product: Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON. 

2.6 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS 

A. Molded Splice Kits: 


1. Components necessary to provide insulation, metallic shielding and grounding 

systems, and overall jacket. 





2. Capable of making splices that has a current rating equal to, or greater than the 

cable ampacity, conforming to IEEE 404. 

3. 25 kV class, with compression connector, EPDM molded semiconductive insert, 

peroxide-cured EPDM insulation, and EPDM molded semiconductive outer shield. 

4. Pre-molded splice shall be re-jacketed with a heat shrinkable adhesive-lined sleeve 

to provide a waterproof seal. 


a. Elastimold. 

b. Cooper industries. 

B. Heat Shrinkable Splice Kits: 

1. Components necessary to provide insulation, metallic shielding and grounding 

systems, and overall jacket. 

2. Capable of making splices that has a current rating equal to, or greater than the 

cable ampacity, conforming to IEEE 404. 

3. 25 kV class, with compression connector, splice insulating and conducting sleeves, 

stress-relief materials, shielding braid and mesh, and abrasion-resistant heat 

shrinkable adhesive-lined re-jacketing sleeve to provide a waterproof seal. 


a. Raychem. 

b. 3M Co. 

C. Termination Kits: 

1. Capable of terminating a 25 kV, single-conductor, polymeric-insulated shielded 

cables plus a shield ground clamp. 

2. Capable of producing a termination with a current rating equal to, or greater than, the 

cable ampacity, meeting Class 1 requirements of IEEE 48. 

3. Capable of accommodating any form of cable shielding or construction without the 

need for special adapters and/or accessories. 


a. Raychem. 

b. 3M Co. 

D. Bus Connection Insulation: 

1. Heat shrinkable tubing, tape, and sheets of flexible crosslinked polymeric material 

formulated for high dielectric strength. 

2. Tape and sheet products to have coating to prevent adhesion to metal surfaces. 

3. Insulating materials to be removable and reusable. 




4. Manufacturer: Raychem. 

E. Cable Lugs: 

1. In accordance with NEMA CCI. 

2. Rated 25 kV of same material as conductor metal. 


3. Manufacturers and Products, Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: 

a. Square D; Versitide. 

b. Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 

c. ILSCO. 

4. Manufacturers and Products, Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and 

Terminators: 

a. Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 

b. Burndy; Quiklug. 

c. JLSCO. 

2.7 PULLING COMPOUND 

A. Nontoxic, non-corrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, wax-based lubricant; UL listed. 

B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and 

cable. 

C. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways. 

D. Manufacturers and Products: 

1. Ideal Co.; Yellow 77. 

2. Polywater, Inc. 

3. Cable Grip Co. 

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Conductors 600-Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and 854 Standards. 

B. Conductors Above 600 Volts: Test in accordance with NEMA W8 and AEIC CS 6 partial 

discharge level test for EPR insulated cable. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Conductor installation to be in accordance with NECA 5055. 





B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted otherwise. 

C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and 

minimum bending radii. 

D. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A for copper conductors. 

E. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center spacing as 

required by equipment terminals. 

F. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, hand holes, vaults, and other 

indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bundle conductors from 

each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not 

exceeding 18 inches on center. 

G. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables. 

H. Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through each 

raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4-inch smaller than raceway inside diameter. 

I. Cable Tray Installation: 

1. Install wire and cable parallel and straight in tray. 

2. Bundle, in groups, all wire and cable of same voltage having a common routing and 

destination; use cable ties, at maximum intervals of 8 feet. 

3. Clamp cable bundles prior to making end termination connections. 

4. Separate cables of different voltage rating in same cable tray with barriers. 

5. Fasten wires, cables, and bundles to tray with nylon cable straps at the following 

maximum intervals: 

a. Horizontal Runs: 20 feet. 

b. Vertical Runs: 5 feet. 

3.2 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING 

A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: 

1. No. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, 

and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering an 

area 1-1/2 to 2 inches wide. 

2. No. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. 




3. Colors: 


System Conductor Color 

All Systems Equipment Grounding Green 

240/120 Volts 

Single-Phase, Three-Wire 

208Y/120 Volts 

Three-Phase, Four-Wire 

240/120 Volts 


Delta, Center Tap 

Ground on Single-Phase 

480Y/277 Volts 


Grounded Neutral 

One Hot Leg 

Other Hot Leg 


Phase A 

Phase B 

Phase C 


Phase A 

High (wild) Leg 

Phase C 


Phase A 

Phase B 

Phase C 

NOTE: Phase A, B, C implies direction of positive phase rotation 

White 

Black 

Red 

White 

Black 

Red 

Blue 

White 

Black 

Orange 

Blue 

Gray 

Brown 

Orange 

Yellow 

4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with an identifiable colored strip other than green in 

accordance with NFPA 70. 

B. Conductors Above 600 Volts: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and 

at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering an area 1-1/2 to 2 

inches wide. 

1. Colors: 

a. Grounded Neutral: White. 

b. Phase A: Brown. 

c. Phase B: Orange. 

d. Phase C: Yellow. 

3.3 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION 

A. Circuits Appearing in Circuit Schedules: identify power, instrumentation, and control 

conductor circuits, using circuit schedule designations, at each termination and in accessible 

locations such as manholes, hand holes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull 

boxes, and terminal boxes. 

B. Circuits Not Appearing in Circuit Schedules: 

1. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit. 

2. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one circuit, add 

number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique. 




C. Method: 

1. Conductors No. 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves. 

2. Cables, and Conductors No. 2 AWG and Larger: 

a. Identify with marker plates. 

b. Attach marker plates with nylon tie cord. 

3. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted. 

3.4 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 


A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in lighting and 

receptacle circuits. 

B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors No. 6 

AWG and larger unless specifically indicated or approved by ENGINEER. 

C. Connections and Terminations: 

1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. 

2. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, 

control, and power circuit conductors No. 6 AWG and smaller. 

3. Install un-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and 

power circuit conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG. 

4. Install un-insulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit 

conductors No. 4/0 AWG and larger. 

5. Install un-insulated bolted, two-way connectors for motor circuit conductors No. 12 

and larger. 

6. Tape insulates all un-insulated connections. 

7. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection. 

8. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer. 

9. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used. 

10. Compression Lugs 

a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. 

b. Tool shall provide complete controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is 

complete. 

c. Do not use plier type crimpers. 

D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints. 




E. Splices and Terminations: 

1. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape. 

2. Outdoors: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather-resistant tape. 

F. Cap spare conductors and conductors with UL listed end caps. 

G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers: 

1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure. 


2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove 

bums, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating 

material to protect the conductors. 

H. Control and Instrumentation Wiring: 

1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and 

instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, locking-fork 

compression lugs. 

2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with 

terminal manufacturer's instructions. 

3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. 

4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under 

Section 13400, PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 

(PICS), leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections. 

5. able Protection: 

a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May be installed without bundling. 

b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit under the 

floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2-inch in diameter. 

c. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. 

d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over the shield. 

I. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of 

extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies. 

J. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Output Power Cable: 

1. Install cables in raceway. 

2. Terminate the three ground conductors together at the motor and at the ground bus 

of the VFD. 

3. Terminate aluminum armor at motor and at VFD. At motor, terminate shield with 

cable manufacturer recommended termination kit. Termination shall be to the motor 

junction box. At the VFD, terminate armor to the invertor drive frame. The 

termination kit must provide a 360-degree connection of the armor to frame and 

motor junction box. 




3.5 CONDUCTORS ABOVE 600 VOLTS 

A. Do not splice unless specifically indicated or approved by the ENGINEER. 


B. Make joints and terminations with splice and termination kits, in accordance with kit 

manufacturer's instructions 

C. Install splices or terminations as continuous operation in accessible locations under clean, 

dry conditions. 

D. Single Conductor Cable Terminations: Provide heat shrinkable stress control and outer nontracking 

insulation tubing, high relative permittivity stress relief mastic for insulation shield 

cutback treatment, and a heat-activated sealant for environmental sealing, plus a ground 

braid and clamp. 

E. Install terminals or connectors acceptable for type of conductor material used. 

F. Provide outdoor rain skirts for all riser pole and outdoor switchgear terminations. 

G. Provide shield termination and grounding for all terminations. 

H. Provide necessary mounting hardware, covers, and connectors. 

I. Where elbow connectors are specified, install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

J. Connections and Terminations: 

1. Install un-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and 

power circuit conductors No. 4 AWG through No. 210 AWG. 

2. Install un-insulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit 

conductors No. 4/0 AWG and larger. 

3. Install un-insulated, bolted, two-way connectors for motor circuit conductors No. 12 

and larger. 

4. Insulate bus connections with heat shrinking tubing, tape, and sheets. 

5. Make all bus connections removable and reusable in accordance with manufacturer’s 

instructions. 

K. Give 2 working days' notice to ENGINEER prior to making splices or terminations. 

3.6 CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING 

A. Install arc and fireproofing, tape on 600-volt single conductors and cables except those rated 

Type TC in manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations. 

B. Install arc and fireproofing tape on 25 kV cables throughout their entire exposed length in 

manholes, hand holes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations. 

C. Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as a single cable. 

D. Follow tape manufacturer's installation instructions. 





E. Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tape binder. Each tape band shall consist of a 

minimum of two wraps directly over each other. 

3.7 FIELD QUALTTY CONTROL 

A. In accordance Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING. 






SECTION 16349 MOTOR STARTERS – MEDIUM VOLTAGE 

The Equipment Covered under PART 1, PART 2 and 3.2 thru 3.6 has been pre-purchased by the 

Owner. The Contractor shall install the Owner provide equipment in accordance with the drawings, 

where listed in Parts 1, 2 and 3 and the entirety of 3.2 “FIELD QUALITY CONTROL” and 3.5 

“INSTALLATION” of this specification. The Contractor is referred to as the “Installing” or 

“Installation” “Contractor”. The Contractor shall coordinate with equipment supplier/manufacturer 

for installation requirements. 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. Furnish the medium voltage switchgear with solid state starters as specified herein and as 

shown on the attached drawings. The medium voltage switchgear shall be shipped in multiple 

sections as stated in this specification for phasing requirements of the construction sequence. 

The supplier shall provide installation assistance service and start-up service during 

construction as stated in section 3 of this specification. 


A. All sections in Division 16 


1. SECTION 16015 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 

A. Medium voltage motor starters shall be designed, manufactured, assembled and tested in 

accordance with the following standards: 


1. ANSI/NEMA ICS-3- 1993 (R2000) 

2. UL 347 or equivalent CSA C22.2 No. 14 

A. The Submit six (6) copies of all submittal information. 

B. The following information shall be submitted to the Owner during bidding (owner prepurchased 

process): 

1. The dimension drawings of the medium voltage switchgear, front view, floor plan, and top 

view 

2. Cut sheets of the medium voltage switchgear with ratings 

3. Cut sheets of the soft starters 

C. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval: 

1. Master drawing index 

2. Front view elevation 

3. Floor plan 




4. Top view 

5. Schematic diagram 

6. Nameplate schedule 

7. Component list 

8. Conduit entry/exit locations 

9. Assembly ratings including: 

a. Short-circuit rating 

b. Voltage 

c. Continuous current 

d. Basic impulse level 

10. Major component ratings including: 

a. Voltage 

b. Continuous current 

c. Interrupting ratings 

11. Cable terminal sizes 

12. Descriptive bulletins 

13. Product data sheets 


D. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 

1. Busway connection 

2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies 

3. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies 

4. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations 

1.5 SUBMITTALS – FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. The following information shall be submitted for O&M Manuals: 

1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.4 above, and shall 

incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 

2. Wiring diagrams 

3. Certified production test reports 

4. Installation information, including equipment anchorage provisions 

5. Seismic certification as specified. 


A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within 

the assembly. 

B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 

C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a 

minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of 





installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this 

requirement. 


A. Equipment shall be provided with the following special labels UL 


A. Equipment shall be delivered within 12 weeks from date of order. 

B. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 

C. Place of Delivery: 

1. Palm Beach International Airport. Coordinate with Palm Beach County Department of 

Airports for exact delivery location. 

D. All equipment shall be shipped to the address listed above. Supplier shall select the means 

and methods of transportation. All transportation charges, including, but not limited to, 

switching, trucking, loading and unloading at deliver site and special handling will be paid 

by the Supplier. 

E. Owner will not be obligated to accept any delivery of equipment not made within the 

delivery period. Additional costs arising from delivery prior to or after the delivery period 

shall be the responsibility of the Supplier. 

F. Owner, accompanied by Engineer, shall inspect the equipment upon delivery, for the sole 

purpose of identifying the equipment and general verification of quantities in order to 

provide a basis for payment. Such inspection will not be construed as final or as 

acceptance of any equipment not in conformance with the Technical Specifications. If, 

when delivered, there are apparent defects in the equipment (through damage or 

otherwise), Engineer will give prompt written notice thereof to Supplier. Supplier shall, 

without cost to Owner, correct the defect or replace the equipment with non-defective 

equipment. Owner may refuse to accept delivery of any equipment that are apparently 

defective. If there are not apparent defects, Owner will accept delivery. 

G. Special care in handling shall be exercised during loading, delivery, and unloading of 

equipment to the Owner to avoid damage and setting up stresses. Damaged equipment 

will be rejected and shall be replaced at the Supplier's expense. 

H. All equipment shall be carefully lowered to the ground by mechanical means. In shipping, 

equipment shall be blocked in such manner as to prevent damage. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer shall warrant specified equipment free from defects in materials and 

workmanship for five (5) years from the date of installation. 

B. Provide warranty service for five (5) years from the date of installation. The warranty 

service shall include parts, labor on site, travels, etc. and shall response within 24 hours 

from the time of requesting the service by the Owner 






A. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer products 

B. Square D 

C. General Electric 

D. Approved Equal 


The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do 

not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved 

from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification 

and manufactured by others not named will be considered. 

All electrical equipment sizes and characteristics have been based on the manufacturer Cutler- 

Hammer. If the Supplier chooses to and is allowed to substitute, the Supplier shall be responsible 

for fitting all the equipment in the available space as shown on the Drawings. 

2.2 RATINGS 

A. Starters shall have an integrated interrupting rating with current limiting fuses of 250 MVA. 

B. When starters are grouped together in a lineup, the entire assembly shall be suitable for 

application on a power system having a short-circuit capacity of 40,000 Amps. 

C. The vacuum contactor shall have the following ratings: 

7200V Max. 400 Amperes 800 Amperes 

______________________________________________ 

Max. Interrupting 8500 Amperes 12500 Amperes 

Current (3 OPS) 

Rated Current – Enclosed 400 Amperes 720 Amperes 

Rated Current – Open 400 Amperes 800 Amperes 

Short-Time Current 

30 Sec. 2400 A 4320 A 

1 Sec. 6000 A 10800 A 

8.7 ms (0.5 Cycle) 63 kA Peak 86 kA Peak 

Mechanical Life 2.5 Million 1.0 Million 

Electrical Life 300,000 100,000 

at rated current 

Impulse Withstand 60 kV 60 kV 

(1.2 x 50 Micro Sec.) (1.2 x 50 Micro Sec.) 

D. Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starters (5kV maximum voltage) shall have the following 

ratings: 




2.3 CONSTRUCTION 


Description Specification 

_____________________________________________________________ 

Horsepower hp as shown on the drawings 

Power Ratings 600% FLA for 30 Sec. 125% Continuous 

PIV Ratings 2500 Vac: 7000 V 

Starting Torque 

5000 Vac: 14000 V 

5 to 85% 

Ramp Time 0 to 180 Seconds 

Maximum Voltage Rating 5000 Vac 

BIL Rating 60 KV 

Rated Short Circuit Amperes 50 kA rms Sym. 

SCR Voltage Drop or 

Voltage Drop “L” to “T” 

3.5 V without bypass/

2.4 BUS 


E. A built-in test circuit shall be included to permit checking of the starter control and pilot circuit, 

with the high voltage de-energized and isolated, and the contactor in its normal position or in 

the drawout position. The control circuit shall be capable of being energized through a 

polarized plug connector from an external 115-volt supply while in the test mode. 

F. The low voltage control compartment shall be isolated and barriered from the high voltage 

area and mounted on a panel with a separate low voltage access door. The low voltage 

control components shall be accessible by sliding the panel out of the low voltage control 

compartment. The low voltage compartment shall be painted white to increase visibility of 

components mounted inside the compartment. 

G. Each starter cell shall contain a vertical and horizontal low voltage wireway. 

H. Motor protection relay shall be Eaton EMR 4000 or approved equal. 

A. When starters are grouped together in a lineup, the horizontal main bus shall be located in its 

own separate, 12-inch high enclosure and isolated from the starters. To allow for ease of 

maintenance or extension of lineups without disassembling starters, the main bus shall be 

front, top and side accessible. 

B. Starters shall be connected by an insulated vertical bus. 

C. All bus bars shall be copper tin-plated. Bus shall be rated for 1200A (7.2kV and below)] 

continuous current. 

D. Provide a 1/4 x 1 inch ground bus throughout the entire lineup. Ground bus shall also be 

supplied in upper compartments of 2-high starters and be bus connected to the ground bus 

supplied in the lower compartments. 

2.5 WIRING/TERMINATIONS 

A. All control wire shall be UL/CSA approved. 

B. Standard control wire shall be 14GA, stranded, tin-plated, red, dual-rated type XLPE (3173) 

125 degrees C, SIS 90 degrees C. 

C. Current transformer circuits shall utilize #12 wire with the same characteristics as above. 

Provide shorting blocks for all current transformers. 

D. Provide “plug-in” terminal blocks, rated 600 V, 50 A with “clamping collar.” 

E. Wire markers shall be a molded plastic “clip-sleeve” type. 

F. “Clamping-collar” type terminals shall be used to terminate control wiring. Current transformer 

circuits shall be provided with ring-type terminals where applicable. 

2.6 STARTERS 

A. The starters shall be designed to accommodate motors of the size and type as shown on the 

drawings. 

B. The starters shall be non-reversing to accommodate the following motor type: 





1. Induction Motor Solid-State Reduced Voltage Start (5kV and below only) 

2. Each induction motor Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starter shall include the following 

equipment: 

a. Medium Voltage Sections 

1) One – Fixed portion isolating switch with shutter mechanism 

2) One – Removable portion isolating switch [with blown fuse indication] 

3) Three –Bolt-in Current-limiting power fuses (bolt in only on the 250A and 

800A Contactors) 

4) One Bolt-in main vacuum contactor assembly 

5) One roll-out three-phase solid-state power stack assembly (herein after 

specified) 

6) One control circuit transformer [750 VA @ 4.16 kV 

7) Two control circuit primary fuses 

8) One control circuit secondary fuse 

9) One run test circuit 

10) Four electrical interlocks 

b. 

11) One zero sequence ground fault current transformer where ground fault 

protection is specified 

Low Voltage Section 

1) One motor protection relay (MPR as specified in 2.10) herein after specified 

2) Slide-out panel 

3) One set of control relays 

4) One – Set of control circuit terminal blocks 

5) Two – PT’s, Open Delta 

6) Isolation switch viewing window to verify switch position 

7) One set of control terminal blocks 

8) One solid-state reduced-voltage control assembly (herein specified). 

c. Where motor reversing is shown on the drawings, provide an additional vacuum 

contactor for reversing. Both contactors shall be mechanically and electrically 

interlocked. 

d. The solid-state reduced-voltage controller shall be Cutler-Hammer type MV811. 

The starter shall be UL and CSA listed. The SCR-based power section shall 

consist of back-to-back SCRs and shall be rated for a minimum peak inverse 

voltage rating as shown in the ratings section. Units using triacs or SCR/diode 

combinations shall not be acceptable. Resistor/capacitor snubber networks shall 

be used to prevent false firing of SCRs due to dv/dt effects. 

e. The control board shall be mounted for ease of testing, service and replacement. It 

shall have quick disconnect plug-in connectors for all connections. The logic board 

shall be identical for all ampere ratings and voltage classes and shall be 

conformally coated to protect environmental concerns. 





f. The integral paralleling run bypass contactor shall energize when the motor 

reaches 90% of full speed and close/open under one (1) times motor current. 

g. The solid-state power stack assembly shall be mounted on a roll-out truck for ease 

of maintenance. When the truck is removed, the load cables shall be easily moved 

to the line side stabs to allow full voltage starting in emergency situations. 

h. Starter shall be provided with electronic overload protection as standard and shall 

be based on inverse time-current algorithm. Overload protection shall be capable 

of being disabled during ramp start for long acceleration loads via a DIP switch 

setting on the device keypad. Units using bimetal overload relays are not 

acceptable. 

1) Overload protection shall be adjusted via the device keypad and shall have a 

motor full load ampere adjustment from 30 to 100% of the maximum 

continuous ampere rating of the starter. 

2) The starter shall have selectable overload class setting of 5, 10, 20 or 30 via 

a DIP switch setting on the device keypad. 

3) The starter shall be capable of either an electronic or mechanical reset after 

a fault. 

4) Overtemperature protection (on heat sink) shall be standard. 

5) The starter shall provide protection against improper line-side phase rotation 

as standard. Starter will shut down if a line-side phase rotation other than A- 

B-C exists. Provide a means to disable phase rotation protection via a DIP 

switch and the device keypad. 

6) The starter shall provide protection against a phase loss or unbalance 

condition as standard. Starter will shut down if a 50% current differential 

between any two phases is encountered. Provide a means to disable phase 

loss/unbalance protection via a DIP switch on the device keypad. 

7) The starter shall provide protection against a motor stall condition as 

standard. Provide a means to disable stall protection via a DIP switch on the 

device keypad. 

8) The starter shall provide protection against a motor jam condition as 

standard. Provide a means to disable jam protection via a DIP switch on the 

device keypad. 

9) The starter shall be provided with a Form C normally open (NO), normally 

closed (NC) contact that shall change state when a fault condition exists. 

Contacts shall be rated 60 VA (resistive load) and 20 VA (inductive load). In 

addition, an LED display on the device keypad shall indicate type of fault 

(Overtemperature, Phase Loss, Jam, Stall, Phase Reversal, and Overload). 

i. The following control function adjustments on the device keypad are required: 

1) Selectable Torque Ramp Start or Current Limit Start 

2) Adjustable Kick Start Time, 0 – 2 seconds 

3) Adjustable Kick Start Torque, 0 – 85% 

4) Adjustable Ramp Start Time, 0.5 – 180 seconds 

5) Adjustable Initial Starting Ramp Torque, 0 – 85% 

6) Adjustable Smooth Stop Ramp Time, 0 – 60 seconds 

j. Maximum continuous operation shall be at 115% of continuous ampere rating. 




2.7 MECHANICALLY-LATCHED CONTACTOR 


A. Mechanically-latched contactor, where shown on the drawings, shall be provided. The 

contactor shall remain closed, if there is a loss of voltage or a reduced-voltage condition. 

B. Mechanically-latched contactor shall be closed electrically from a local or remote CLOSE 

pushbutton, and tripped by a mechanical linkage to an externally operated manual trip 

device. 

C. An electrically-operated solenoid shall be supplied to trip the contactor as indicated on the 


2.8 MAIN SWITCHES/FEEDER SWITCHES (7.2KV MAX) 

A. Furnish, where shown on the contract drawings, three-pole manually operated quick-make, 

quick-break load break switches or integrated metal enclosed breakers. 

B. The fixed-mounted switches shall fit in one-half of a standard 90-inch high, 36-inch wide 

vertical structure, when supplied with 400 A or smaller fuses. Provide mechanical interlocks 

such that the switch door cannot be opened when the switch is on, and when the door is 

open the switch cannot be closed. A safety screen shall be provided behind the switch door. 

1. The load break switch shall have the following ratings: 

Maximum Voltage 5.5 kV 

BIL Rating 60 kV 

Continuous Current 1,200 Amperes 

Interrupting Capacity 1,200 Amperes at 80% PF 

Interrupting Capacity 80 Amperes at 10% PF 

Momentary Current 4,000 10 cycles Asymmetrical (Amperes) 

Momentary Current 25,000 4 seconds Asymmetrical (Amperes) 

Fault Current Closing 40,000 Asymmetrical (Amperes) 

2. The load break switch shall be as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer type ADM or 

approved equal. 

2.9 MAIN/TIE BREAKERS (7.2KV MAX) 

A. Furnish, where shown on the contract drawings, main and or tie breakers fully integrated with 

the motor starters. The main breaker structure dimensions shall be no greater than 62 inches 

wide by 60 inches deep. The tie breaker structure dimensions shall be no greater than 48 

inches wide by 60 inches deep. Both main and tie breakers shall be fully front accessible. 

1. The Main Breaker shall have the following ratings: 

Interrupting Rating 350 MVA 

Nominal Voltage Class 5 kV 




2.10 ENCLOSURE 

Impulse Withstand 60 BIL 

Short Circuit Current 41 Kilo Amperes 

Continuous Current 1,200 Amperes 


2. The breaker shall be as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer type MBA or approved 

equal. 

A. Provide NEMA 1A gasketed enclosures for indoor applications where shown on the contract 

drawings. The incoming feeders and outgoing branch circuits shall be top entry Control power 

shall be obtained from an internal control power transformer. 

B. Enclosures for the medium voltage starters shall meet NEMA ICS-6 standards. Enclosure 

shall be NEMA 1, unless otherwise noted, completely front accessible, allowing for freestanding, 

against a wall, or back-to-back mounting. 

C. Provide a dedicated incoming line enclosure section to accommodate the number and size of 

incoming cables for top entry. 

D. Structures shall be welded steel frame, formed steel doors and side sheets, flat steel top and 

rear covers. 

E. Standard hardware shall be grade 5, plated zinc-dichromate. 

F. Maximum dimension of the entire switchboard shall be 360”W x 30”D x 92”H. 

2.11 NAMEPLATES 

2.12 FINISH 

A. Nameplates shall be 2-inch high x 2-1/2 inch wide, laminated [black with white] [white with 

black] core. 

B. Unit nameplate and device marker lettering shall be 3/16-inch high. 

A. The finish for internal and external parts shall consist of a coat of ANSI 61 (gray) 

thermosetting, polyester, powder paint applied electrostatically to pre-cleaned phosphatized 

steel and aluminum surfaces. 


A. Provide a portable lifting device for transporting contactor outside its compartment. 


3.1 FACTORY TESTING 

A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this 

section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 

1. Wiring check 




2. Sequence of control circuits 


3. Dielectric Test (Hi Pot) per NEMA ICS 3 Part 2 at 2000 volts plus 2.25 times nominal 

voltage, for 60 seconds, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground 

B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. 


A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to assist the 

installation Contractor in installation and startup of the equipment specified under this section 

for a period of 5 working days excluding training days. The manufacturer’s representative 

shall provide technical direction and assistance to the Contractor in general assembly of the 

equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components 

contained therein. Supplier shall coordinate with actual nameplate horsepower and full load 

amps of the motors. Provide the recommended setting for reduced voltage solid state starters 

and adjust accordingly. 

B. The following minimum work shall be performed by the installation Contractor under the 

technical direction of the manufacturer’s service representative: 

1. Megger bus 

2. Ground test 

3. Verify that all mechanical interlocks are functioning properly 

C. The supplier shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s field startup report. 

3.3 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION 

A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the 

equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s 


B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer’s representative’s 

certification. 

3.4 TRAINING 

A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for five (5) owner representative(s) for 2 

normal workday(s) at a job site location determined by the owner. 

B. The training session shall be conducted by a manufacturer’s qualified representative and 

include instructions on assembly, starters and other major components. 


A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer’s recommendations and the 


B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor. 





C. Check all bolted connections to assure that they are in accordance with the manufacturer’s 

recommended torque requirements. 

3.6 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS 

A. Program the motor protective relays in accordance with the recommendations documented 

by the coordination study, Section 16011 or as directed by the Engineer. 

3.7 FIELD TESTING 

A. Sequence the control circuit to verify that the starter will start and run properly. 







SECTION 16450 GROUNDING 




1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): C2, National Electrical Safety Code 

(NESC). 



1. Product Data: 


a. Exothermic weld connectors. 

b. Mechanical connectors. 




2.1 GROUND ROD 

A. Material: Copper clad. 

B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 

C. Length: 20 feet. 




2.2 GROUND CONDUCTORS 

A. As specified in Section 16120, CONDUCTORS. 

2.3 CONNECTORS 

A. Exothermic Weld Type: 

1. Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial. 

2. Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process. 


a. Erico Products, Inc.; Cadweld amd Cadweld Exolon. 

b. Thermoweld. 


B. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material. 


a. Burndy Corp. 

b. Thomas and Betts Co. 

2.4 GROUNDING WELLS 

A. Ground rod box complete with cast iron riser ring and traffic cover marked GROUND ROD. 

B. Manufacturers: 

1. Christy Co.; No. G5. 

2. Lightning and Grounding Systems, Inc.; I-R Series. 





3.1 GENERAL 

A. Grounding shall be in compliance with NFPA 70 and ANSI C2. 


B. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment to supplementary grounding 

electrodes. 

C. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded building 

structural steel member or separate grounding electrode. 

D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current-carrying 

metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and 

cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems. 

E. Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in accordance with 

recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer. 

F. Shielded Control Cables: 

1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal. 

2. Expose shield minimum I inch at termination to field instrument and apply heat shrink 

tube. 

3. Do not ground control cable shield at more than one point. 

3.2 WIRE CONNECTIONS 

A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control circuits above 

50 volts. 

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor 

connected at both ends to non current-carrying grounding bus. 

C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings. 

D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground 

bus. 

E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus. 




F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus. 


G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to intermediate metallic 

enclosures. 

H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system with 

grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws. 

3.3 MOTOR GROUNDING 

A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway; 

connect to motor frame. 

B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor 

connected at both ends to non current-carrying grounding bus. 

C. Motors Less Than 10 hp: Furnish mechanical-type terminal connected to conduit box 

mounting screw. 

D. Motors 10 hp and Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish mechanical-type 

terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch brass threaded stud with bolt and washer. 

E. Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install solderless 

terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt. 

3.4 GROUND RODS 

A. Install full length with conductor connection at upper end. 

B. Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown. 

3.5 GROUNDING WELLS 

A. Install inside buildings, asphalt, and paved areas. 

B. Install riser ring and cover flush with surface. 

C. Place 9 inches crushed rock in bottom of each well. 


A. General: 





1. Above grade Connections: Use either exothermic weld or mechanical-type 

connectors. 

2. Below grade Connections: Install exothermic weld type connectors. 

3. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to allow good 

metal-to-metal contact. 

4. Notify ENGINEER prior to backfilling ground connections. 

B. Exothermic Weld Type: 

1. Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface. 

2. Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's 


3. Avoid using badly worn molds. 

4. Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds. 

5. After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and thoroughly clean 

joint. 

C. Mechanical Type: 

1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion inhibitor before 

making connection. 

2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. 

3. Do not conceal mechanical connections. 

3.7 METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING 

A. Ground metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to grounding system. 

B. Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms. 

C. Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, 

receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and raceways carrying circuits to these devices. 




3.8 MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE GROUNDING 

A. Install one ground rod inside each. 

B. Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 to 6 inches above floor. 

C. Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible. 


D. Connect all non current-carrying metal parts, and any metallic raceway grounding bushings 

to ground rod with No. 6 AWG copper conductor. 

3.9 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING 

A. Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network, and to any 

additional indicated grounding electrodes. 

B. Bond neutrals of substation transformers to substation grounding grid and system grounding 

network. 

C. Bond neutrals of pad-mounted transformers to four locally driven ground rods and buried 

ground wire encircling transformer and system ground network. 

3.10 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING 

A. Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus. 

3.11 INSTRUMENT GROUND - SURGE SUPPRESSION 

A. Connect all instrument surge protection with #6 insulated copper ground wire (in conduit 

where above grade) to closest plant ground system 

3.12 BONDING 

A. Bond to Main Conductor System: 

1. All roof mounted ventilators, fans, air handlers, masts, flues, cooling towers, 

handrails, and other sizeable metal objects. 

2. Roof flashing, gravel stops, insulation vents, ridge vents, roof drains, soil pipe vents, 

and other small metal objects if located within 6 feet of main conductors or another 

grounded object. 

3. Provide air terminals as required. 





B. Bond steel columns or major framing members to grounding system per National Electrical 

Code. 

C. Bond each main down conductor to grounding system. 

3.13 GROUNDING SYSTEM 

A. Grounding Conductor: 

1. Completely encircle building structure. 

2. Bury minimum 30” below finished grade. 

3. Minimum 2 feet distance from foundation walls. 

B. Interconnect ground rods by direct-buried copper cables. 

C. Connections: 

1. Install ground cables continuous between connections. 

2. Exothermic welded connections to ground rods, cable trays, structural steel, 

handrails, and buried and nonaccessible connections. 

3. Provide bolted clamp type mechanical connectors for all exposed secondary 

connections. 

4. Use bolded offset parapet bases or through-roof concealed base assemblies for air 

terminal connections. 

5. Provide interconnections with electrical and telephone systems and all underground 

water and metal pipes. 

6. Provide electric service arrestor ground wire to building water main. 


A. As specified in Section 16950, ELECTRICAL TESTING. 






SECTION 16480 - LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL 

The Equipment Covered under PART 1, PART 2 and 3.2 thru 3.6 has been pre-purchased by the Owner. 

The Contractor shall install the Owner provide equipment in accordance with the drawings, where 

indicated in Parts 1, 2 and 3 and the entirety of 3.1 “INSTALLATION” of this specification. The Contractor 

is referred to as the “Installing” or “Installation” “Contractor”. The Contractor shall coordinate with 

equipment supplier/manufacturer for installation requirements. 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. Furnish the Low Voltage Motor Control as specified herein and as shown on the attached 

drawings. The Low Voltage Motor Control shall be shipped in multiple sections as stated in 

this specification for phasing requirements of the construction sequence. The supplier shall 

provide installation assistance service and start-up service during construction as stated in 

section 3 of this specification. 


A. All sections in Division 16 

1. SECTION 16015 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 

2. SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 



1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 

a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 

b. C57.12.28, Switchgear and Transformers - Pad-Mounted Equipment- 

Enclosure Integrity. 

c. Z55, Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment. 


a. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 

b. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. 

c. ICS 2, Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and 

Assemblies. 

d. ICS 2.3, Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation, and 

Maintenance of Motor Control Centers 






e. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 

Volts Maximum). 

f. 250-1997, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). 

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-90, National Electrical Code. 

(NEC) Latest Edition. 


a. 98, Standard for Safety Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches, Eleventh 

Edition. 

b. 489, Standard for Safety Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit 

Breaker Enclosures, Seventh Edition. 

c. 845, Standard for Safety Motor Control Centers, Third Edition. 

d. 508A Industrial Control Equipment. 

5. Uniform Building Code (UBC): Section 2312, Earthquake Requirements. 

6. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Acceptance Testing 

Specifications, latest edition. 

7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 

a. 112, latest revision, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction 

Motors and Generators 

b. 43, latest edition, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation 

Resistance of Rotating Machinery 

A. Submit six (6) copies of all submittal information. 

B. The following information shall be submitted to the Owner during bidding (owner prepurchased 

process): 

1. Itemized bill of material. 

2. Descriptive information. 

3. Dimensional drawings. 

4. Conduit entrance locations/provisions. 

5. Bus data including horizontal and vertical bus capacities, voltage rating and 

interrupting capacity. Include materials of construction. 

6. Protective Devices: Copies of time-current characteristics. 

7. Anchoring instructions and details. 





8. Typed tabulation: 

a. Motor name; tag (equipment) numbers as shown on Drawings. 

b. Motor horsepower. 

c. Nameplate full load current. 

d. Measured load current and voltage. 

e. Heater catalog number. 

f. Protective device trip settings. 

9. Attach above typed, tabulated data to a copy of starter manufacturer's overload 

heater selection tables for the starters provided. 

10. Control Diagrams: 

a. NEMA ICS 2, Section 322.08 Type I. 

b. Wiring Type B. 

c. In addition to standard NEMA control diagrams, provide the following: 

1) Remote control devices. 

2) Remote indication and/or pilot lights. 

3) Interconnections and interlocking circuits between starter and 

remote equipment. 

4) Remote sensors. 

5) Tag numbers associated with all control devices and equipment. 

6) Clearly identify items provided by others. 

11. One-line diagrams. 

12. Schematic (elementary) diagrams. Custom schematics shall be furnished. 

Diagrams shall include all remote devices. Submittals with drawings not meeting 

this requirement will not be reviewed further and will be returned stamped 

"REJECTED-RESUBMIT". 

13. Outline diagrams. 

14. Interconnection diagrams. 

15. Enclosure NEMA rating and color. 

16. Ground bus size and material of construction. 

17. Main incoming line entry provision (top or bottom). 

18. Control unit nameplate schedule. 

19. All circuit breaker types, frames and settings. 

20. All starter NEMA sizes, auxiliary contact provisions, coil voltage Relays, timers, 

pilot devices, control transformer VA and fuse sizes. 

21. Short circuit rating of the complete assembly. 

22. Replacement parts lists and operation and maintenance procedures. 

23. Plan and elevation dimensional views of each MCC section. 

C. Quality Control Submittals: 

1. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 




2. Operation and Maintenance Manual. 

3. Factory test reports, certified. 

1.5 SUBMITTALS – FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. The following information shall be submitted for O&M Manuals: 


1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.4 above, and shall 

incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process. 

2. Wiring diagrams 

3. Certified production test reports 

4. Installation information, including equipment anchorage provisions 

5. Seismic certification as specified. 


A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within 

the assembly. 

B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 

C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a 

minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of 

installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this 

requirement. 


A. Products manufactured within scope of Underwriters Laboratories shall conform to UL 

Standards and have an applied UL Listing Mark. Where shown or required motor control 

centers shall be suitable for service entrance. 

































1.9 WARRANTY 








A. Cutler-Hammer. 

B. Square D. 

C. General Electric 

E. Or approved equal. 

The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do 

not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved 

from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification 

and manufactured by others not named will be considered. 

All electrical equipment sizes and characteristics have been based on the manufacturer Cutler- 

Hammer. If the Supplier chooses to and is allowed to substitute, the Supplier shall be responsible 

for fitting all the equipment in the available space as shown on the Drawings. 

2.2 MOTOR CONTROL 

A. General: 





1. Provide each motor with a suitable controller and devices that will function as 

specified for the respective motors and meeting NEMA ICS 2, (class A), the 

NEC, and UL. 

2. Like Items of Equipment: Same manufacturer as low voltage switchboard and 

panelboards for standardization. Devices of the same type shall be products of 

the same manufacturer. This requirement applies to all control devices, and 

insofar as practical, to equipment manufactured on a production basis. It also 

applies without exception to equipment custom fabricated for this project. 

3. Make adjustments as necessary to wiring, conduit; disconnect devices, motor 

starters, branch circuit protection, and other affected material or equipment to 

accommodate motors actually provided under this Contract. 

4. Overload Protection: 

a. Each motor shall have a direct current sensing solid-state overload 

protection in all ungrounded phases. This protection shall have current 

overload relays sensitive to motor current, and mounted within the motor 

controller. Reset of the protection shall be manually activated with 

externally operated reset button. All overload protection devices shall be 

the inverse time limit type and match the motor characteristic. 

5. Control Transformer: 

a. Two winding, 120-volt secondary, primary voltage to suit. 

b. Two current-limiting fuses for primary circuit. 

c. One fuse in secondary circuit. 

d. Mount within starter unit. 

6. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. 

7. Lifting lugs on all equipment and devices weighing over 100 pounds. 

8. Anchor Bolts: Galvanized, sized by equipment manufacturer, and as specified in 

Section 05500, METAL FABRICATIONS AND CASTINGS. 

9. Operating Conditions: 

a. Ambient Temperature: Maximum 40 degrees C. 

b. Equipment to be fully rated without any derating for operating conditions 

listed above. 

10. Enclosures: In accordance with NEMA 250 and ANSI C57.12.28. 

11. Equipment Finish: 

a. Electro-coating process applied over a rust-inhibiting phosphated base 

coating. 

b. Exterior Color: Manufacturer's standard. 





12. All manual starters and combination motor starters shall be lockable in the off 

position. 

B. Combination Full-Voltage, Magnetic Starter: 

1. Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volts, UL labeled for 100,000 amperes with 

overload protection. 

2. Three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage. 

3. Control: As shown. 

4. Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector. 

5. Enclosure: As shown. 

6. Pilot Lights: As shown. 

7. Pad-lockable operating handles. 

2.3 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 

A. General: 

1. In accordance with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 845. 

2. The motor control centers shall be 600-volt class suitable for operation on a 

three-phase, 60-Hz system. The system operating voltage and number of wires 

shall be as indicated, on project drawings. 

3. MCC designated as service entrance rated shall include provision for termination 

of an incoming neutral conductor in conformance to NEC requirements. 

4. Short Circuit Rating: Amperes rms symmetrical as shown on Drawings for entire 

motor control center as a complete assembly. 

5. All controllers, main and branch circuit breakers, wire connections, and other 

devices to be front mounted and accessible unless otherwise noted. 

6. NEMA ICS 2, Section 322.08. 

a. Class: IIS. 

b. Type: B. Diagrams and wiring. 

c. Provide blank spaces on interconnection diagrams to add control 

conductor code designations during installation of equipment. 

7. Size and Arrangement 

a. Motor control centers shall be of mechanical groupings of control center 

units, assembled into a lineup of control center sections. Each control 

section shall be nominally 90-inches tall by minimum 20-inches deep. 




B. Enclosure: 


b. MCC's shall be designed to not exceed 145”W x 27”D x 90”H, including 

spaces, spares, and future compartments. MCC's shall be subject to 

rejection for exceeding the lengths indicated where allotted space is 

critical. 

c. Equipment within the MCC may be rearranged at the discretion of the 

manufacturer, providing the MCC provides the spares, space, and future 

provisions indicated. 

d. All switches and circuit breakers used as switches shall be located so 

that the center of the grip of the operating handle of the switch or circuit 

breaker, when in its highest position, will not be more than 6-feet 7-in. 

1. Type: NEMA 250, Type 1, gasketed. 

2. Construction: 

a. Sheet steel reinforced with channel or angle irons. 

b. Butt sections flush, end-to-end against similar section without bolts, nuts, 

or cover plates causing interference. 

c. Removable top cover plates and bottom cover plates. 

d. Removable plates on end panels for future bus extension. 

e. Structural members shall be fabricated of not less than 12 gauge steel 

and side and top panels and doors shall be not less than 14 gauge steel. 

3. Section Mounting: Removable formed-steel channel sills and lifting angles. 

4. Horizontal Wiring Compartments: Accessible from front, full width, top and 

bottom. 

5. Vertical Wiring Compartment: Full height, isolated from unit starters with separate 

door. 

6. Unit Compartment: Individual compartments separated by steel barriers for each 

starter, feeder, or other unit capable of being wired from front without unit 

removal. 

7. Compartment Doors: Separate hinged doors for each starter, feeder, or other 

unit. 

8. Door Interlocking: Interlock starter and feeder doors mechanically so doors 

cannot be opened with unit energized. Provide defeater mechanism to allow 

intentional access at any time. 

9. External disconnect handles, pad-lockable in OFF position. 

10. Cable Entrance: Main leads enter as shown on the Drawings. Control and feeder 

circuits enter from top and bottom. 




C. Bus: 


11. Spaces designated as "SPACE" or "BLANK" shall include blank hinged doors 

and vertical bus bars. 

12. Control units inside compartments shall be clearly identified with tags or stencil 

markings. 

13. Each control unit including spares, spaces and blanks, lights, and devices shall 

be identified by an engraved nameplate. Identification shall include circuit 

number as indicated. 

14. Each motor control center shall be fitted with the manufacturer's nameplate which 

shall include the NEMA Standard electric rating and other pertinent data, 

including manufacturer, sales order number, date of manufacture, and place of 

manufacture. 

15. Where "L" or "U" shaped MCC layouts are indicated, corner compartments shall 

have similar current and short circuit ratings as functional compartments. 

16. Fans, heat exchangers, transformers, capacitors, junction boxes, or other 

devices may not be mounted on the outside of the motor control center 

enclosure. 

17. Finish for motor control center shall be light grey, ANSI 61. The panels shall be 

given 2 coats of primer inside and out and 2 coats of enamel finish. External 

colors other than ANSI 61 will not be acceptable. 

18. Each section shall be dead-front and dead-back construction. Rear access shall 

not be necessary for inspection and maintenance. The structure arrangement 

shall be for front only mounting of units. 

19. Power cables to the motor control center shall be either top or bottom feed as 

indicated on the project drawings. Provide all necessary lugs, clamps, and 

supports to terminate incoming power cables. 

1. Horizontal Power Bus: 

a. Three-phase tin-plated, copper, entire width of control center, rated as 

indicated. 

b. Silver-plated at joints. 

c. Construct to allow future extension of additional sections. 

d. Pressure type solderless lugs for each incoming line cable. 

e. Isolated from top horizontal wireway. 

f. Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts. 

2. Vertical Power Bus: 

a. Three-phase tin-plated, copper, full height of section, rated as required 

by the load but not less than 300 amperes, minimum. 




. Silver-plated at joints. 


c. Sandwich type bus insulation providing deadfront construction with 

starter units removed except for bus stab openings. 

d. Insulated and isolated barrier complete with shutters. 

e. Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts. 

3. Neutral Bus: None. 

4. Ground Bus: 

a. Copper, tin-plated, 33 percent minimum of phase bus ampacity, entire 

width of control center. 

b. Provide Belleville washers on bus connection bolts. 

5. Bus Bracing: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 

D. Motor Controller Unit: 

1. Provide indicated individual components and control devices including 

pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights, control relays, time delay relays, 

and elapsed time meters as specified in Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL 

MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

2. Each motor starter unit shall consist of a combination magnetic contactor and 

short circuit protective device. Short circuit protective device shall be an 

instantaneous, magnetic only circuit breaker or thermal magnetic circuit breaker 

as defined in the project one line diagrams. All circuit breakers provided as part 

of a motor starter unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the open position. 

Reset of thermal overload elements shall be possible with unit door closed. 

Three phase overload trip units shall be furnished to suit the full load current of 

the equipment installed. Overload relays shall be solid state type capable of 

detecting phase loss and ground faults and shall meet NEMA class 20 tripping 


3. Magnetic starters shall have auxiliary contacts as required by electrical motor 

control diagrams, including N-O and N-C contacts as indicated, plus one each 

spare N-O and N-C contact. As a minimum, provide one normally open and one 

normally closed auxiliary contact. 

4. Each starter unit shall have its own control power transformer. It shall have a 

115-volt grounded secondary. One secondary fuse and 2 primary fuses shall be 

provided. Control power transformers shall be sized to accommodate the control 

devices indicated. Minimum transformer size is 50 VA. Local control devices 

shall be mounted independently of the cover door. All starters shall have a local 

"running" lamp and a "off" light to indicate the presence of control power when 

the motor is not running. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test type. Starters 

shall be provided with elapsed time meters, hand/off/auto selector switches, and 

other devices as indicated. All cubicle control wires shall be terminated at a pull 

apart disconnecting terminal block at the cubicle. 

5. The motor control center manufacturer shall be responsible for identifying each 

control wire within each motor starter unit with wrap-around permanent plastic 

markers. Each control wire shall be identified at both ends. Markers shall be 





produced from a device specifically made to produce tags, such as manufactured 

by Brady Corporation or Thomas & Betts. Hand lettered markers are not 

acceptable. 

6. Motor starters shall be designed to NEMA ratings. Starters designed to IEC 

ratings or with dual IEC/NEMA ratings will not be acceptable, either as part of 

any MCC, as remote starters, or as part of any equipment package. 

7. Construction: 

E. Starters: 

a. Draw out combination type with stab connections for starters NEMA ICS, 

Size 4 and smaller. The fixed-type unit assembly shall be constructed so 

that it can be easily removed from its panel after disconnecting the wires 

to the terminal block and withdrawing from the primary bus. Removal of 

a unit assembly shall be possible without rear access and without 

disturbing any other unit in the motor control center. 

b. Bolt-on combination type with cable connection to riser for starters 

NEMA ICS, Size 5 and larger. 

c. Readily interchangeable with starters of similar size. 

d. Pull-apart unit control wiring terminal boards on all units. 

1. NEMA ICS 2, Section 322.08 standard rating, except none smaller than NEMA 

ICS, Size 1. 

2. Rating: Horsepower rated at 600 volt, UL labeled for 65,000 amperes with 

overload protection. 

3. Three-phase, non-reversing, unless otherwise shown. 

4. Disconnect Type: Motor circuit protector. 

5. Combination Full Voltage, Magnetic Starter: 

a. Control: As shown. 

b. Pilot Lights: Red-ON and Green-OFF. 

6. Disconnecting Device: 

a. In each starter, control circuit disconnect to de-energize circuits in unit 

which are not de-energized by starter power disconnect device. 

b. Pad-lockable in OPEN position. 

7. Circuit Breaker: 

a. Meeting the requirements of NEMA AB1 and UL 489. 

b. Molded case with manufacturer's recommended trip setting for maximum 

motor protection. 




c. Magnetic trip only. 

d. Tripping indicated by operating-handle position. 


e. Interrupting capacity required for connection to system with short circuit 

capacity indicated. 

8. Fused Switch: 

a. Heavy-duty, motor rated load-break, quick-make, quick-break type 

meeting the requirements of UL 98 and NEMA KS 1. 

b. Current-limiting fuses, with rejection clips. 

9. Load Detector Relay: 

a. Manual reset with adjustable differential. 

b. Manufacturer: 

1) Cutler-Hammer; Type D60LA. 

2) Allen-Bradley; Bulletin 2100. 

10. Motor Overload Protection: 

a. Direct current sensing solid-state overload protection in all ungrounded 

phases. 

b. Manual-reset overload relays. 

11. Motor Thermal Protector Interface: Manual-reset interposing relay for connection 

to motor-mounted thermal protector system. 

12. Ground Fault Protection: Where indicated and as specified in paragraph Feeder 

Units and Main Protective Device, except provide instantaneous operation 

device. 

13. Capacitor Connection: Terminals to allow easy connection of power factor 

correction capacitors on source side of starter overload relays on starters where 

capacitor connection is shown. 

F. Control Unit: 

1. Disconnecting Device: Capable of de-energizing external source control circuits 

in unit. 

2. Control Devices: As indicated and as specified in Section 16050, BASIC 

ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS. 

3. Control Wiring: 

a. Minimum wire size 14 AWG copper. 




G. Incoming Line Terminal: 


b. Permanent sleeve type markers with wire numbers applied to each end 

of wires. 

c. Terminate wires using insulated locking fork or ring type crimp terminals. 

d. Terminate current transformer leads on shorting type terminal blocks. 

1. Construction: As specified in Paragraph Motor Controller Unit. 

2. Incoming Service Feeder: Cable entering section as shown. 

3. Maximum short-circuit rating of 65,000 amperes. 

4. Mechanical type CU-/AL lugs for 75 degrees C cable. 

H. Feeder Unit and Main Protective Device: 

1. Construction: As specified in Paragraph Motor Controller Unit. 

2. Incoming Service Feeder: Cable entering section as shown. 

3. Molded Case Circuit Breaker: 

a. In accordance with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. 

b. Main and feeder protective device. 

c. UL labeled as suitable for service entrance. 

d. Thermal-magnetic trip and interrupting capacity required for connection 

to system with short circuit capacity indicated. 

e. Indicate tripping by operating-handle position. 

f. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NEC 75 degrees C 

ampacity. 

g. Circuit breakers having a frame size of 150 amperes or less shall be 

molded-case type with thermal magnetic non-interchangeable, trip-free, 

sealed trip units. 

h. Circuit breakers with a frame size of 225 amperes to 1,200 amperes 

shall be molded case with interchangeable thermal and adjustable 

magnetic trip or RMS sensing electronic trip elements. 

i. The interrupting capacity of all main, and feeder branch circuit breakers 

shall be a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Service 

disconnects rated 1000A or more shall provide ground fault protection of 

equipment. 




4. Ground Fault Protection: 


a. Suitable for 480-volt, three-phase, three-wire, solidly grounded wye 

system. 

b. Ground sensors to encircle all phase conductors and neutral conductor 

where used and connected to ground relays with adjustable pickup 

settings and time-current characteristics indicated. 

c. Circuit breaker shunt trip and relay operating from fused 120-volt ac 

control source within control center. 

d. Manufacturers: 

1) Ground Fault System ITE; Ground Shield. 

2) General Electric; Ground Break. 

5. Phase Monitoring Relay: 

I. Instruments: 

a. Three-phase monitoring relay to protect against low voltage, voltage 

unbalance, and phase reversal. 

b. Manufacturer: Furnas; Class 47. 

1. Provide solid state type metering where indicated. Include CT's and PT's of ratios 

as indicated. 

a. Solid state “metering” shall include but not be limited to the following 

functions: 

1) Metering: Device shall monitor Voltage (VLL/VLN), Current 

(Amps per phase), Real Power (W), Reactive Power (VAR) and 

Apparent Power (VA). Device shall have data gathering ability 

for analysis. The device(s) shall conform to the requirements of 

UL 508. 

2) Alarms: Device shall utilize assignable output relays to trigger 

alarms for specific applications. Alarm messages shall be 

displayed on the front panel of the device. Alarm outputs via dry 

contacts shall alarm Over/Under Current, Over/Under Voltage, 

Current Unbalance/Neutral Current, Phase Sequence, 

Over/Under Frequency, Power Factor and Switch Inputs. 

3) Communications: Device shall be able to communicate with 

current and future process control systems using standard 

protocols such as Devicenet, Ethernet, Modbus, Profibus, or as 

called for on project drawings. Front and rear panel 

communications ports shall be available for information access. 

Display of monitored values shall be available both locally and 

remotely. 





J. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be the heavy-duty, oil-tight type, 

sized to 30 mm. Miniature style devices are not acceptable. All devices shall conform to 

the requirements of UL 508. 

1. Lens colors for “run”, “stop”, “on”, “off”, “open”, and “closed” shall be coordinated 

with the District’s requirements. 

2. Pilot lights shall be LED, push-to-test type. 

3. Provide hazardous location type pilot devices in classified locations per the NEC. 

K. Elapsed Time Meters: As specified in Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 

AND METHODS. 

L. Time Delay Relays: As specified in Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 

AND METHODS. 

M. Relays shall be 3 PDT with 10 amp contacts, plug-in type utilizing rectangular blades and 

provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold-down clips. 

N. Reset Timers: As specified in Section 16050, BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND 

METHODS. 

O. Nameplates: 

1. Laminated plastic; white, engraved to black core. 

2. Provide for each motor control center and each unit. 

3. Engrave with inscription shown on single-line diagram. 

4. Provide blank nameplates on spaces for future units. 

5. Attach with stainless steel pan head screws on face of control center. 

P. Factory Testing: NEMA ICS 1, Section 109. 


A. Furnish the following for each MCC as a minimum: 

1. One unit control transformer of each size furnished in magnetic starters installed 

2. Three bezels of each color installed for pilot indicators 

3. One dozen panel lamps 

4. One dozen control fuses of each size installed 

B. Spare parts shall be identified by MCC number, type, size, and manufacturer 




PART 3 – EXECUTION 



A. The installation Contractor shall install equipment in accordance with NEMA ICS 2.3, 

Submittal Drawings, and Manufacturer's Instructions and Recommendations. 

B. Installation Contractor shall secure equipment to mounting pads with anchor bolts of 

sufficient size and number adequate for specified seismic conditions. 

C. Installation Contractor shall install equipment plumb and in longitudinal alignment with 

pad or wall. 

D. Installation Contractor shall coordinate terminal connections with installation of secondary 

feeders. 

E. Installation Contractor shall grout mounting channels into floor or mounting pads. 

F. Installation Contractor shall retighten current-carrying bolted connections and enclosure 

support framing and panels to manufacturer's recommendations. 

G. Motor control centers shall be installed on concrete pads by the installation Contractor. 

After leveling and shimming, the Installation CONTRACTOR shall anchor motor control 

centers to concrete pads, and shall grout so that no space exists between the pad and 

support beams. 

H. The installation CONTRACTOR shall: 

3.2 TESTING 

1. Torque all bus bar bolts to manufacturer's recommendations. Tighten all sheet 

metal and structure assembly bolts. 

2. Adjust all Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) devices to the instantaneous trip setting 

position recommended for the actual horsepower and full load amps of the motor. 

Verify that overload devices are proper for equipment installed; make necessary 

changes in overload devices as required for motors having power factor correcting 

capacitors. 

3. After equipment is installed, touch up scratches and verify that nameplate, and 

other identification is accurate. 

4. Provide high voltage switchboard matting in front of the MCC. The mat shall be 

long enough to cover the full length of each line-up. The mat shall be 1/4 inch thick 

with beveled edges, canvas back, solid type with corrugations running the entire 

length of the mat. The mat shall be guaranteed extra quality, free from cracks, 

blow holes, or other defects detrimental to their mechanical or electrical strength. 

The mat shall meet OSHA requirements and the requirements of ANSI/ASTM D- 

178 J6-7 for Type 2, Class 2 insulating matting. 

A. Factory Test: All motor control centers, micro processor based soft starters and their 

components shall be given manufacturer's standard electrical and mechanical production 

tests and inspections. The tests shall include electrical continuity check, dielectric tests 





for each circuit, and inspection for proper functioning of all components including 

controls, protective devices, metering, and alarm devices. 

B. Field Test MCC: 

1. Visual and mechanical inspection after installation 

a. Inspect for physical damage, proper anchorage, and grounding 

C. Electrical Tests 

b. Verify that the ratings of the solid state overload relays match the motor 

full-load current nameplate data. 

c. Check tightness of bolted connections. 

1. Insulation tests 

a. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase to phase and 

phase to ground for one minute. Test voltage and minimum acceptable 

resistance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

b. Measure insulation resistance of each starter section phase to phase 

and phase to ground with the starter contacts closed and the protective 

device open. Test voltage and minimum acceptable resistance shall be 

in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 

c. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to 

ground 

2. Verify proper operation of control logic in all modes of control. 

3.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

A. Field adjust trip settings of motor starter magnetic-trip-only circuit breakers. 

B. Adjust to approximately Il times motor rated current. 

C. Determine motor rated current from motor nameplate following installation. 

3.4 OVERLOAD RELAY 

A. Adjust overload relays after the actual nameplate full-load current rating of motor has 

been determined. 

3.5 MOTOR DATA 

A. Provide typed, self-adhesive label attached inside each motor starter enclosure door 

displaying the following information: 

1. Motor served by tag number and equipment name. 

2. Nameplate horsepower. 

3. Motor code letter. 




4. Full load amperes. 

5. Service factor. 

6. Installed overload relay heater catalog number. 

3.6 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES 


A. Furnish manufacturer's representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom 

as designated by OWNER, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: 

1. 1 person-day for installation assistance, and inspection of installation. 

2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing. 

3. 1 person-day for plant startup. 






SECTION 16485 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 

The Equipment Covered under PART 1, PART 2 and PART 3 has been pre-purchased by the Owner. 

The Contractor shall install the Owner provide equipment in accordance with the drawings, 

manufacturer’s installation requirements and Parts 1, 2 and 3 of this specification. The Contractor is 

referred to as the “Installing” or “Installation” “Contractor”. The Contractor shall coordinate with equipment 

supplier/manufacturer for installation requirements. 


1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, and install, place in operation 

and field test variable frequency drive(s) (VFD’s). 

B. The variable frequency drive shall be a space vector Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) design. 

Modulation methods which incorporate "gear-changing" techniques are not acceptable. The final 

responsibility of distributor or packager modifications to a third-party standard product will reside 

with the VFD manufacturer. The VFD manufacturer shall have overall responsibility for the 

drives. All drives shall be supplied by one manufacturer. The VFD shall be manufactured within 

the United States of America to alleviate concerns of future serviceability and parts availability. 

C. VFD’s shall be six (6) pulse units. 

1.2 COORDINATION 

A. VFD supplier shall coordinate with the Cooling Tower Supplier for full load current of the cooling 

tower fans. 


A. The entire VFD system as described in section 2.01B shall be factory assembled and system 

tested by the VFD manufacturer to assure a properly coordinated system. 

B. Codes: Provide equipment in full accordance with the latest applicable rules, regulations, and 

standards of: 

1. Local Laws and Ordinances. 

2. State and Federal Laws. 

3. National Electric Code (NEC). 

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 

5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 




7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 

C. The complete drive system shall be UL listed. 

D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. Square D. 

2. Allen-Bradley. 

3. Eaton Electrical. 

4. No Approved “or Equal” 



A. Submit six (6) copies of all submittal information. 

B. Submittals shall be custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer for this specific application. 

C. Submittal information shall include, but not be limited to: 

1. Equipment dimensions, including stub-up locations, shipping splits and shipping weights. 

2. Catalog cuts of major components. 

3. Spare parts list, per Paragraph 3.03. 

4. Certifications, including: 

a. Warranty, per section 1.04. 

b. Efficiencies, per section 2.02.A.1. 

5. Harmonic Distortion Analysis, per section 2.01D. 

































1.6 WARRANTY 







2.1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 

A. Any modifications to a standard product required to meet this specification shall be performed by 

the VFD manufacturer only. Distributor or system integrator changes to the VFD manufacturer's 

product are specifically disallowed. 

B. The VFD system shall consist of a power factor correction / harmonic filter unit, input rectifiergrade 

phase-shifting transformer, 6 pulse converter section, output inverter and control logic 

section, harmonic filtering unit, input line reactor, and output filter. All components listed including 

power factor correction / harmonic filter shall be integral to the VFD lineup, factory wired and 

tested as a complete system. The entire VFD system shall meet the requirements of NEC article 

409 and IEEE 508A for fault current withstand ratings as indicated on the project electrical 

drawings. 

C. Input circuit breaker, interlocked with the enclosure door, with through-the-door handle to provide 

positive disconnect of incoming AC power and shall be capable of being locked in the open 

position. 

D. VFD system shall maintain a 0.95 minimum true power factor throughout the entire speed range. 




2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 

A. Ratings 


1. The drive system shall be 96% efficient at full load and full speed and 95.5% efficient at 51% 

load and 80% speed. Losses to be utilized in drive system efficiency calculation shall include 

input transformer, harmonic filter and power factor correction if applicable, VFD converter and 

output filter if applicable. Auxiliary controls, such as internal VFD control boards, cooling fans or 

pumps, shall be included in all loss calculations. 

2. Rated Input Power: 460 Volts 60 Hz, +10%, -5% at rated load, 3-phase. 

a. Voltage Dip Ride-Through: VFD shall be capable of sustaining continued operation with a 

40% dip in nominal line voltage. Output speed may decline only if current limit rating of VFD 

is exceeded. 

b. Power Loss Ride-through: VFD shall be capable of a minimum 3 cycle power loss ridethrough 

without fault activation. 

3. Output Power: As required by motors supplied. 

4. Ambient Temperature Range: 0 to 40°C. 

5. Elevation: Up to 3300 feet (1000 meters) above MSL without derating. 

6. Atmosphere: Non-condensing relative humidity to 95%. 

7. AC Line Frequency Variation: +/- 3 Hertz. 

8. Power Unit Rating Basis: 110% rated current continuous, 150% rated current for one minute, at 

rated temperature. 

B. Construction 

1. The controller shall produce an adjustable AC voltage/frequency output. It shall have an output 

voltage regulator to maintain correct output V/Hz ratio despite incoming voltage variations. 

2. The controller shall have a continuous output current rating of 100% of motor nameplate 

current. 

3. The converter section shall be 6 pulse minimum utilizing diodes. 

4. The inverter output shall be generated by IGBTs. Pulse Width Modulation strategy will be of the 

space vector type implemented to generate a sine-coded output voltage. The VFD shall not 

induce excessive power losses in the motor. The worst case RMS motor line current measured 

at rated speed, torque and voltage shall not exceed 1.05 times the rated RMS motor current for 

pure sine wave operation. The inverters shall be able to sustain 1600 volt surges. 

5. The controller(s) shall be suitable for use with any standard NEMA-B squirrel-cage induction 

motor(s) having a 1.15 Service Factor or with existing standard NEMA-B squirrel-cage induction 

motor(s) with nameplate data as shown on the plans. Provide drives with dV/dT output filters 

manufactured by Trans-Coil type KLC. At any time in the future, it shall be possible to substitute 

any standard motor (equivalent horsepower, voltage and RPM) in the field. 





6. The control logic section shall be fully digital and not require analog adjustment pots or fixed 

selector resistors. A power failure will not necessitate a reload of any drive parameter or 

configuration. 

7. Minimum Starting Speed: When called to operate, the VFD shall immediately ramp to a 

minimum speed. The minimum speed shall be adjustable but initially set at 60% of maximum 

speed. The 4-20 MA speed signal from the PLC and potentiometer on the front of the drive 

shall modulate the signal between the minimum speed setpoint and the maximum output speed 

of the drive; i.e., at the 4 MA signal, the VFD shall run at the minimum speed. At the 20 MA 

signal, the VFD shall run at full speed. The potentiometer shall also adjust speed between the 

minimum speed setpoint and the maximum running speed. Below the minimum speed setpoint, 

the potentiometer shall have no effect. 

8. All 6-pulse VFD’s shall be provided with 5% input line reactors. 

C. Basic Features 

1 The door of each power unit shall include: a keypad with a manual speed device, "HAND / OFF 

/ REMOTE" mode selector switch, “VFD FAIL” light, VFD "RUNNING" light, fault reset 

pushbutton, “MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE” light, CONTROL POWER ON light, START and 

STOP pushbuttons and a TEST / NORMAL selector switch. All lights shall be LED type. 

2. The VFD shall include a customer selectable automatic restart feature. When enabled, the VFD 

shall automatically attempt to restart after a trip condition resulting from instantaneous 

overcurrent, overvoltage, out of saturation or overload. For safety, the drive shall shut down 

and require manual reset and restart if the automatic reset/restart function (programmable for 

up to 3 attempts) is not successful within a customer programmable time period. Auto-Restart 

shall be programmable to allow for individual fault selection. 

3. A door-mounted membrane keypad with integral 2-line minimum, 24-character LCD display 

shall be furnished, capable of controlling the VFD and setting drive parameters. The keypad 

shall include the following features: 

a. The digital display must present all diagnostic message and parameter values in English 

engineering units when accessed, without the use of codes. 

b. The digital keypad shall allow the operator to enter exact numerical settings in English 

engineering units. A user menu written in plain English (rather than codes) shall be 

provided in software in nonvolatile memory as a guide to parameter setting and resettable 

in the field through the keypad. Multiple levels of password security shall be available to 

protect drive parameters from unauthorized personnel. The drive set up parameters must 

be able to be transferred to new boards to reprogram spare boards. 

c. The following digital door-mounted keypad indications may be selectively displayed: 

1) Speed demand in percent. 

2) Output current in amperes. 

3) Output Frequency in hertz. 

4) Input voltage. 

5) Output voltage. 

6) Total 3-phase KW. 

7) Kilowatt hour meter 




D. Enclosure 

8) Elapsed time running meter. 

9) RPM. 

10) DC bus voltage. 


d. VFD shall have the capability of communicating via an RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 port. 

e. VFD parameters, fault log and diagnostic log shall be downloadable via the RS-232, RS- 

422, or RS-485 port. 

1. All VFD components shall be factory mounted and wired on a dead front, grounded, NEMA-1 

enclosure. Maximum enclosure dimensions for various VFD sizes shall be as follows: 

a. 20 HP: 27 W x 21”D x 48”H 

E. Protective Features and Circuits: The controller shall include the following alarms and protective 

features: 

1. Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip. 

2. Undervoltage and power loss protection. 

3. Power unit overtemperature alarm and protection. Upon sensing an overtemperature condition, 

the VFD is to automatically trip. 

4. Electronic motor inverse time overload protection. 

5. Responsive action to motor winding temperature detectors or thermostatic switches. A dry 

contact (NC) input to the VFD is required. 

6. When power is restored after a complete power outage, the VFD shall be capable of catching 

the motor while it is still spinning and restoring it to proper operating speed without the use of an 

encoder. 

7. The VFD shall be protected from damage due to the following, without requiring an output 

contactor: 

a. Three-phase short circuit on VFD output terminals. 

b. Loss of input power due to opening of VFD input disconnecting device or utility power 

failure during VFD operation. 

c. Loss of one (1) phase of input power. 

8. The VFD shall continue to operate at a reduced capacity under a single-phase fault condition. 

9. The VFD shall be able to withstand the following fault conditions without damage to the power 

circuit components: 

a. Failure to connect a motor to the VFD output. 

b. VFD output open circuit that may occur during operation. 

c. VFD output short circuit that may occur during operation. 

10. Provide input line reactors (5% impedance) when no 12 or 18 pulse transformers are supplied 

or required. 





11. Three phase lightning and surge protection across the line input at each VFD. Lea International 

TVSS #GB-100. 




F. Parameter Settings 


1. The following system configuring settings shall be provided and field adjustable, without 

exception, through the keypad/display unit. Except for Motor Nameplate Data, all parameters 

must be adjustable while the processor is on-line and the drive is running. 

a. Motor Nameplate Data. 

1) Motor frequency. 

2) Number of poles. 

3) Full load speed. 

4) Motor volts. 

5) Motor full load amps. 

6) Motor HP. 

7) Current limit, max. 

b. VFD Configuration Parameters. 

1) Independent accelerate/decelerate rates. 

2) Max/Min speed (frequency). 

3) Catch-a spinning load selection. 

4) No load boost. 

5) Full load boost. 

6) Volts/Hertz ratio. 

7) Overspeed trip. 

8) Overload trip curve selection. 

9) Overload trip time selection. 

c. Automatic VFD Control. 

1) PID utilizing an internal or external setpoint. 

2) Three selectable critical speed avoidance bands with programmable bandwidths. 

3) Auto start functions: On/Off, Delay On/Off. Operable from a 4-20mA signal or from the 

PID output, command, or feedback signal. 

4) Speed Profile: Programmable entry and exit points. 

5) Programmable loss of signal control: Stop, maintain last speed, or default to 

preselected setpoint. 





2. All drive setting adjustments and operation parameters shall be stored in a parameter log which 

lists allowable maximum and minimum points as well as the present set values. This parameter 

log shall be accessible via a RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 serial port as well as on the keypad 

display. 

G. Input/Output Features 

1. Two programmable analog inputs: VFD speed in, spare. 

2. Three programmable analog outputs: VFD speed output, Drive (output) current in Amps, spare. 

3. Two programmable digital inputs: Run, spare. 

4. Ten programmable digital outputs: VFD fault, VFD running, VFD in remote, 6 spare. 

5. One Pot input (three wire control, +10 V, wiper and common). 

6. System Program providing built-in drive control or application specific configuration capability. 

H. Diagnostic Features and Fault Handling 

1. The VFD shall include a comprehensive microprocessor based digital diagnostic system that 

monitors its own control functions and displays faults and operating conditions. 

2. A “Fault Log” shall be accessible via a RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 serial link as well as line-byline 

on the keypad display. The "FAULT LOG" shall record, store, display and output to a serial 

port upon demand, the following for the 64 most recent events: 

a. Date and time of day. 

b. Type of fault. 

c. All faults and events shall be stored and displayed in English, not fault codes. 

3. A "HISTORIC LOG" shall record, store, and output to a RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485 serial link 

port upon demand, the following selectable control variables at 1 msec. intervals for the 58 

intervals immediately preceding and the 20 intervals immediately following a fault trip: 

a. Torque demand. 

b. Torque command. 

c. Torque feedback. 

d. Torque error. 

e. Torque maximum. 

f. Current demand. 

g. Peak current. 

h. Motor current. 




i. DC bus voltage. 

j. Line voltage. 

k. Velocity demand. 

l. Velocity reference. 

m. PI min/max limit. 

n. Boost. 

o. VFD mode (Auto/Manual). 


3.1 FACTORY TESTING 


A. The VFD manufacturer shall provide as a minimum, the following quality assurance steps within 

his factory: 

1. Incoming inspection of components and raw materials based on strategic supplier base and 

experience. Sampling plans based on MIL STD 105E. 

2. MIL STD 45662 calibration system. 

3. All products subject to 100% testing and final inspection; no sampling plans permitted. 

3.2 STARTUP AND TRAINING 

A. VFD manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory technician for startup assistance and 

training. Verification of VFD input harmonic voltage and current distortion limits specified must 

be verified as part of final startup and acceptance. If harmonic distortion requirements are not 

met, it is the responsibility of the VFD supplier to meet the specification at the supplier’s 

expense. A recording type Fluke 41 or equivalent harmonic analyzer displaying individual and 

total harmonic currents and voltages must be utilized. 

B. Furnish manufacturer's representative for the following services at jobsite or classroom as 

designated by OWNER, for minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded: 


1. 1 person-day for installation assistance, and inspection of installation. 

2. 1 person-day for functional and performance testing. 

3. 1 person-day for plant startup. 

A. The following spare parts shall be furnished: 

1. Provide 1 spare VFD 





A. Functional Test: 

1. Conduct on each VFD. 


2. Inspect controller for electrical supply termination connections, interconnections, proper 

installation, and quiet operation. 

3. Vibration Test: Complete assembly, consisting of motor, load, and flexible shafting, 

connected and in normal operation, shall not develop amplitudes of vibration exceeding 

limits recommended by current edition of Hydraulic Institute Standards. 

4. Record test data for report. 

B. Performance Test: 

1. Conduct on each VFD. 

2. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. 

3. Test for continuous 48-hour period without malfunction. 

4. Demonstrate performance by operating the continuous period while varying the application 

load, as the input conditions allow, in order to verify system performance. 

5. Record test data for report. 







SECTION 16950 ELECTRICAL TESTING 




a. 450, Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Large 

lead Storage Batteries for Generator Stations and Substations. 

b. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. 

c. C37.20.1, Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. 

d. C37.20.2, Metal-Clad and Station-Type Cubicle Switchgear. 

e. C37.20.3, Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear. 

f. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge- Protective Devices. 


a. D665, Standard Test Method for Rust Preventing Characteristics of Inhibited 

Mineral Oil in the Presence of Water. 

b. DS77, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating 

Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. 

c. D923, Standard Test Method for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids. 

d. D924, Standard Test Methods for A-Class Characteristics and Relative Permittivity 

(Dielectric Constant) of Electrical Insulating Liquids. 

e. D971, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of 0.1 Against Water by the 

Ring Method. 

f. D974, Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator 

Titration. 

g. D1298, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity), or 

API Gravity of Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer 

Method. 

h. D1500, Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products. 





i. D1524, Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical Insulating 

Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field. 

j. D1533, Standard Test Methods for Water in Insulating Liquids. 

k. D1816, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils 

of Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes. 

l. D2285, Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical Insulating Oils of 

Petroleum Origin Against Water by the Drop- Weight Method. 

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 

a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of Rotating 

Machinery. 

b. 48, Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for High-Voltage Alternating- 

Current Cable Terminators. 

c. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth 

Surface Potentials of a Ground System. 

d. 95, Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of Large AC Rotating 

Machinery with High Direct Voltage. 

e. 118, Standard Test Code for Resistance Measurement. 

f. 400, Guide for Making High-Direct-Voltage Tests on Power Cable Systems in 

the Field. 


a. AB 4, Guideline for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit 

Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications. 

b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. 

c. WC 7, Cross-Linked-Thermosetting-Polyethylene- Wire and Cable for the 

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 

d. WC 8, Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission 

and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 

5. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance Testing 

Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 

6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 

b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces. 






A. Administrative Submittals: Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests: 

1. Schedule for performing inspection and tests. 

2. List of references to be used for each test. 

3. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). 

4. Sample copy of individual device test form. 

5. Sample copy of individual system test form. 

B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit within 30 days after completion of test: 

1. Test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested. 

C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: 

a. In accordance with Section 01430, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. 

b. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by ENGINEER 

and returned, insert a copy of each in operation and maintenance manual. 

1.3 QUALITY' ASSURANCE 

A. Testing Firm Qualifications: 

1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased 

testing authority. 

2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers, of electrical 

equipment and systems being tested. 

3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of 

electrical equipment, installations, and systems. 





4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by National 

Institute for Certification of Engineering Technologists (NICET), or International 

Electrical Testing Association and having a minimum of 5 years testing experience 

on similar projects. 

5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA. 

6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to project at ratio not to exceed two certified to 

one noncertified assistant or apprentice. 

7. Registered Professional Engineer to provide comprehensive project report outlining 

services performed, results of such services, recommendations, actions taken, and 

opinions. 

8. In compliance with OSHA Title 29, Part 1907 criteria for accreditation of testing 

laboratories or a full Member Company of International Electrical Testing 

Association. 

B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to, or greater than, requirements 

established by NETA ATS. 

C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. 

1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment has been installed. 

B. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible. 

C. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment are to be: 

1. Scheduled with ENGINEER prior to de-energization. 

2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the operating plant equipment. 

D. Notify ENGINEER at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical 

equipment. 






3.1 GENERAL 


A. Tests specified in this section are to be performed in accordance with the requirements of 

Section 01650, FACILITY STARTUP. 

B. Tests and inspection shall establish that: 

1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances. 

2. Installation operates properly. 

3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 

4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 

70E, and ANSI C2. 

C. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

D. Set, test, and calibrate protective relays, circuit breakers, fuses, and other applicable devices 

in accordance with values established by the short circuit and coordination study as specified 

in Section 16015, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS. 

E. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts for free mechanical movement. 

F. Adjust adjustable relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

G. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents. 

H. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness. 

I. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored. 

J. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque 

wrench to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified. 





K. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer. 

L. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts. 

M. Inform ENGINEER of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70. 

N. Investigate and repair or replace: 

1. Electrical items that fail tests. 

2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

3. Damaged electrical equipment. 

O. Electrical Enclosures: 

1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 

2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 

3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 

4. Repair or replace, as determined by ENGINEER, door and panel sections having 

dented surfaces. 

5. Repair or replace, as determined by ENGINEER, poor fitting doors and panel 

sections. 

6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices. 

7. Replace missing or damaged hardware. 

8. Finish: 

a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. 

b. If required due to extensive damage, as determined by ENGINEER, refinish the 

entire assembly. 

P. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the 

Contract Documents. 




Q. Replace transformer insulating oil not in compliance with ASTM D923. 

3.2 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES 

A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 

1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces. 

2. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 

3. Proper operation of indicating devices. 

4. Improper blockage of air cooling passages. 

5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 

6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 

7. Check Door and Device Interlocking System By: 

a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position. 


b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 

8. Check Key Interlocking Systems For: 

a. Key captivity when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 

b. Key removal when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 

c. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. 

d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders. 

e. Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders. 

1) Destroy duplicate sets of keys. 

9. Check Nameplates for Proper Identification Of: 

a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. 

b. Pushbutton. 




c. Control switch. 

d. Pilot light. 

e. Control relay. 

f. Circuit breaker. 

g. Indicating meter. 


10. Verify that fuse and circuit breaker ratings, sizes, and types conform to those 

specified, 

11. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance by low resistance ohmmeter 

and calibrated torque wrench thermographic survey applied to bolted joints. 

a. Ohmic value to be zero. 

b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10. 1, unless otherwise 

specified by manufacturer. 

c. Thermographic survey temperature gradient of 2 degrees C, or less. 

12. Check Operation and Sequencing of Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Systems By: 

a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. 

b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. 

c. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions. 

13. Verify performance of each control device and feature. 


a. Compare wiring to local and remote control and protective devices with elementary 

diagrams. 

b. Proper conductor lacing and bundling. 

c. Proper conductor identification. 

d. Proper conductor logs and connections. 

15. Exercise active components. 

16. Perform phasing check on double-ended equipment to ensure proper bus phasing 

from each source. 




B. Electrical Tests: 

1. Insulation Resistance Tests: 


a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.1.1. 

b. Each phase of each bus section. 

c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. 

d. With switches and breakers open. 

e. With switches and breakers closed. 

f. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. 

g. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by 

manufacturer. 

2. Overpotential Tests: 

a. Applied ac or dc voltage and test procedure in accordance with ANSI C37.20.3 and 

NEMA PB 2. 

b. Each phase of each bus section. 

c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. 

d. Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis. 

3. Current Injection Tests: 

a. For entire current circuit in each section. 

b. Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere. 

c. Test current at each device. 


a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. 

b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. 

5. Operational Test: 

a. Initiate control devices. 

b. Check proper operation of control system in each section. 




3.3 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS 


1. Physical and insulator damage. 

2. Proper winding connections. 


3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1, unless otherwise 


4. Defective wiring. 

5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices. 

6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing. 

7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts. 

8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages. 

9. Verify that tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal 

operating conditions. 

10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after 

energization and prior to loading. 



a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.2.3 for 

each: 

1) Winding-to-winding. 

2) Winding-to-ground, 

b. l0-minute test duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 

minutes. 

c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.2.4. 





d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, 

ohmic values established by manufacturer. 

e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings. 

2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested 

by manufacturer. 

3.4 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM 


1. Inspect Each Individual Exposed Power Cable No. 6 and Larger For: 

a. Physical damage. 

b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram. 

c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending 

radius where applicable. 

d. Color coding conformance with specifications. 

e. Proper circuit identification. 

2. Mechanical Connections For: 

a. Proper lug type for conductor material. 

b. Proper lug installation. 

c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10. 1, unless otherwise 


3. Shielded Instrumentation Cables For: 

a. Proper shield grounding. 

b. Proper terminations. 

c. Proper circuit identification. 

4. Control Cables For: 

a. Proper termination. 

b. Proper circuit identification. 





5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify that neutrals and grounds are 

terminated for correct operation of protective devices. 

B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 6 and Larger: 


a. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors per IEEE 

118 procedures for 1 minute. 

b. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type. 

c. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 

d. Utilize 1,000V dc megohmmeter for 600V insulated conductors. 

2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections. 

3.5 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES, 25 KV MAXIMUM 


1. Inspect Each Individual Exposed Cable For: 

a. Physical damage plus jacket and insulation condition. 

b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram. 

c. Proper shield grounding. 

d. Proper cable support. 

e. Proper cable termination. 

f. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending 

radius. 

g. Proper arc and fireproofing in common cable areas. 

h. Proper circuit and phase identification. 

2. Mechanical Connections For: 

a. Proper lug type for conductor material. 

b. Proper lug installation. 





c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10. 1, unless otherwise 

specified by manufacturers. 

3. Conductors Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify that neutrals and grounds 

are terminated for correct operation of protective devices. 



a. Utilize 10,000-volt megohmmeter for 25 kV conductors. 

b. Test each cable individually with remaining cables and shields grounded. 

c. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors in 

accordance with IEEE 118 procedures for 1 minute. 

d. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type. 

e. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 

2. Shield Continuity Tests: 

a. By ohmmeter method on each section of conductor. 

b. Investigate values in excess of 10 ohms per 1,000 feet of conductors. 

3. High Potential dc Tests: 

a. In accordance with NEMA WC 8 for EPR insulated conductors. 

b. Each conductor section tested with: 

1) Splices and terminations in-place but disconnected from equipment. 

2) Remaining conductors and shields grounded in accordance with IEEE 400. 

c. Apply maximum dc test voltage as per manufacturer’s recommendation. 

d. Measure only the leakage current associated with conductor. 

e. Utilize guard ring or field reduction sphere to suppress corona at disconnected 

terminations. 

f. Maximum test voltage shall not exceed limits for terminators specified in IEEE 48 

or manufacturer's specifications. 

g. Apply test voltage in a minimum of five equal increments until maximum acceptable 

test voltage is reached. 




1) Increments not to exceed ac voltage rating of conductor. 


2) Record dc leakage current at each step after a constant stabilization time 

consistent with system charging current. 

h. Raise conductor to specified maximum test voltage and hold for 15 minutes, or as 

specified by conductor manufacturer. Record dc leakage current at 30 seconds 

and 1 minute and at 1-minute intervals, thereafter. 

i. Immediately following test, ground conductor for adequate time period to drain 

insulation stored charge. 

j. Test results evaluated on a pass/fail basis. 

3.6 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM 


1. Proper blade pressure and alignment. 

2. Proper operation of switch operating handle. 

3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse. 

4. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse. 

5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1. 

6. Proper phase barrier material and installation. 

7. Verify that fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram. 

8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify electrical and mechanical interlocking 

system operation and sequencing. 



a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.2. 

b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. 





c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by 

manufacturer. 

2. Contact Resistance Tests: 

a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder. 

b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles or similar switches. 

3.7 MEDIUM VOLTAGE METAL ENCLOSED AIR SWITCHES 


1. Proper blade pressure, alignment, and arch interrupter operation. 

2. Proper operation of operating mechanism. 

3. Proper contact condition. 

4. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse. 

5. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse. 

6. Bus and cable connection tightness. 

7. Proper phase barrier material and installation. 

8. Proper operation of indicating devices. 

9. Installation of expulsion limiting devices on expulsion type element holders. 

10. Verify that fuse links and types correspond to one-line diagram. 

11. Perform mechanical operational test to verify electrical and mechanical interlocking 

system operation and sequencing. 

12. Perform phasing check on double-ended air switch arrangements to ensure proper 

bus phasing from each source. 







a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS Table 10.2. 

b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each pole. 

c. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by 

manufacturer. 


a. Contact resistance in microhms across each switch blade and fuse holder. 

b. Investigate values exceeding 500 microhms or deviation of 50 percent or more 

from adjacent poles or similar switches. 


a. Applied ac or dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS Table 7.1.2. 

b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. 

c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis. 

3.8 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS 

A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 70 amperes and larger and to 

motor circuit protector breakers rated 50 amperes and larger. 

B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 

1. Proper mounting. 

2. Proper conductor size. 

3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram. 

4. Cracked casings. 

5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1. 




6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation. 


7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line 

diagram. 

8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors. 

C. Electrical Tests: 


a. Utilize 1,000-volt dc megohmmeter for 480- and 600-volt circuit breakers and 500volt 

dc megohmmeter for 240-volt circuit breakers. 

b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. 

c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. 

d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 10.2. 


a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. 

b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar 

breakers. 

3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: 

a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. 

b. Short-time pickup and delay. 

c. Ground fault pickup and delay. 

d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. 

e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's 

published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. 

f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. 

g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, 

Table 5-4. 




3.9 PROTECTIVE RELAYS 


1. Visually Check Each Relay For: 

a. Tight cover gasket and proper seal. 

b. Unbroken cover glass. 

c. Condition of spiral spring and contacts. 

d. Disc clearance. 

e. Condition of case shorting contacts if present. 

2. Mechanically Check Each Relay For: 

a. Freedom of movement. 

b. Proper travel and alignment. 

3. Verify That Each Relay: 

a. Complies with Contract Documents and application. 

b. Is set in accordance with recommended settings. 



1. Insulation resistance test on each circuit to frame except for solid state devices. 

2. Tests on Nominal Recommended Setting For: 

a. Pickup parameters on each operating element. 

b. Timing at three points on time-current curve. 

c. Pickup target and seal-in units. 

d. Special tests as required to check operation of restraint, directional, and other 

elements in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. 

3. Phase angle and magnitude contribution tests on differential and directional relays 

after energization to vectorially verify proper polarity and connections. 




4. Current Injection Tests: 

a. For entire current circuit in each section. 

b. Secondary injection for current flow of 1 ampere. 

c. Test current at each device. 

3.10 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS 


1. Visually Check Current, Potential, and Control Transformers For: 

a. Cracked insulation. 

b. Broken leads or defective wiring. 

c. Proper connections. 


d. Adequate clearances between primary and secondary circuit wiring. 

2. Verify Mechanically That: 

a. Grounding and shorting connections have good contact. 

b. Withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation, when applicable, operate 

properly. 

3. Verify proper primary and secondary fuse sizes for potential transformers. 


1. Current Transformer Tests: 

a. Insulation resistance test of transformer and wiring-to-ground at 1,000 volts dc for 

30 seconds. 

b. Polarity test. 

2. Potential Transformer Tests: 

a. Insulation resistance test at test voltages in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 

7.1.1 for 1 minute on: 

1) Winding-to-winding. 




3.11 METERING 

2) Winding-to-ground. 


b. Polarity test to verify polarity marks or H1-X1 relationship as applicable. 

3. Insulation resistance measurement on instrument transformer shall not be less than 

that shown in NETA ATS, Table 7.1.1. 


1. Verify meter connections in accordance with appropriate diagrams. 

2. Verify meter multipliers. 

3. Verify that meter types and scales conform to Contract Documents. 

4. Check calibration of meters at cardinal points. 

5. Check calibration of electrical transducers. 

3.12 GROUNDING SYSTEMS 


1. Equipment and circuit grounds in motor control centers, panelboards, switchboards, 

and switchgear assemblies for proper connection and tightness. 

2. Ground bus connections in motor control centers, panelboards, switchboards, and 

switchgear assemblies for proper termination and tightness. 

3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding. 

4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness. 

5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully 

filled and proper bonding was obtained. 





1. Fall-Of-Potential Test: 


a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground 

system's resistance. 

b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 5 

ohms. 

2. Two-Point Direct Method Test: 

a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2. 1.1 for measurement of ground 

resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral 

and derived neutral points. 

b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 

0.50 ohm. 

3.13 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL 


1. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 

2. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices. 

3. Proper overload protection for each motor. 

4. Improper blockage of air cooling passages. 

5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 

6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 

7. Check Door and Device Interlocking System By: 

a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OFF or OPEN position. 

b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 

8. Check Key Interlocking Systems For: 

a. Key captivity when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 




. Key removal when device is in OFF or OPEN position. 

c. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. 

d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders. 


e. Existence of other keys capable of operating lock cylinders; destroy duplicate sets 

of keys. 

9. Check Nameplates for Proper Identification Of: 

a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. 

b. Pushbuttons. 

c. Control switches. 

d. Pilot lights. 

e. Control relays. 

f. Circuit breakers. 

g. Indicating meters. 

10. Verify that fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 

11. Verify that current and potential transformer ratios conform to Contract Documents. 

12. Check Bus Connections for High Resistance by Low Resistance Ohmmeter and 

Thermographic Survey: 

a. Ohmic value to be zero. 

b. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.1, unless otherwise 


c. Thermographic survey temperature gradient of 2 degrees C, or less. 

13. Check Operation and Sequencing of Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Systems By: 

a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. 

b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. 

c. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions. 

14. Verify performance of each control device and feature furnished as part of the motor 

control center. 




15. 15. Control Wiring: 


a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with 

elementary diagrams. 

b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling. 

c. Check for proper conductor identification. 

d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections. 

16. Exercise active components. 

17. Inspect Contactors For: 

a. Correct mechanical operations. 

b. Correct contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure. 

c. Correct torque of all connections. 

18. Compare overload heater rating with full-load current for proper size. 

19. Compare motor protector and circuit breaker with motor characteristics and power 

factor correction capacitors for proper size. 

20. Perform phasing check on double-ended motor control centers to ensure proper bus 

phasing from each source. 



a. Applied megohmmeter dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 10.2. 

b. Bus section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute on each phase. 

c. Contactor phase-to-ground and across open contacts for 1 minute on each phase. 

d. Starter section phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground on each phase with starter 

contacts closed and protective devices open. 

e. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 10.2. 


a. Maximum applied ac or dc voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 7.1.2. 





b. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute for each phase of each bus 

section. 

c. Test results evaluated on pass/fail basis. 

3. Current Injection Through Overload Unit at 300 Percent of Motor Full-Load Current 

and Monitor Trip Time: 

a. Trip time in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 

b. Investigate values in excess of 120 seconds. 

4. ontrol Wiring Tests: 

a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. 

b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. 

c. Insulation resistance test at 1,000 volts dc on control wiring except that connected 

to solid state components. 

1) Insulation resistance to be 1 megohm minimum. 

5. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation. 

3.14 LOW VOLTAGE SURGE ARRESTORS 


1. Adequate clearances between arrestors and enclosures. 

2. Ground connections to ground bus or electrode. 


1. Varistor Type Arrestors: 

a. Clamping voltage test. 

b. Rated RMS voltage test. 

c. Rated dc voltage test. 

d. Variator arrester test values in accordance with ANSI C62.33, Sections 4.4 and 

4.7. 




3.15 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY 


A. Provide a thermographic survey of connections associated with incoming service conductors, 

bus work, and branch feeder conductors No. 2 and larger at each: 

1. Medium voltage switchgear and transformer. 

2. Switchboard. 

3. Low voltage motor control center. 

4. Panelboard. 

B. Provide a thermographic survey of feeder conductors No. 2 and larger terminating at: 

1. Motors rated 30 horsepower and larger. 

2. Medium and low voltage disconnect switches. 

3. Transfer switches. 

4. Engine-generators. 

C. Remove necessary enclosure metal panels and covers prior to performing survey. 

D. Perform with equipment energized during periods of maximum possible loading. 

E. Do not perform survey on equipment operating at less than 20 percent of rated connected 

operating load. 

F. Utilize Thermographic Equipment Capable Of: 

1. Detecting emitted radiation. 

2. Converting detected radiation to visual signal. 

3. Detecting 1 degree C temperature difference between subject area and reference 

point of 30 degrees C. 

G. Temperature Gradients Of: 





1. 3 degrees C to 7 degrees C indicates possible deficiency that warrants investigation. 

2. 7 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicates deficiency that is to be corrected as time 

permits. 

3. 16 degrees C and above indicates deficiency that is to be corrected immediately. 

H. Provide Written Report Of: 

1. Areas surveyed and the resultant temperature gradients. 

2. Locations of areas having temperature gradients of 3 degrees C or greater. 

3. Cause of heat rise and actions taken to correct the cause of heat rise. 

4. Detected phase unbalance.

Technical Specifications Permit Set Terminal Cooling ... - Morganti

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?